Contents

Volvo V40 2019 Owners Manual PDF

1 of 426
1 of 426

Summary of Content for Volvo V40 2019 Owners Manual PDF

V40 OWNER'S MANUAL

VLKOMMEN!

We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo. The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your pas- sengers. Volvo strives to design one of the safest cars in the world. Your Volvo is also designed to meet applicable safety and environmental requirements.

To increase your enjoyment of your Volvo, we recommend that you read the instructions and maintenance information in this owner's manual.

The owner's manual is also available as a mobile app (Volvo Manual) and on the Volvo Cars support site (support.volvocars.com).

We encourage everyone to always wear their seatbelt in this and other cars. Please do not drive if you are under the influence of alcohol or medication or have an impaired ability to drive in some other way.

2

INTRODUCTION This is how you find owner's information 12

Digital owner's manual in the car 13

Volvo Cars support site 15

Reading the owner's manual 16

Recording data 19

Accessories and extra equipment 20

Volvo ID 20

Environmental philosophy 22

The owner's manual and the environment 25

Laminated glass 25

SAFETY General information on seatbelts 28

Seatbelt - putting on 29

Seatbelt - loosening 30

Seatbelt - pregnancy 30

Seatbelt reminder 31

Seatbelt tensioner 31

Safety - warning symbol 32

Airbag system 33

Airbags on driver's side 34

Passenger airbag 35

Passenger airbag - activating/deac- tivating*

36

Side airbag (SIPS) 38

Inflatable Curtain (IC) 39

General information on WHIPS (whiplash protection)

39

WHIPS - seating position 40

General information on safety mode 41

Safety mode - attempting to start the car 42

Safety mode - moving the car 43

Pedestrian airbag 43

Pedestrian airbag - moving the car 44

Pedestrian airbag - folding up 45

General information on child safety 45

Child seats 47

Child seats - location 52

Child seat - ISOFIX 53

ISOFIX - size classes 53

ISOFIX - types of child seat 55

Child seats - upper mounting points 57

TABLE OF CONTENTS

3

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Instruments and controls, left-hand drive car - overview

60

Instruments and controls, right-hand drive car - overview

63

Combined instrument panel 66

Analogue combined instrument panel - overview

66

Digital combined instrument panel - overview

67

Eco guide & Power guide* 70

Combined instrument panel - mean- ing of indicator symbols

71

Combined instrument cluster - meaning of warning symbols

73

Outside temperature gauge 75

Trip meter 75

Clock 75

Combined instrument panel - license agreement

76

Symbols in the display 77

Volvo Sensus 79

Key positions 80

Key positions - functions at different levels

81

Seats, front 82

Seats, front - electrically operated 84

Seats, rear 85

Steering wheel 87

Light switches 88

Position lamps 90

Daytime running lights 90

Tunnel detection* 91

Main/dipped beam 91

Active main beam* 92

Active bending lights* 94

Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pattern 95

Rear fog lamp 98

Brake lights 98

Hazard warning flashers 99

direction indicators 99

Interior lighting 100

Home safe lighting 102

Approach light duration 102

Wipers and washers 102

Power windows 104

Door mirrors 106

Windows and door mirrors - heating 107

Rearview mirror - interior 108

Glass roof* 109

Compass* 109

Menu navigation - combined instru- ment panel

110

Menu overview - analogue combined instrument panel

111

Menu overview - digital combined instrument panel

111

Messages 112

Messages - handling 113

MY CAR 113

Trip computer 114

Trip computer - analogue combined instrument panel

116

Trip computer - digital combined instrument panel

118

Trip computer - trip statistics* 120

4

CLIMATE CONTROL General information on climate control 122

Actual temperature 123

Sensors - climate control 123

Air quality 123

Air quality - passenger compartment filter 124

Air quality - Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)*

124

Air quality - IAQS* 124

Air quality - material 125

Menu settings - climate control 125

Air distribution in the passenger compartment

125

Electronic climate control - ECC* 127

Electronic temperature control - ETC 128

Heated front seats* 129

Heated rear seat* 129

Fan 130

Auto-regulation 130

Temperature control in the passen- ger compartment

131

Air conditioning 131

Demisting and defrosting the windscreen 132

Air distribution - recirculation 133

Air distribution - table 134

Engine block and passenger com- partment heater*

136

Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - direct start

137

Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - immediate stop

138

Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - timer

138

Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - messages

139

Additional heater* 140

Fuel-driven additional heater* 140

Electric additional heater* 141

LOADING AND STORAGE Storage spaces 144

Storage compartment drivers side 146

Tunnel console 146

Tunnel console - armrest 146

Glovebox 147

Inlaid mats* 147

Vanity mirror 147

Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets 148

Loading 148

Loading - long load 149

Roof load 150

Load retaining eyelets 150

Loading - bag holder 150

Loading - folding bag holder* 151

12 V socket - cargo area 151

Cargo net* 152

Hat shelf 153

5

LOCKS AND ALARM Remote control key 156

Remote control key - losing 156

Remote control key - personalisation* 157

Locking/unlocking - indicator 158

Remote control key - electronic immobiliser

159

Remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking system*

159

Remote control key - functions 160

Remote control key - range 161

Remote control key with PCC* - unique functions

161

Remote control key with PCC* - range 162

Detachable key blade 163

Detachable key blade - detaching/ attaching

163

Detachable key blade - unlocking doors 164

Remote control key/PCC - replacing the battery

164

Keyless drive* 165

Keyless Drive* - range 166

Keyless Drive* - secure handling of the remote control key

166

Keyless Drive* - interference to remote control key function

167

Keyless Drive* - locking 167

Keyless Drive* - unlocking 168

Keyless Drive* - unlocking with the key blade

168

Keyless Drive* - lock settings 169

Keyless Drive* - antenna location 169

Locking/unlocking - from the outside 170

Manual locking of the door 170

Locking/unlocking - from the inside 171

Global opening 172

Locking/unlocking - glovebox 172

Locking/unlocking - tailgate 172

Locking/unlocking - fuel filler flap 174

Deadlocks* 174

Child safety locks - manual activation 176

Child safety locks - electrical activation* 176

Alarm* 177

Alarm indicator* 178

Alarm* - automatic re-arming 178

Alarm* - automatic arming 179

Alarm* - remote control key not working 179

Alarm signals* 179

Reduced alarm level* 180

Type approval - remote control key system

180

DRIVER SUPPORT Adjustable steering force* 184

Electronic stability control (ESC) - general

184

Electronic stability control (ESC) - operation

186

Electronic stability control (ESC) - symbols and messages

187

Speed limiter* 189

Speed limiter* - getting started 189

Speed limiter* - changing speed 190

Speed limiter - temporary deactiva- tion and standby mode*

191

Speed limiter* - alarm for speed exceeded

192

Speed limiter* - deactivation 192

Cruise control* 192

Cruise control* - managing speed 193

Cruise control* temporary deactiva- tion and standby mode

195

Cruise control* - resume set speed 196

Cruise control* - deactivate 197

Distance Warning* 197

Distance Warning* - limitations 199

Distance Warning* - symbols and messages

200

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* 201

6

Adaptive cruise control* - function 202

Adaptive cruise control* - overview 203

Adaptive cruise control* - managing speed

204

Adaptive cruise control* - set time interval

205

Adaptive cruise control* - temporary deactivation, and standby mode

206

Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking another vehicle

207

Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate 207

Adaptive Cruise Control* - queue assistance

208

Adaptive cruise control* - switch cruise control functionality

210

Adaptive cruise control* - fault trac- ing and action

211

Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and messages

212

Radar sensor 214

Radar sensor - limitations 214

Type approval - radar system 216

City Safety 220

City Safety - function 221

City Safety - operation 221

City Safety - limitations 222

City Safety - laser sensor 224

City Safety - symbols and messages 226

Collision warning system* 227

Collision warning system* - function 228

Collision warning system* - detection of cyclists

229

Collision warning system* - detection of pedestrians

230

Collision warning system* - operation 231

Collision warning system* - limitations 233

Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations

234

Collision warning system* - symbols and messages

235

BLIS 237

BLIS - operation 238

CTA* 239

BLIS and CTA - symbols and messages 241

Road Sign Information* (RSI) 242

Road Sign Information (RSI)* - operation 243

Road Sign Information* (RSI) - limitations 245

Driver Alert System* 245

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* 246

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation 247

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and messages

248

Lane assistance* 249

Lane Keeping Aid - function 249

Lane Keeping Aid - operation 251

Lane Keeping Aid - limitations 251

Lane Keeping Aid - symbols and messages

253

Park Assist* 254

Park assist syst* - function 254

Park assist syst* - backward 255

Park assist syst* - forward 256

Park assist syst* - fault indication 257

Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors 257

Park assist camera 258

Park assist camera - settings 261

Park assist camera - limitations 262

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* 262

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - function 263

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - operation 264

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - limitations 266

Active Park Assist (PAP)* - symbols and messages

267

7

STARTING AND DRIVING Starting the engine 270

Switching off the engine 271

Steering lock 271

Jump starting 271

Gearboxes 273

Manual gearbox 273

Gear shift indicator* 274

Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* 274

Gear selector inhibitor 277

Hill start assist (HSA)* 278

Start/Stop* 279

Start/Stop* - function and operation 279

Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop 281

Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts 282

Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-start

283

Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gearbox

284

Start/Stop* - symbols and messages 285

Drive mode ECO* 287

Foot brake 289

Foot brake - anti-lock braking system 290

Foot brake - emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers

290

Foot brake - emergency brake assistance 291

Parking brake 291

Driving in water 292

Overheating 293

Driving with open tailgate 293

Overload - starter battery 294

Preparations for a long trip 294

Winter driving 295

Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing 295

Fuel filler flap - manual opening 296

Filling up with fuel 296

Fuel - handling 297

Fuel - petrol 297

Fuel - diesel 298

Catalytic converters 300

Filling with fuel - with a fuel can 300

Diesel particle filter (DPF) 301

Emission control with AdBlue 301

Handling AdBlue 302

AdBlue checking and topping up 303

Economical driving 304

Driving with a trailer 305

Driving with a trailer - manual gearbox 307

Driving with a trailer - automatic gearbox 307

Towbar* 308

Detachable towbar* - storage 308

Detachable towbar* - specifications 309

Detachable towbar* - attachment/ removal

310

Trailer Stability Assist - TSA 312

Towing 313

Towing eye 314

Recovery 315

8

WHEELS AND TYRES Tyres - maintenance 318

Tyres - direction of rotation 319

Tyres - tread wear indicators 320

Tyres - air pressure 320

Wheel and wheel rim dimensions 321

Tyres - dimensions 321

Tyres - load index 322

Tyres - speed ratings 322

Wheel nuts 323

Winter tyres 324

Spare wheel* 324

Changing wheels - taking out the spare wheel*

325

Changing wheels - removing wheels 326

Changing wheels - fitting 328

Warning triangle 329

Jack* 330

First aid kit* 330

Tyre monitoring (TM)* 330

Emergency puncture repair* 332

Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview

333

Emergency puncture repair* - operation 334

Emergency puncture repair* - rechecking 336

Inflating tyres with compressor from the emergency puncture repair kit*

337

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Volvo service programme 340

Book service and repair* 340

Raising the car 343

Bonnet - opening and closing 345

Engine compartment - overview 345

Engine compartment - checking 346

Engine oil - general 346

Engine oil - checking and filling 347

Coolant - level 349

Brake and clutch fluid - level 350

Climate control system - fault tracing and repair

351

Lamp replacement - general 351

Lamp replacement - location of front lamps

352

Lamp replacement - headlamps 353

Lamp replacement - cover for main/ dipped beam bulbs

354

Lamp replacement - dipped beam 354

Lamp replacement - main beam 355

Lamp replacement - direction indica- tors front

355

Lamp replacement - position lamps, front 355

Lamp replacement - daytime running lights

356

9

Lamp replacement - location of rear lamps

356

Lamp replacement - direction indica- tors rear, brake lights and reversing lamp

357

Lamp replacement - rear fog lamp 357

Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting 358

Lamps - specifications 358

Wiper blades 359

Washer fluid - filling 361

Starter battery - general 362

Battery - symbols 364

Starter battery - replacement 364

Battery - Start/Stop 365

Electrical system 367

Fuses - general 367

Fuses - in engine compartment 368

Fuses - under glovebox 371

Fuses - under the right-hand front seat 374

Car wash 376

Polishing and waxing 378

Water and dirt-repellent coating 379

Rustproofing 379

Cleaning the interior 380

Paint damage 381

SPECIFICATIONS Type designations 384

Dimensions 387

Weights 388

Towing capacity and towball load 389

Engine specifications 391

Engine oil - adverse driving conditions 393

Engine oil - grade and volume 394

Coolant - grade and volume 396

Transmission fluid - grade and volume 397

Brake fluid - grade and volume 398

Fuel tank - volume 399

Tank volume for AdBlue 400

Air conditioning, fluid - volume and grade 400

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions 402

Wheels and tyres - approved dimensions 406

Load index and speed rating 408

Tyres - approved tyre pressures 410

ALPHABETICAL INDEX Alphabetical Index 411

INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION

12

This is how you find owner's information Owner's information is available in several differ- ent product formats, both digital and printed. The owner's manual is available in the car's screen, as a mobile app and on the Volvo Cars support site. There is a Quick Guide and a sup- plement to the owner's manual available in the glovebox, with specifications and fuse informa- tion, amongst other things. A printed owner's manual can be ordered.

The car's screen1

A digital version of the owner's manual is available in the car's screen. Press the MY CAR but- ton in the centre console, press OK/MENU and select Owner's manual. The infor- mation is searchable and can

also be subdivided into categories.

Read more in the Digital owner's manual in the car.

Mobile app In App Store or Google Play, search for "Volvo Manual", download the app to your smartphone or tablet and select the car.

The app contains video tutorials as well as options for visual navigation with exte- rior and interior images of the car. It is easy to navigate between the different sections in the owner's manual and the content is searchable. Read more about Owner's Manual in mobile devi- ces.

Volvo Cars support site Go to support.volvocars.com and select your country. Here you can find owner's manuals, both online and in PDF format. On the Volvo Cars support site there are also video tutorials and further information and

help regarding your Volvo and your car owner- ship. The page is available for most markets. Read more on the Volvo Cars support site.

Printed information There is a supplement to the owner's manual2 in the glove- box that contains information on fuses and specifications, as well as a summary of important and practical information.

There is also a Quick Guide available in printed format that helps you to get started with the most commonly used functions in the car.

Depending on equipment level selected, market, etc. additional owner's information may also be available in printed format in the car.

A printed owner's manual and associated supple- ment can be ordered. Contact a Volvo dealer to order. See how the owner's manual is structured in Reading the owner's manual.

1 A complete printed manual is included with the car for markets without owner's manual in the screen. 2 A complete printed manual is included with the car for markets without owner's manual in the screen.

INTRODUCTION

}}

13

Changing the language in the car's screen Changing the language in the car's display may mean that some information does not correspond to national or local laws and regulations. Don't change to a language that's difficult to under- stand, it may then be difficult to find your way back in the structure on the screen.

IMPORTANT

The driver is always responsible that the vehi- cle is driven safely in traffic and that applica- ble laws and regulations are followed. It is also important that the car is maintained and handled in accordance with Volvo's recom- mendations in the owner's information.

If there should be a difference between the information in the screen and the printed information then it is always the printed infor- mation that applies.

Related information Digital owner's manual in the car (p. 13)

Volvo Cars support site (p. 15)

Reading the owner's manual (p. 16)

Digital owner's manual in the car The owner's manual can be read on the screen

in the car3. The content is searchable and it is easy to navigate between different sections.

Open the digital owner's manual - press the MY CAR button in the centre console, press OK/ MENU and select Owner's manual.

For basic navigation, see Operating the system. See below for a more detailed description.

Owner's manual, start page.

There are four options for finding information in the digital owner's manual:

Search - Search function for finding an arti- cle.

Categories - All articles sorted into catego- ries.

Favourites - Quick access to favourite- bookmarked articles.

Quick Guide - A selection of articles for common functions.

Select the information symbol in the lower right- hand corner in order to obtain information about the digital owner's manual.

NOTE

The digital owner's manual is not available while driving.

Search

Searching using the character wheel.

Character list.

Changing the input mode (see following table).

3 Applies to certain car models.

||

INTRODUCTION

14

Use the character wheel to enter a search term, e.g. "seatbelt".

1. Turn TUNE to the desired letter, press OK/ MENU to confirm. The number and letter buttons on the control panel in the centre console can also be used.

2. Continue with the next letter and so on.

3. To change the input mode to numbers or special characters, or to perform a search, turn TUNE to one of the options (see explan- ation in the following table) in the list for changing the input mode (2), press OK/ MENU.

123/AB C

Change between letters and num- bers with OK/MENU.

MORE Change to special characters with OK/MENU.

OK Perform the search. Turn TUNE to select a search result article, press OK/MENU to go to the article.

a|A Changes between lowercase and uppercase letters with OK/MENU.

| | } Changes from the character wheel to the search field. Move the cur- sor with TUNE. Delete any mis- spelling with EXIT. To return to the character wheel, press OK/MENU.

Note that the digit and letter but- tons on the control panel can be used for editing in the search field.

Enter with the numerical keyboard

Numerical keyboard.

Another way of entering characters is to use the centre console's buttons 0-9, * and #.

When e.g. 9 is pressed, a bar appears with all characters4 under the button, e.g. W, x, y, z and 9. Quick presses on the button move the cursor through these characters.

Stop with the cursor on the desired character in order to select it - the character is shown on the enter line.

Delete/undo using EXIT.

To enter a number, hold in the corresponding number key.

Categories The articles in the owner's manual are structured into main categories and subcategories. The same article can be in several appropriate cate- gories in order to be found more easily.

Turn TUNE to navigate in the category tree and press OK/MENU to open a category - selected

- or article - selected . Press EXIT to go back to the previous view.

Favourites Located here are the articles that are saved as favourites. To select an article as a favourite, see the heading "Navigating in an article" below.

Turn TUNE to navigate in the favourite list and press OK/MENU to open an article. Press EXIT to go back to the previous view.

4 The character for each button may vary depending on market/country/language.

INTRODUCTION

}}

* Option/accessory. 15

Quick Guide Located here is a selection of articles for getting to know the car's most common functions. The articles can also be accessed via categories, but are collected here for quick access.

Turn TUNE to navigate in the Quick Guide and press OK/MENU to open an article. Press EXIT to go back to the previous view.

Navigating in an article

Home - leads to the start page for the owner's manual.

Favourite - adds/removes an article as a favourite. You can also press the FAV button in the centre console to add/remove an arti- cle as a favourite.

Highlighted link - leads to linked article.

Special texts - if the article contains warn- ings, important or note texts then an associ-

ated symbol is shown here as well as the number of such texts in the article.

Turn TUNE to navigate between the links or scroll in an article. When the screen has scrolled to the start/end of an article the home and favourite options are accessed by scrolling a fur- ther step up/down. Press OK/MENU to activate the selection/highlighted link. Press EXIT to go back to the previous view.

Related information Volvo Cars support site (p. 15)

Volvo Cars support site More information on your car is available on the Volvo Cars website and support site.

Support on the Internet

Go to support.volvocars.com or use the QR code below to visit the page. The support page is avail- able for most markets.

QR code that leads to the support page.

The information on the support page is searcha- ble and can also be subdivided into different cat- egories. Available here is support for options rela- ted to e.g. Internet connected services and func- tions, Volvo On Call*, the navigation system* and apps. Video and step-by-step instructions explain different procedures, e.g. how the car is con- nected to the Internet via a mobile phone.

Downloadable information from the support page

Maps For cars equipped with Sensus Navigation*, there is the facility to download maps from the support page.

||

INTRODUCTION

* Option/accessory.16

Apps For selected Volvo models from model year 2014 and 2015, the owner's manual is available in the form of an app. The Volvo On Call* app can also be accessed from here.

Owner's manuals from previous model years Owner's manuals from previous model years are available here in PDF format. The Quick Guide and supplement can also be accessed from the support page. Select car model and model year in order to download the publication required.

Contact On the support page there is contact information for customer support and the nearest Volvo dealer.

Log in to the Volvo Cars website Create a personal Volvo ID and log in to www.volvocars.com. Once you are logged in you can get an overview of service, agreements and warranties, amongst other things. There is also information here about accessories and software adapted for your car model.

Related information Volvo ID (p. 20)

Reading the owner's manual A good way of getting to know your new car is to read the owner's manual, ideally before your first journey.

Reading the owner's manual is a good way to become familiar with new functions, get advice on how best to handle the car in different situa- tions and learn how to make the best use of all the car's features. Please pay attention to the safety instructions contained in the owner's man- ual.

Development work is constantly in progress to improve our product. Modifications may mean that information, descriptions and illustrations in the owner's manual differ from the equipment in the car. We reserve the right to make modifica- tions without prior notice.

Volvo Car Corporation

Owner's Manual in mobile devices

NOTE

The Owner's manual is available for download as a mobile application (applies for certain car models and mobile devices), see www.volvocars.com.

The mobile application also includes video and searchable content and easy navigation between different sections.

Options/accessories All types of option/accessory are marked with an asterisk*.

In addition to standard equipment, the owner's manual also describes options (factory fitted equipment) and certain accessories (retrofitted extra equipment).

INTRODUCTION

}}

17

The equipment described in the owner's manual is not available in all cars - they have different equipment depending on adaptations for the needs of different markets and national or local laws and regulations.

In the event of uncertainty over what is standard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo dealer.

Special texts

WARNING Warning texts appear if there is a risk of injury.

IMPORTANT

"Important" texts appear if there is a risk of damage.

NOTE

NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate the use of features and functions for example.

Footnote There is footnote information in the owner's man- ual that is located at the bottom of the page. This information is an addition to the text that it refers to via a number. If the footnote refers to text in a table then letters are used instead of numbers for referral.

Message texts In the car there are displays that show menu texts and message texts. In the owner's manual the appearance of these texts differs from the normal text. Examples of menu texts and mes- sage texts: Media, Sending location.

Decals The car contains different types of decal which are designed to convey important information in a simple and clear manner. The decals in the car have the following descending degree of impor- tance for the warning/information.

Warning for personal injury

G031590

Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field, white text/image on black message field. Used to indi- cate the presence of danger which, if the warning

is ignored, may result in serious personal injury or fatality.

Risk of property damage

G 0 3 1 5 9 2

White ISO symbols and white text/image on black or blue warning field and message field. Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if the warning is ignored, may result in damage to property.

||

INTRODUCTION

18

Information

G 0 3 1 5 9 3

White ISO symbols and white text/image on black message field.

NOTE

It is not intended that the decals illustrated in the owner's manual should be exact replicas of those in the car. They are included to show their approximate appearance and locations in the car. The information that applies to your particular car can be found on the decal on the car.

Procedure lists Procedures where action must be taken in a cer- tain sequence are numbered in the owner's man- ual.

When there is a series of illustrations for step-by-step instructions each step is num- bered in the same way as the corresponding illustration.

Lists of letters appear adjacent to the series of illustrations where the order of the instruc- tions is not significant.

Arrows appear numbered and unnumbered and are used to illustrate a movement.

Arrows with letters are used to clarify a movement when the reciprocal order is of no relevance.

If there is no series of illustrations for step-by- step instructions then the different steps are numbered with normal numbers.

Position lists Red circles containing a number are used in overview images where different components are pointed out. The number recurs in the position list featured in connection with the illustration that describes the item.

Bulleted lists A bulleted list is used when there is a list of points in the owner's manual.

Example:

Coolant

Engine oil

Related information Related information refers to other articles con- taining closely-associated information.

Images The manual's images are sometimes schematic and may deviate from the car's appearance depending on equipment level and market.

To be continued }} This symbol is located furthest down to the right when an article continues on the following page.

Continued from previous page || This symbol is located furthest up to the left when an article continues from the previous page.

Related information The owner's manual and the environment

(p. 25)

Volvo Cars support site (p. 15)

INTRODUCTION

19

Recording data As part of Volvo's safety and quality assurance, certain information about the vehicle's operation, functionality and incidents are recorded in the car.

This vehicle is equipped with an "Event Data Recorder" (EDR). Its primary purpose is to regis- ter and record data related to traffic accidents or collision-like situations, such as times when the airbag deploys or the vehicle strikes an obstacle in the road. The data is recorded in order to increase understanding of how vehicle systems work in these types of situations. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short time, usually 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record data related to the following in the event of traffic accidents or collision-like situations:

How the various systems in the car worked

Whether the driver and passenger seatbelts were fastened/tensioned

The driver's use of the accelerator or brake pedal

The travel speed of the vehicle

This information can help us better understand the circumstances in which traffic accidents, inju- ries and damage occur. The EDR only records data when a non-trivial collision situation occurs. The EDR does not record any data during normal

driving conditions. Similarly, the system never registers who is driving the vehicle or the geo- graphic location of the accident or near-miss sit- uation. However, other parties, such as the police, could use the recorded data in combination with the type of personally identifiable information routinely collected after a traffic accident. Special equipment and access to either the vehicle or the EDR is required to be able to interpret the regis- tered data.

In addition to the EDR, the car is equipped with a number of computers designed to continually check and monitor the function of the car. They can record data during normal driving conditions, but in particular register faults affecting the vehi- cle's operation and functionality, or upon activa- tion of the vehicle's active driver support function (e.g. City Safety and the auto brake function).

Some of the recorded data is required to enable service and maintenance technicians to diagnose and remedy any faults that occurred in the vehi- cle. The registered information is also needed to enable Volvo to satisfy legal requirements laid out in laws and by government authorities. Informa- tion registered in the vehicle is stored in its com- puter until the vehicle is serviced or repaired.

In addition to the above, the registered informa- tion can be used in aggregate form for research and product development with the aim of contin- uously improving the safety and quality of Volvo cars.

Volvo will not contribute to the above-described information being disclosed to third parties with- out the vehicle owner's consent. To comply with national legislation and regulations, Volvo may be forced to disclose information of this nature to the police or other authorities who may assert a legal right to access such. Special technical equipment which Volvo and workshops that have entered into agreements with Volvo have access to is required to be able to read and interpret the recorded data. Volvo is responsible that the infor- mation, which is transferred to Volvo during serv- icing and maintenance, is stored and handled in a secure manner and that the handling complies with applicable legal requirements. For further information - contact a Volvo dealer.

INTRODUCTION

* Option/accessory.20

Accessories and extra equipment The incorrect connection and installation of accessories and extra equipment can negatively affect the car's electronic system.

Certain accessories only function when associ- ated software is installed in the car's computer system. Volvo therefore recommends that you always contact an authorised Volvo workshop before installing accessories or extra equipment which are connected to or affect the electrical system.

Heat-reflecting windscreen* The windscreen is equipped with a heat-reflect- ing film (IR) that reduces the solar heat radiation into the passenger compartment.

If a road toll tag or similar device is used to pass through road tolls then it is important that it is positioned so that it is not covered by the heat- reflective film. If electronic equipment us posi- tioned behind a glass surface with heat-reflective film then it can have a negative effect on its func- tion and performance.

Remember that the road toll tag must not cover or interfere with sensors or cameras fitted in or adjacent to the windscreen.

Areas where IR film is not applied.

Dimensions

A 65 mm

B 150 mm

C 125 mm

Volvo ID Volvo ID provides access to a wide range of per-

sonalized Volvo services5 online.

Examples of services:

In an Internet-connected car* - Certain func- tions and services require that you have reg- istered your car to a personal Volvo ID, for example to be able to send a new address from a map service on the Internet directly to the car.

Volvo On Call* - Volvo ID is used when log- ging in to the Volvo On Call app.

Advantages of Volvo ID One user name and one password to access

online services, i.e. only one username and one password to remember.

When changing the username/password for a service (e.g. Volvo On Call) it will also be changed automatically for other services.

Create a Volvo ID To create a Volvo ID you need to enter a personal e-mail address. Then follow the instructions in the e-mail message that is automatically sent to the specified address in order to complete the registration. It is possible to create a Volvo ID via one of the following services:

5 The services available may vary over time and vary depending on equipment level and market.

INTRODUCTION

* Option/accessory. 21

Volvo Cars website - Go to www.volvocars.com and log in6 at the icon, top right. Select Create Volvo ID.

For an Internet-connected car* - Enter your e-mail address in the app that requires Volvo ID and follow the instructions. Alternatively,

press the Connect button in the centre

console twice and select Apps Settings and follow the instructions.

Volvo On Call* - Download the latest version of the Volvo On Call app. Choose to create a Volvo ID from the start page, enter e-mail address and follow the instructions.

Related information Volvo Cars support site (p. 15)

6 Available in certain markets.

INTRODUCTION

22

Environmental philosophy Volvo Car Corporation is constantly working on the development of safer and more efficient

products and solutions in order to reduce the negative impact on the environment.

Environmental care is one of Volvo Cars core val- ues and influences all operations. The environ- mental work is based on the whole life cycle of the car and takes into account the environmental impact it has, from design to scrapping and recy- cling. Volvo Cars' basic principle is that every new product developed must have less impact on the environment than the product it replaces.

Volvo's environmental management work has resulted in the development of the more efficient and less polluting Drive-E drivelines. The personal environment is also important to Volvo - the air

inside a Volvo is, for example, cleaner than the air outside thanks to the climate control system.

Your Volvo complies with stringent international environmental standards. All Volvo's manufactur- ing units must be ISO 14001 certified, and this supports a systematic approach to the opera- tion's environmental issues, which leads to con- tinuous improvement with reduced environmental impact. Holding the ISO certificate also means that environmental laws and regulations in force are complied with. Volvo also requires that its partners must also meet these requirements.

Fuel consumption Since a large part of a car's total environmental impact stems from its use, the emphasis of Volvo Cars' environmental work is on reducing fuel con- sumption, carbon dioxide emissions and other air pollutants. Volvo cars have competitive fuel con- sumption in each of their respective classes. Lower fuel consumption generally results in lower emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.

INTRODUCTION

}}

* Option/accessory. 23

Contributing to a better environment An energy-efficient and fuel-efficient car not only contributes to a reduced impact on the environ- ment, but also means reduced costs for the owner of the car. As the driver, it is easy to reduce fuel consumption and thereby save money and contribute to a better environment - here is some advice:

Plan for an effective average speed. Speeds above approx. 80 km/h (50 mph) and below 50 km/h (30 mph) lead to increased energy consumption.

Follow the Service and Warranty Booklet's recommended intervals for service and main- tenance of the car.

Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off the engine when stationary for longer periods. Pay attention to local regulations.

Plan the journey - a lot of unnecessary stops and uneven speed contribute to increased fuel consumption.

If the car is equipped with an engine block heater*, use it before starting from cold - it improves starting capacity and reduces wear in cold weather and the engine reaches nor- mal operating temperature more quickly, which lowers consumption and reduces emissions.

Also remember to always dispose of environmen- tally hazardous waste, such as batteries and oil, in an environmentally safe manner. Consult a work-

shop in the event of uncertainty about how this type of waste should be discarded - an author- ised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Following this advice can save money, the plan- et's resources are saved, and the car's durability is extended. For more information and further advice, see Eco guide (p. 70), Economical driv- ing (p. 304) and Fuel consumption (p. 402).

Efficient emission control Your Volvo is manufactured following the concept "Clean inside and out" a concept that encom- passes a clean interior environment as well as highly efficient emission control. In many cases the exhaust emissions are well below the applica- ble standards.

Clean air in the passenger compartment A passenger compartment filter prevents dust and pollen from entering the passenger compart- ment via the air intake.

The Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* ensures that the incoming air is cleaner than the air in the traffic outside.

The system cleans the air in the passenger com- partment from contaminants such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-level ozone. If the outside air is contaminated then the air intake is closed and the air is recirculated. Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic, queues and tunnels for example.

IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior Pack- age (CZIP)*, which also includes a function that allows the fan to start when the car is unlocked with the remote control key.

Interior The material used in the interior of a Volvo is carefully selected and has been tested in order to be pleasant and comfortable. Some of the details are hand-made, such as the seams of the steer- ing wheel that are sewn by hand. The interior is monitored in order not to emit strong odours or substances that cause discomfort in the event of e.g. high heat and bright light.

Volvo workshops and the environment Regular maintenance creates the conditions for a long service life and low fuel consumption for your car. In this way you also contribute to a cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops are entrusted with the service and maintenance of your car it becomes part of Volvo's system. Volvo makes clear demands regarding the way in which workshop premises shall be designed in order to prevent spills and discharges into the environment. The workshop staff have the knowl- edge and the tools required to guarantee good environmental care.

Recycling Since Volvo works from a life cycle perspective, it is also important that the car is recycled in an environmentally sound manner. Almost all of the car can be recycled. The last owner of the car is

||

INTRODUCTION

24

therefore requested to contact a dealer for refer- ral to a certified/approved recycling facility.

Related information The owner's manual and the environment

(p. 25)

INTRODUCTION

* Option/accessory. 25

The owner's manual and the environment The paper pulp in a printed owner's manual

comes from Forest Stewardship Council certi- fied forests or other controlled sources.

The FSC symbol shows that the paper pulp in a printed owner's manual comes from FSC certi- fied forests or other controlled sources.

Related information Environmental philosophy (p. 22)

Laminated glass

The glass is reinforced which provides better protection against break-ins and improved sound insulation in the pas- senger compartment. The windscreen

and other windows* have laminated glass.

SAFETY

SAFETY

28

General information on seatbelts Heavy braking can have serious consequences if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that all pas- sengers are using their seatbelts during the jour- ney.

Tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling the diagonal shoulder belt up towards the shoulder. The hip strap must be positioned low down (not over the abdomen).

It is important that the seatbelt lies against the body so it can provide maximum protection. Do not lean the backrest too far back. The seatbelt is designed to protect in a normal seating position.

Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten their (p. 29) seatbelt by means of an audio and visual reminder (p. 31).

Remember Do not use clips or anything else that can

prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly.

The seatbelt must not be twisted or caught on anything.

WARNING The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat- belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.

WARNING Each seatbelt is designed for only one person.

WARNING Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the seatbelt's protective properties may have been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new seatbelt must be type-approved and designed for installation at the same location as the replaced seatbelt.

Related information Seatbelt - pregnancy (p. 30)

Seatbelt - loosening (p. 30)

Seatbelt tensioner (p. 31)

SAFETY

29

Seatbelt - putting on Put on the seatbelt (p. 28) before driving starts.

Pull the belt out slowly and secure it by pressing its locking tab into the seatbelt buckle. A loud "click" indicates that the belt has locked.

Correctly fitted seatbelt.

Incorrectly fitted seatbelt. The belt must rest on the shoulder.

Seatbelt height adjustment. Press the button and move the belt vertically. Position the belt as high as possible without it chafing against your throat.

The locking tab at the centre rear seat only fits into the intended seatbelt buckle.

Remember The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:

if it is pulled out too quickly

during braking and acceleration

if the car leans heavily.

Related information Seatbelt - pregnancy (p. 30)

Seatbelt - loosening (p. 30)

Seatbelt tensioner (p. 31)

Seatbelt reminder (p. 31)

SAFETY

30

Seatbelt - loosening Loosen the seatbelt (p. 28) when the car is sta- tionary.

Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle and then let the belt retract. If the seatbelt does not retract fully, feed it in by hand so that it does not hang loose.

Related information Seatbelt - putting on (p. 29)

Seatbelt reminder (p. 31)

Seatbelt - pregnancy Seatbelt (p. 28) must always be worn during pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the correct way.

G 0 2 0 9 9 8

The diagonal section should wrap over the shoul- der then be routed between the breasts and to the side of the abdomen.

The lap section should lay flat over the thighs and as low as possible under the abdomen. It must never be allowed to ride upward. Remove the slack from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits as close to the body as possible. In addition, check that there are no twists in the seatbelt.

As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers must adjust the seat (p. 82) and steering wheel (p. 87) such that they can easily maintain con- trol of the vehicle as they drive (which means that they must be able to easily operate the foot ped- als and steering wheel). The aim should be to

position the seat with as large a distance as pos- sible between abdomen and steering wheel.

Related information Seatbelt - putting on (p. 29)

Seatbelt - loosening (p. 30)

SAFETY

31

Seatbelt reminder Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten their (p. 29) seatbelt by means of an audio and visual reminder.

The audio reminder is speed dependent, and in some cases time dependent. The visual reminder is located in the roof console and in the com- bined instrument panel (p. 66).

Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt reminder system.

Rear seat The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two subfunctions:

Provides information on which seatbelts (p. 28) are being used in the rear seat. A message appears in the combined instru- ment panel when the seatbelts are in use, or if one of the rear doors has been opened.

The message is acknowledged automatically after approximately 30 seconds driving or after pressing the indicator stalk OK button (p. 110). If anyone is unbelted then the mes- sage can only be acknowledged manually by pressing the indicator stalk OK button.

Provides a warning if one of the rear seat- belts is unfastened during travel. This warn- ing takes the form of a message in the com- bined instrument panel along with the audio/ visual signal. The warning stops when the seatbelt is re-fastened, or it can also be acknowledged manually by pressing the OK button.

The combined instrument panel's information dis- play shows which seatbelts are in use. This infor- mation is always available.

Seatbelt tensioner Seatbelts (p. 28) on the driver's side, the pas- senger side and at the outer rear seats are fitted with seatbelt tensioners. A mechanism in the seatbelt tensioner tightens the seatbelt in the event of a sufficiently violent collision. The seat- belt then provides more effective restraint for the occupants.

WARNING Never insert the tongue of the passenger's seatbelt into the buckle on the driver's side. Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into the buckle on the correct side. Do not make any damages on seatbelts nor insert any for- eign objects into a buckle. The seatbelts and buckles would then possibly not function as intended in the event of a collision. There is a risk of serous injury.

Related information General information on seatbelts (p. 28)

SAFETY

32

Safety - warning symbol The warning symbol is shown if a fault is detected during fault tracing or if a system has been activated. Where required, the warning symbol is shown together with a message in the combined instrument panel (p. 66) information display.

Warning triangle and warning symbol for the airbag sys- tem (p. 33) in the analogue combined instrument panel.

Warning triangle and warning symbol for the airbag sys- tem in the digital combined instrument panel.

The warning symbol in the combined instrument panel is switched on with the remote control key in key position II (p. 81), fault tracing is per- formed each time the ignition is switched on. The symbol clears after approx. 6 seconds provided the airbag system is fault-free.

The warning symbol is shown if a fault is detected during fault tracing or if a system has been activated. Where required, the warning sym- bol is shown together with a message in the dis- play. If the warning symbol malfunctions, the warning triangle illuminates and SRS airbag Service required or SRS airbag Service urgent appears in the display. Volvo recom- mends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately.

WARNING If the warning symbol for the airbag system remains illuminated or illuminates while driv- ing, it means that the airbag system does not have full functionality. The symbol indicates a fault in the airbag system, the belt tensioner system, SIPS, the IC system or some other fault in the system. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately.

Related information General information on safety mode (p. 41)

SAFETY

}}

33

Airbag system In the event of a frontal collision the airbag sys- tem helps to protect the head, face and chest of the driver and passenger.

G 0 1 8 6 6 5

Airbag system viewed from above, left-hand-drive car.

G 0 1 8 6 6 6

Airbag system viewed from above, right-hand-drive car.

The system consists of airbags and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the airbag(s) are inflated and become hot. The airbag cushions the initial collision impact for the occupant. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. When this occurs, smoke escapes into the car. This is completely normal. The entire process, including inflation and defla- tion of the airbag, occurs within tenths of a sec- ond.

If the airbags have deployed, the following is rec- ommended:

Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not drive with deployed air- bags.

Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop to handle the replacement of components in the car's safety systems.

Always contact a doctor.

WARNING The airbag system's control module is located in the centre console. If the centre console is drenched with water or other liquid, discon- nect the battery cables. Do not attempt to start the car since the airbags may deploy. Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING Never drive with deployed airbags. They can make steering difficult. Other safety systems may also be damaged. The smoke and dust created when the airbags are deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/injury after inten- sive exposure. In case of irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid deployment sequence and airbag fabric may cause friction and skin burns.

WARNING Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for repair. Defec- tive work in the airbag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.

NOTE

The detectors react differently depending on the nature of the collision and whether or not the seatbelt is fastened. Applies to all seat- belt positions apart from centre seat rear.

It is therefore possible that only one (or none) of the airbags may inflate in a collision. The detectors sense the force of the collision on the vehicle and the action is adapted accord- ingly so that one or more airbags are deployed.

||

SAFETY

34

Related information Airbags on driver's side (p. 34)

Passenger airbag (p. 35)

Safety - warning symbol (p. 32)

Airbags on driver's side To supplement the protection afforded by the seatbelt (p. 28) on the driver side, the car is equipped with two airbags (p. 33).

One of the airbags is folded up into the centre of the steering wheel. The steering wheel is marked AIRBAG.

Knee airbag on the driver's side in a left-hand-drive car.

The second airbag (at knee level) is fitted in the lower part of the instrument panel on the driver's side; this panel is labelled AIRBAG.

WARNING The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the air- bags in the event of a collision.

Related information Passenger airbag (p. 35)

SAFETY

}}

35

Passenger airbag To supplement the protection afforded by the seatbelt (p. 28) on the passenger side, the car is equipped with an airbag (p. 33).

The airbag is folded up into a compartment above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked AIRBAG.

Location of the front passenger airbag in a left-hand drive car.

Location of the front passenger airbag in a right-hand drive car.

Label for passenger airbag

Label on the passenger side's sun visor.

The warning label for the passenger airbag is positioned as shown above.

WARNING Never use a rear-facing child seat on a seat protected by an activated airbag. Failure to follow this advice can lead to death or serious injury to the child.

WARNING The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.

To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag deploys, passengers must sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and backs against the backrest. Seatbelts must be secured.

WARNING Do not put objects in front of or above the dashboard where the passenger airbag is located.

||

SAFETY

* Option/accessory.36

WARNING Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat.

Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated.

Front-facing passengers (children and adults) must never sit on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is deactivated.

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury.

Switch - PACOS* The front passenger airbag can be deactivated (p. 36) if the car is equipped with a switch, PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch).

WARNING If the car is equipped with an airbag for the front passenger seat, but does not have a switch PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch), then the airbag will always be acti- vated.

Related information Airbags on driver's side (p. 34)

Child seats (p. 47)

Passenger airbag - activating/ deactivating* The front passenger airbag (p. 35) can be deac- tivated if the car is equipped with a switch, PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch).

Switch - PACOS The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS) is located on the passenger end of the instrument panel and is accessible when the passenger door is open.

Check that the switch is in the required position. The remote control key's key blade (p. 163) should be used to change position.

Location of airbag switch.

ON- the airbag is activated. With the switch in this position, all front-facing passengers

(children and adults) can sit safely on the passenger seat.

OFF - the airbag is deactivated. With the switch in this position, children in rear-facing child seats can sit safely on the front pas- senger seat.

WARNING Activated airbag (passenger seat):

Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat when the passenger airbag is activated.

Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):

Front-facing passengers (children and adults) must never sit on the front passenger seat when the passenger airbag is deactivated.

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury.

NOTE

When the remote control key is in key posi- tion II (p. 81) the warning symbol (p. 32) for the airbag is shown in the combined instru- ment panel for approx. 6 seconds.

Following which, the indicator in the roof con- sole is illuminated showing the correct status for the front passenger seat airbag.

SAFETY

37

Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is activated.

A text message and a warning symbol in the roof console indicate that the airbag for the front pas- senger seat is activated (see preceding illustra- tion).

WARNING Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front seat if the passenger airbag is activated and the symbol in the roof console is illumi- nated to indicate this. Failure to follow this advice could endanger the life of the child.

Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is deacti- vated.

A text message and a symbol in the roof console indicate that the airbag for the front passenger seat is deactivated (see preceding illustration).

WARNING Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas- senger seat if the message in the roof con- sole indicates that the airbag is deactivated, and if the warning symbol (p. 32) for the air- bag system is also displayed on the combined instrument panel. This indicates that there has been a severe malfunction. Visit a workshop as soon as possible. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger the lives of passengers in the car.

Related information Child seats (p. 47)

SAFETY

38

Side airbag (SIPS) In a side impact collision a large proportion of the collision force is transferred by the SIPS (Side Impact Protection System) to beams, pil- lars, the floor, the roof and other structural parts of the body. The side airbags at the driver's and front passenger seats protect the chest area and the hip and are an important part of the SIPS.

The SIPS bag system consists of two main com- ponents, side airbag and sensors. The side air- bags are located in the front seat's backrests.

A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag inflates between the occupant and the door panel and thereby cushions the initial impact. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. The side airbag is normally only deployed on the side of the collision.

Driver's seat, left-hand drive.

Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.

WARNING

Volvo recommends that repairs are only carried out by an authorised Volvo work- shop. Defective work in the SIPS-bag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.

Do not put objects in the area between the outside of the seat and the door panel, since this area is required by the side airbag.

Volvo recommends the use only of car seat covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers may impede the operation of the side airbags.

Side airbags are a supplement the seat- belts. Always use a seatbelt.

SIPS and child seats The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the side airbag.

Related information Airbags on driver's side (p. 34)

Passenger airbag (p. 35)

Inflatable Curtain (IC) (p. 39)

SAFETY

}}

39

Inflatable Curtain (IC) The inflatable curtain helps to prevent the driver and passengers from striking their heads on the inside of the car during a collision.

The inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is part of the SIPS system (p. 38). It is fitted along the headlining on both sides and helps protect the driver and passengers in the car's outer seats. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sen- sors and the inflatable curtain is inflated.

WARNING Never hang or attach heavy items onto the handles in the roof. The hook is only designed for light clothing (not for solid objects such as umbrellas for example).

Do not screw or install anything onto the car's headlining, door pillars or side panels. This could compromise the intended protection. Volvo recommends that you only ever use Volvo genuine parts that are approved for placement in these areas.

WARNING Do not load the car higher than 50 mm under the top edge of the windows in the doors. Otherwise, the intended protection of the inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the headlining, may be compromised.

WARNING The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the seatbelts.

Always use a seatbelt.

Related information General information on seatbelts (p. 28)

Airbag system (p. 33)

Side airbag (SIPS) (p. 38)

General information on WHIPS (whiplash protection) WHIPS (Whiplash Protection System) is a pro- tection against whiplash injuries. The system consists of energy absorbing backrests and specially designed head restraints in the front seats.

||

SAFETY

40

The WHIPS system is actuated by a rear-end col- lision, where the angle and speed of the collision,

and the nature of the colliding vehicle all have an influence.

WARNING The WHIPS system is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.

Seat properties When the WHIPS system is deployed, the front seat backrests are lowered backward to change the seating position of the driver and front seat passenger. This reduces the risk of whiplash injury.

WARNING Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS system yourself. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

WHIPS and child seats The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the WHIPS system.

Related information WHIPS - seating position (p. 40)

General information on seatbelts (p. 28)

WHIPS - seating position In order to obtain optimum protection from the WHIPS system (p. 39) the driver and passenger must have the correct seating position and make sure that the system's function is not obstructed.

Seating position Set the correct seating position in the front seat (p. 82) before driving starts.

Driver and front seat passenger should sit in the centre of the seat with as little space as possible between the head and the head restraint.

Function

Do not leave any objects on the floor behind the driver's seat/passenger seat that may prevent the WHIPS sys- tem from functioning.

SAFETY

}}

41

WARNING Do not squeeze rigid objects between the rear seat cushion and the front seat's back- rest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the function of the WHIPS system.

Do not place objects on the rear seat that may prevent the WHIPS system from functioning.

WARNING If a backrest in the rear seat is lowered or a rear-facing child seat is used in the rear seat, the corresponding front seat must be moved forward so that it does not make contact with the lowered backrest or child seat.

WARNING If a seat has been subjected to extreme forces, such as due to a rear-end collision, the WHIPS system must be checked. Volvo rec- ommends that it is checked by an authorised Volvo workshop.

Part of the WHIPS system's protective capacity may have been lost even if the seat appears to be undamaged.

Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop to have the sys- tem checked even after a minor rear-end col- lision.

General information on safety mode Safety mode is a protective state that is trig- gered when a collision may have damaged any of the car's vital functions, such as the fuel lines, sensors for any of the safety systems, or the brake system.

Warning triangle in the analogue combined instrument panel.

||

SAFETY

42

Warning triangle in the digital combined instrument panel.

If the car is involved in a collision, the text Safety mode See manual may appear in the combined instrument panel (p. 66) information display. This means that the car has reduced functional- ity.

WARNING Never attempt to repair your car or reset the electronics yourself if the car has been in safety mode. This could result in personal injury or the car not functioning as normal. Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop to check and restore the car to normal status after Safety mode See manual has been displayed.

Related information Safety mode - attempting to start the car

(p. 42)

Safety mode - moving the car (p. 43)

Safety mode - attempting to start the car If the car is set in safety mode (p. 41) then an attempt to start the car can be made if every- thing seems normal and the absence of fuel leakage has been checked.

First, check that no fuel is leaking from the car. There must be no smell of fuel either.

If everything seems normal and you have checked for indications of fuel leakage, you may attempt to start the car.

Remove the remote control key and open the driver's door. If a message is now shown to the effect that the ignition is on, press the start but- ton. Then close the door and reinsert the remote control key. The car's electronics will now try to reset themselves to normal mode. Then try to start the car.

If the message Safety mode See manual is still shown on the display, then the car must not be driven or towed, but a vehicle recovery service (p. 315) must be used instead. Even if the car appears to be driveable, hidden damage may make the car impossible to control once moving.

SAFETY

}}

43

WARNING Never, under any circumstances, attempt to restart the car if it smells of fuel when the Safety mode See manual message is dis- played. Leave the car at once.

WARNING If the car is in safety mode it must not be towed. It must be transported from its loca- tion. Volvo recommends that it is transported to an authorised Volvo workshop.

Related information Safety mode - moving the car (p. 43)

Safety mode - moving the car If Normal mode is shown after Safety mode See manual has been reset after attempting to start the car (p. 42) , the car can be moved care- fully out of a dangerous position.

Do not move the car further than necessary.

Related information General information on safety mode (p. 41)

Pedestrian airbag The airbag for pedestrians (Pedestrian Airbag) contributes in certain frontal collisions to alleviat- ing the collision of the pedestrian with the car.

The pedestrian airbag (Pedestrian Airbag) is fit- ted under the bonnet near the windscreen. In the event of certain frontal collisions with a pedes- trian, the sensors in the front bumper react and the airbag inflates if required, based on the force of the impact. The sensors are active at a speed of approx. 20-50 km/h (12-30 mph) and an ambient temperature between -20 and +70C.

The sensors are designed to detect a collision with an object that has similar properties to those of the human leg.

||

SAFETY

44

NOTE

There may be objects in the traffic environ- ment that prompt a signal to the sensors that is similar to a collision with a pedestrian. It is possible that the system will be activated in the event of a collision with such an object.

If the airbag is activated (Pedestrian Airbag)

the rear part of the bonnet is raised and locked in this position

the hazard warning flashers are activated

the brake system is prepared for the upcom- ing emergency braking.

WARNING Do not fit any accessories or change anything in the front. Incorrect intervention at the front may cause incorrect function in the system and lead to serious injury and damage to the car.

Volvo recommends that genuine wiper arms are used and that you only use genuine parts for them.

WARNING Volvo recommends contacting an authorised Volvo workshop in the event of damage to the bumper in order to ensure that the system is intact.

Related information Pedestrian airbag - moving the car (p. 44)

Pedestrian airbag - folding up (p. 45)

Pedestrian airbag - moving the car The car may be moved if it has not been set in safety mode (p. 41).

If any of the other airbags in the passenger com- partment were activated then the car remains in safety mode.

If only the pedestrian airbag (p. 43) (Pedestrian Airbag) has been activated:

1. Move the car to a safe location as close as possible.

2. Fold up the airbag in accordance with the instructions (p. 45).

3. Seek the nearest workshop.

WARNING Volvo recommends that, after activation of the airbag, you contact an authorised Volvo work- shop as soon as possible.

Related information Pedestrian airbag (p. 43)

SAFETY

}}

45

Pedestrian airbag - folding up Pedestrian airbag (p. 43) (Pedestrian Airbag) must be folded up before the car is moved.

Airbag

Airbag housing

Velcro strap, right-hand side

Velcro strap, left-hand side

The airbag may feel warm and give off smoke. This is normal. Fold the airbag as follows:

1. Find the Velcro strap on the left-hand side (4).

2. Gather the airbag fabric along its length on the left-hand side. Then fold the gathered fabric towards the centre. Wind the Velcro strap (double sided) around as much fabric as possible and fasten it.

3. Press the rolled up portion of the airbag into the airbag housing (2).

4. Repeat points 1-3 for the right-hand side. It may be necessary to fold the gathered fabric twice on this side in order to wind the Velcro strap around it.

5. The airbag housing cover will be open slightly. This is completely normal.

Related information Pedestrian airbag - moving the car (p. 44)

General information on child safety Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats, booster cushions & attachment devices) which is designed for fitting in this particular car.

Using Volvo's child safety equipment, the opti- mum conditions are obtained for the child to travel safely in the car. In addition, the child safety equipment fits well and is simple to use.

Children of all ages and sizes must always sit correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child to sit on the knee of a passenger.

Volvo recommends that children travel in rear- facing child seats until as late an age as possible, at least up to 3-4 years of age, and then in front- facing booster cushions/child seats until the child is 140 cm tall.

NOTE

Legal provisions about the type of child seat that must be used for children of different ages and heights vary from country to coun- try. Check what does apply.

NOTE

In the event of questions when fitting child safety products, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions.

||

SAFETY

46

Child safety locks The controls for operating the rear door power windows and the rear door opening handles can be blocked (p. 176) from opening from the inside.

Related information Child seats (p. 47)

Child seats - location (p. 52)

Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 53)

Child seats - upper mounting points (p. 57)

SAFETY

}}

47

Child seats Children should sit comfortably and safely. Make sure that the child seat is being used correctly.

NOTE

When using child safety products it is impor- tant to read the installation instructions included.

NOTE

Never leave a child seat loose in the car. Always secure it according to the instructions for the child seat, even when it is not in use.

WARNING Do not secure the straps of the child seat to the seat's horizontal adjustment bar, springs or the rails and beams under the seat. Sharp edges may damage the straps.

Look in the installation instructions for the child seat for the correct fitting.

||

SAFETY

48

Recommended child seats1

Weight Front seat (with deactivated air-

bag, only rear-facing child seats)

Front seat (with activated air-

bag, only front-facing child

seats)

Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 0

max 10 kg

Group 0+

max 13 kg

Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear- facing child seat, secured with the ISOFIX fix- ture system.

Type approval: E1 04301146

(L)

Group 0

max 10 kg

Group 0+

max 13 kg

Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.

Type approval: E1 04301146

(U)

Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear- facing child seat, secured with the car's seat- belt.

Type approval: E1 04301146

(U)

Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.

Type approval: E1 04301146

(U)

Group 0

max 10 kg

Group 0+

max 13 kg

Child seats which are universally approved.A

(U)

Child seats which are universally approved.

(U)

1 With regard to other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.

SAFETY

}}

49

Weight Front seat (with deactivated air-

bag, only rear-facing child seats)

Front seat (with activated air-

bag, only front-facing child

seats)

Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 1

9-18 kg

Volvo turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) rear-fac- ing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.

Type approval: E5 04192

(L)

Volvo turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.

Type approval: E5 04192

(L)

Group 1

9-18 kg

Volvo rear-facing child seat

Type approval: E5 04212

(L)

Volvo rear-facing child seat

Type approval: E5 04212

(L)

Group 1

9-18 kg

Front-facing child seats which are universally approved.A, B

(UF)

Child seats which are universally approved.

(U)

Group 2

15-25 kg

Volvo turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) rear-fac- ing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.

Type approval: E5 04192

(L)

Volvo turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.

Type approval: E5 04192

(L)

Group 2

15-25 kg

Volvo rear-facing child seat

Type approval: E5 04212

(L)

Volvo rear-facing child seat

Type approval: E5 04212

(L)

||

SAFETY

50

Weight Front seat (with deactivated air-

bag, only rear-facing child seats)

Front seat (with activated air-

bag, only front-facing child

seats)

Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 2

15-25 kg

Volvo turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front- facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.

Type approval: E5 04191

(U)

Volvo turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.

Type approval: E5 04191

(U)

Group 2/3

15-36 kg

Volvo booster seat with back- rest (Volvo Booster Seat with backrest).

Type approval: E1 04301169

(UF)

Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Seat with backrest).

Type approval: E1 04301169

(UF)

Group 2/3

15-36 kg

Volvo booster seat

Type approval: E1 04301312

(UF)

Volvo booster seat

Type approval: E1 04301312

(UF, L)

SAFETY

51

Weight Front seat (with deactivated air-

bag, only rear-facing child seats)

Front seat (with activated air-

bag, only front-facing child

seats)

Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 2/3

15-36 kg

Booster cushion with and with- out backrest (Booster Cushion with and without backrest).

Type approval: E5 04216

(UF)

Booster cushion with and without backrest (Booster Cushion with and without backrest).

Type approval: E5 04216

(UF)

L: Suitable for specific child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.

U: Suitable for universally approved child seats in this weight class.

UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats in this weight class.

B: Built-in child seats approved for this weight class.

A Only for rear-facing child seat. Set the seat's backrest in upright position. B Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group.

Related information Child seats - location (p. 52)

Child seats - upper mounting points (p. 57)

Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 53)

General information on child safety (p. 45)

SAFETY

52

Child seats - location The position of a child in the car and the choice of equipment are dictated by the child's weight and size.

G 0 2 0 7 3 9

Rear-facing child seat and airbag are not compatible.

Always fit rear-facing child seats (p. 47) in the rear seat if the passenger airbag is activated (p. 36). If a child is sitting on the front passenger seat then he/she could suffer serious injury if the airbag deploys.

If the passenger airbag is deactivated then rear- facing child seats can be fitted on the front pas- senger seat.

Label for passenger airbag

Label on the passenger side's sun visor.

The warning label for the passenger airbag is positioned as shown above.

You may place:

a rear-facing child seat on the front passen- ger seat when the passenger airbag is deac- tivated.

a front-facing child seat/booster cushion on the front passenger seat when the passen- ger airbag is activated.

one or more child seats/booster cushions in the rear seat.

WARNING Never use a rear-facing child seat on a seat protected by an activated airbag. Failure to follow this advice can lead to death or serious injury to the child.

WARNING Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat.

Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated.

Front-facing passengers (children and adults) must never sit on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is deactivated.

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury.

WARNING Booster cushions/child seats with steel braces or some other design that could rest on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must not be used, as they could cause the seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.

Do not allow the upper section of the child seat to rest against the windscreen.

SAFETY

}}

53

NOTE

Regulations regarding the placement of chil- dren in cars vary from country to country. Check what does apply.

Related information General information on child safety (p. 45)

Child seats - upper mounting points (p. 57)

Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 53)

Child seat - ISOFIX ISOFIX is a fixture system for car child seats (p. 47) that is based on an international stand- ard.

Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system are located at the lower section of the rear seat backrest, in the outer seats.

The location of the mounting points is indicated by symbols in the backrest upholstery (see pre- ceding illustration).

Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when connecting a child seat to the ISOFIX mounting points.

Related information ISOFIX - size classes (p. 53)

ISOFIX - types of child seat (p. 55)

General information on child safety (p. 45)

ISOFIX - size classes There is a size classification for child seats using the ISOFIX (p. 53) fixture system in order to assist users in choosing the correct type of child seat (p. 55).

Size

class

Description

A Full size, front-facing child seat

B Reduced size (alt. 1), front-facing child seat

B1 Reduced size (alt.2), front-facing child seat

C Full size, rear-facing child seat

D Reduced size, rear-facing child seat

E Rear-facing infant seat

F Transverse infant seat, left-hand

G Transverse infant seat, right-hand

WARNING Never use a rear-facing child seat on the pas- senger seat if the passenger airbag is acti- vated.

||

SAFETY

54

NOTE

If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classifica- tion, the car model must be included on the vehicle list for the child seat.

NOTE

Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo dealer for recommendations about which ISOFIX child seats Volvo recom- mends.

Related information ISOFIX - types of child seat (p. 55)

SAFETY

}}

55

ISOFIX - types of child seat Child seats are in different sizes cars are in dif- ferent sizes. This means that not all child seats are suitable for all seats in all car models.

Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIXA installation of child seats

Front seat Outer rear seat

Infant seat transverse max 10 kg F X X

G X X

Infant seat, rear-facing max 10 kg E X OK

(IL)

Infant seat, rear-facing max 13 kg E X OK

(IL)

D X OK

(IL)

C X OK

(IL)

Child seat, rear-facing 9-18 kg D X OK

(IL)

C X OK

(IL)

||

SAFETY

56

Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIXA installation of child seats

Front seat Outer rear seat

Front-facing child seat 9-18 kg B X OKB

(IUF)

B1 X OKB

(IUF)

A X OKB

(IUF)

X: The ISOFIX position is not suitable for ISOFIX child seats in this weight class and/or size class.

IL: Suitable for specific ISOFIX child seats. These child seats may be intended for a particular car model, limited or semi-universal categories.

IUF: Suitable for front-facing ISOFIX child seats that are universally approved in this weight class.

A ISOFIX is a fixture system for car child seats that is based on an international standard. B Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.

Make sure you select the right size class (p. 53) of child seat with ISOFIX fixture system.

Related information Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 53)

SAFETY

57

Child seats - upper mounting points The car is equipped with upper mounting points for certain front-facing child seats (p. 47). These mounting points are located on the rear of the seat.

Upper mounting points

The upper mounting points are primarily intended for use with front-facing child seats. Volvo recom- mends that small children should sit in rear-fac- ing child seats to as late an age as possible.

NOTE

Fold the head restraints in order to facilitate fitting this type of child seat in cars with fold- ing head restraints on the outer seats.

NOTE

In cars with a cargo cover over the luggage compartment, this must be removed before child seats can be attached to the securing points.

For detailed information on how the child seat should be tensioned in the upper mounting points, see the seat manufacturer's instructions.

WARNING The child seat's straps must always be drawn through the hole in the head restraint leg before they are tensioned at the attachment point.

Related information General information on child safety (p. 45)

Child seats - location (p. 52)

Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 53)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

60

Instruments and controls, left-hand drive car - overview The overview shows where the car's displays and controls are located.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

61

Overview, left-hand drive cars

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.62

Function See

Menus and mes- sages, direction indi- cators, main/dipped beam, trip computer

(p. 110), (p. 113), (p. 99), (p. 91) and (p. 114).

Manual gear chang- ing in an automatic gearbox*

(p. 274).

Cruise control* (p. 192) and (p. 201).

Horn, airbags (p. 87) and (p. 33).

Combined instrument panel

(p. 66).

Menu navigation, audio control, phone control*

(p. 113) and the Sensus Infotain- ment supple- ment.

START/STOP ENGINE button

(p. 270).

Ignition switch (p. 80).

Screen for infotain- ment and display of menus

(p. 113) and the Sensus Infotain- ment supple- ment.

Function See

Door handle

Control panel (p. 171), (p. 176), (p. 104) and (p. 106).

Hazard warning flashers

(p. 99).

Control panel for infotainment system and menu navigation

(p. 113) and the Sensus Infotain- ment supple- ment.

Control panel for cli- mate control

(p. 127) or (p. 128).

Gear selector (p. 273) or (p. 274).

Parking brake (p. 291).

Wipers and washing (p. 102).

Steering wheel adjustment

(p. 87).

Bonnet opener (p. 345).

Light switch, opener for tailgate

(p. 88) and (p. 172).

Seat adjustment* (p. 84).

Related information Outside temperature gauge (p. 75)

Trip meter (p. 75)

Clock (p. 75)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

63

Instruments and controls, right- hand drive car - overview The overview shows where the car's displays and controls are located.

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

64

Overview, right-hand drive cars

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory. 65

Function See

Wipers and washing (p. 102).

Manual gear chang- ing in an automatic gearbox*

(p. 274).

Menu navigation, audio control, phone control*

(p. 113) and the Sensus Infotain- ment supple- ment.

Horn, airbags (p. 87) and (p. 33).

Combined instrument panel

(p. 66).

Cruise control* (p. 192) and (p. 201).

START/STOP ENGINE button

(p. 270).

Ignition switch (p. 80).

Screen for infotain- ment and display of menus

(p. 113) and the Sensus Infotain- ment supple- ment.

Door handle

Function See

Control panel (p. 171), (p. 176), (p. 104) and (p. 106).

Bonnet opener (p. 345).

Hazard warning flashers

(p. 99).

Control panel for infotainment system and menu navigation

(p. 113) and the Sensus Infotain- ment supple- ment.

Control panel for cli- mate control

(p. 127) or (p. 128).

Gear selector (p. 273) or (p. 274).

Parking brake (p. 291).

Menus and mes- sages, direction indi- cators, main/dipped beam, trip computer

(p. 110), (p. 113), (p. 99), (p. 91) and (p. 114).

Steering wheel adjustment

(p. 87).

Function See

Light switch, opener for tailgate

(p. 88) and (p. 172).

Seat adjustment* (p. 84).

Related information Outside temperature gauge (p. 75)

Trip meter (p. 75)

Clock (p. 75)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

66

Combined instrument panel The combined instrument panel's information display shows information on some of the car's functions, as well as messages.

Analogue combined instrument panel - over- view (p. 66)

Digital combined instrument panel - overview (p. 67)

Combined instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols (p. 71)

Combined instrument cluster - meaning of warning symbols (p. 73)

Analogue combined instrument panel - overview The combined instrument panel's information display shows information on some of the car's functions, as well as messages.

Information display

Information display, analogue instrument panel.

There are further descriptions under the func- tions that use the display.

Gauges and indicators

Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to only one white marking1, the yellow indicator symbol for low level in the fuel tank is illumi- nated. See also Trip computer (p. 114) and Filling up with fuel (p. 296).

Eco meter The meter provides an indication of how economically the car is being driven. The higher the reading on the scale, the more economically the car is driven.

Speedometer

1 When the display's message Distance to empty fuel tank: starts to show ----, the marking becomes red.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 67

Tachometer. The meter indicates engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).

Gear shift indicator2 / Gear position indica- tor3. See also Gear shift indicator* (p. 274) or Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 274).

Indicator and warning symbols

Indicator and warning symbols, analogue instrument panel.

Indicator symbols

Indicator and warning symbols

Warning symbols4

Functionality check All indicator and warning symbols, apart from symbols in the centre of the information display, illuminate in key position II or when the engine is started. When the engine has started, all the symbols should go out except the parking brake symbol, which only goes out when the brake is disengaged.

If the engine does not start or if the functionality check is carried out in key position II then all symbols go out within a few seconds except the symbol for faults in the car's emissions system and the symbol for low oil pressure.

Related information Combined instrument panel (p. 66)

Combined instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols (p. 71)

Combined instrument cluster - meaning of warning symbols (p. 73)

Digital combined instrument panel - overview (p. 67)

Digital combined instrument panel - overview The combined instrument panel's information display shows information on some of the car's functions, as well as messages.

Information display

Information display, digital instrument panel*.

There are further descriptions under the func- tions that use the display.

Gauges and indicators Various themes can be selected for the digital combined instrument panel. Possible themes are "Elegance", "Eco" and "Performance".

2 Manual gearbox. 3 Automatic gearbox. 4 Certain engine variants do not have systems to warn of oil pressure loss. In cars with these variants the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warning for low oil level is via display text. For more information, see

Engine oil - general (p. 346).

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.68

A theme can only be selected when the engine is running.

To select the theme, press the left-hand stalk switch's OK button and select the Themes menu option by turning the thumbwheel on the lever. Press the OK button. Turn the thumbwheel to select the theme and confirm the selection by pressing the OK button.

On certain model variants, the appearance of the centre console's screen follows the theme selected for the combined instrument panel.

The contrast mode and colour mode for the instrument can also be set using the left-hand stalk switch.

For more information on menu navigation, see Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 110).

The choice of theme and setting of contrast mode and colour mode can be stored for each remote control key in the car key memory*, see Remote control key - personalisation* (p. 157).

Theme "Elegance"

Gauges and indicators, theme "Elegance".

Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to only one white marking5, the yellow indicator symbol for low level in the fuel tank is illumi- nated. See also Trip computer (p. 114) and Filling up with fuel (p. 296).

Temperature gauge for engine coolant

Speedometer

Tachometer. The meter indicates engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).

Gear shift indicator6 / Gear position indica- tor7. See also Gear shift indicator* (p. 274) or Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 274).

Theme "Eco"

Gauges and indicators, theme "Eco".

Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to only one white marking5, the yellow indicator symbol for low level in the fuel tank is illumi- nated. See also Trip computer (p. 114) and Filling up with fuel (p. 296).

Eco guide. See also Eco guide & Power guide* (p. 70).

Speedometer

Tachometer. The meter indicates engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).

5 When the display's message Distance to empty fuel tank: starts to show ----, the marking becomes red. 6 Manual gearbox. 7 Automatic gearbox.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory. 69

Gear shift indicator6 / Gear position indica- tor7. See also Gear shift indicator* (p. 274) or Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 274).

Theme "Performance"

Gauges and indicators, theme "Performance".

Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to only one white marking5, the yellow indicator symbol for low level in the fuel tank is illumi- nated. See also Trip computer (p. 114) and Filling up with fuel (p. 296).

Temperature gauge for engine coolant

Speedometer

Tachometer. The meter indicates engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).

Power guide. See also Eco guide & Power guide* (p. 70).

Gear shift indicator6 / Gear position indica- tor7. See also Gear shift indicator* (p. 274) or Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 274).

Indicator and warning symbols

Indicator and warning symbols, digital instrument panel.

Indicator symbols

Indicator and warning symbols

Warning symbols8

Functionality check All indicator and warning symbols, apart from symbols in the centre of the information display, illuminate in key position II or when the engine is started. When the engine has started, all the symbols should go out except the parking brake symbol, which only goes out when the brake is disengaged.

If the engine does not start or if the functionality check is carried out in key position II then all symbols go out within a few seconds except the symbol for faults in the car's emissions system and the symbol for low oil pressure.

Related information Combined instrument panel (p. 66)

Combined instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols (p. 71)

Combined instrument cluster - meaning of warning symbols (p. 73)

Analogue combined instrument panel - over- view (p. 66)

6 Manual gearbox. 7 Automatic gearbox. 5 When the display's message Distance to empty fuel tank: starts to show ----, the marking becomes red. 8 Certain engine variants do not have systems to warn of oil pressure loss. In cars with these variants the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warning for low oil level is via display text. For more information, see

Engine oil - general (p. 346).

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.70

Eco guide & Power guide* Eco guide and Power guide are two combined instrument panel (p. 66) instruments which help the driver to drive the car with optimum driving economy.

The car also stores statistics of journeys made, which can be viewed in the form of a block dia- gram; see Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 120).

Eco guide This instrument provides an indication of how economically the car is being driven.

To view this function, select the theme "Eco"; see Digital combined instrument panel - overview (p. 67).

Instantaneous value

Average value

Instantaneous value The instantaneous value is shown here - the higher the reading on the scale, the better.

The instantaneous value is calculated based on speed, engine speed, engine power utilised plus use of the foot brake.

Optimum speed (50-80 km/h (30-50 mph)) and low engine speeds are encouraged. The pointers fall during acceleration and braking.

Very low instantaneous values illuminate the red zone on the meter (with a short delay), which means poor driving economy and hence should be avoided.

Average value The average value slowly follows the instantane- ous value and describes how the car has been driven most recently. The higher the pointers on the scale, the better the economy achieved by the driver.

Power guide This instrument shows the relationship between how much power (Power) is being taken from the engine and how much power is available.

To view this function, select the theme "Performance"; see Digital combined instrument panel - overview (p. 67).

Available engine power

Engine power utilised

Available engine power The smaller, upper pointer shows the available engine power9. The higher the reading on the scale, the more power is available in the current gear.

Engine power utilised The larger, lower pointer shows the engine power utilised9. The higher the reading on the scale, the more power is being taken from the engine.

A large gap between the two pointers indicates a large power reserve.

9 Power is dependent on engine speed.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 71

Combined instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols The indicator symbols alert the driver that a func- tion is activated, that the system is operating, or that an error or failure has occurred.

Indicator symbols

Symbol Specification

ABL fault

Emissions system

ABS fault

Rear fog lamp on

Stability system, see Electronic sta- bility control (ESC) - general (p. 184)

Stability system, sport mode, see Electronic stability control (ESC) - operation (p. 186)

Engine preheater (diesel)

Low level in fuel tank

AdBlue system (diesel)

Symbol Specification

Information, read display text

Main beam On

Left-hand direction indicator

Right-hand direction indicator

Eco- function on, see Drive mode ECO* (p. 287)

Start/Stop, the engine auto-stop- ped; see Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 279)

Tyre pressure system , see Tyre monitoring (TM)* (p. 330)

ABL fault The symbol illuminates if a fault has arisen in the ABL function (Active Bending Lights).

Emissions system If the symbol illuminates after the engine has been started then it may be due to a fault in the car's emissions system. Drive to a workshop for checking. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.

ABS fault If this symbol illuminates then the system is not working. The car's regular brake system contin- ues to work, but without the ABS function.

1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the engine.

2. Restart the engine.

3. If the symbol remains illuminated, drive to a workshop to have the ABS system checked. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.

Rear fog lamp on This symbol illuminates when the rear fog lamp is switched on. There is only one rear fog lamp - it is located on the driver's side.

Stability system A flashing symbol indicates that the stability sys- tem is operating. If the symbol illuminates with constant glow then there is a fault in the system.

Stability system, sport mode The symbol illuminates when the sport mode is activated. Sport mode allows for a more active driving experience. The system then detects whether the accelerator pedal, steering wheel movements and cornering are more active than in normal driving and then allows controlled skid- ding of the rear section up to a certain level before it intervenes and stabilises the car.

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.72

Engine preheater (diesel) This symbol illuminates during engine preheating. Preheating mostly takes place due to low tem- perature.

Low level in fuel tank When the symbol illuminates the level in the fuel tank is low, refuel as soon as possible.

AdBlue10 system (diesel) This symbol lights up when the AdBlue level is low or when there is a fault in the AdBlue system. A message in the display provides information about the system status.

Information, read display text When one of the car's systems does not behave as intended, this information symbol illuminates and a text appears on the information display. The message text is cleared with the OK button, see Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 110), or it disappears automatically after a time (time depending on which function is indicated). The information symbol can also illu- minate in conjunction with other symbols.

NOTE

When a service message is shown, the sym- bol and message are cleared using the OK button, or disappear automatically after a time.

Main beam On The symbol illuminates when main beam is on and with main beam flash.

Left/right-hand direction indicator Both direction indicator symbols flash when the hazard warning flashers are used.

Eco function on This symbol illuminates when the Eco function is activated.

Start/Stop The symbol shines when the engine is auto-stop- ped.

Tyre pressure system The symbol illuminates in the event of low tyre pressure, or if a fault arises in the tyre pressure system.

Reminder doors not closed If one of the doors is not closed properly then the information or warning symbol illuminates together with an explanatory image in the infor- mation display. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possible and close the door that is open.

If the car is driven at a speed lower than approx. 7 km/h (approx. 4 mph) then the

information symbol illuminates.

If the car is driven at a speed higher than approx. 7 km/h (approx. 4 mph) then the

warning symbol illuminates.

If the bonnet11 is not closed properly then the warning symbol illuminates together with an explanatory image in the information display. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possible and close the bonnet.

If the tailgate is not closed properly then the information symbol illuminates together with an explanatory image in the information display. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possible and close the tailgate.

Related information Combined instrument panel (p. 66)

Combined instrument cluster - meaning of warning symbols (p. 73)

Analogue combined instrument panel - over- view (p. 66)

Digital combined instrument panel - overview (p. 67)

10 Registered trademark belonging to Verband der Automobilindustrie e.V. (VDA) 11 Only cars with alarm*.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

73

Combined instrument cluster - meaning of warning symbols The warning symbols alert the driver that an important function is activated, or that a serious error or a serious failure has occurred.

Warning symbols

Symbol Specification

Low oil pressureA

Parking brake applied, digital instrument panel

Parking brake applied, analogue instrument panel

Airbags SRS

Seatbelt reminder

Alternator not charging

Fault in brake system

Warning

A Certain engine variants do not have systems to warn of oil pres- sure loss. In cars with these variants the symbol for low oil pres- sure is not used. Warning for low oil level is via display text. For more information, see Engine oil - general (p. 346).

Low oil pressure If this symbol illuminates during driving then the engine's oil pressure is too low. Stop the engine immediately and check the engine oil level, top up if necessary. If the symbol illuminates and the oil level is normal, contact a workshop. Volvo rec- ommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.

Parking brake applied This symbol illuminates with a constant glow when the parking brake is applied. The symbol is illuminated during application. For more informa- tion, see Parking brake (p. 291).

Airbags SRS If the symbol remains illuminated or illuminates while driving, a fault has been detected in one of the car's safety systems. Drive to a workshop for checking as soon as possible. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.

Seatbelt reminder This symbol flashes if someone in a front seat has not put on their seatbelt or if someone in a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt.

Alternator not charging This symbol illuminates during driving if a fault has occurred in the electrical system. Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.

Fault in brake system If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level may be too low. Stop the car in a safe place and check the level in the brake fluid reservoir; see Brake and clutch fluid - level (p. 350).

If the brake and ABS symbols illuminate at the same time, there may be a fault in the brake force distribution system.

1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the engine.

2. Restart the engine.

If both symbols extinguish, continue driv- ing.

If the symbols remain illuminated, check the level in the brake fluid reservoir; see Brake and clutch fluid - level (p. 350). If the brake fluid level is normal but the symbols are still illuminated, the car can be driven, with great care, to a workshop to have the brake system checked. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.74

WARNING If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.

The loss of brake fluid must be investigated by a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are lit at the same time, there is a risk that the rear end will skid during heavy braking.

Warning The red warning symbol illuminates when a fault has been indicated which could affect the safety and/or driveability of the car. An explanatory text is shown on the information display at the same time. The symbol remains visible until the fault has been rectified but the text message can be cleared with the OK button; see Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 110). The warn- ing symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols.

Action:

1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the car fur- ther.

2. Read the information on the information dis- play. Implement the action in accordance with the message in the display. Clear the message using the OK button.

Reminder doors not closed If one of the doors is not closed properly then the information or warning symbol illuminates together with an explanatory image in the infor- mation display. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possible and close the door that is open.

If the car is driven at a speed lower than approx. 7 km/h (approx. 4 mph) then the

information symbol illuminates.

If the car is driven at a speed higher than approx. 7 km/h (approx. 4 mph) then the

warning symbol illuminates.

If the bonnet12 is not closed properly then the warning symbol illuminates together with an explanatory image in the information display. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possible and close the bonnet.

If the tailgate is not closed properly then the information symbol illuminates together with an explanatory image in the information display. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possible and close the tailgate.

Related information Combined instrument panel (p. 66)

Combined instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols (p. 71)

Analogue combined instrument panel - over- view (p. 66)

Digital combined instrument panel - overview (p. 67)

12 Only cars with alarm*.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

75

Outside temperature gauge The display for the outside temperature gauge appears in the combined instrument panel.

Display for outside temperature gauge, digi- tal instrument panel

Display for outside temperature gauge, ana- logue instrument panel

When the temperature lies between +2 C to -5 C a snowflake symbol illuminates in the display. This warns of icy roads. If the car has been sta- tionary, the gauge may display a reading that is too high.

Related information Combined instrument panel (p. 66)

Trip meter The trip meter display appears in the combined instrument panel.

Trip meter, digital instrument.

Display for trip meter13

The two trip meters T1 and T2 are used for measuring short distances. The distance is shown in the display.

Turn the left stalk switch thumbwheel to show the required meter.

A long press (until the change occurs) on the left-hand stalk switch's RESET button resets the trip meter shown. For more information, see Trip computer (p. 114).

Related information Combined instrument panel (p. 66)

Clock The clock display appears in the combined instrument panel.

Clock, digital instrument panel.

Display for showing the time14

Set the clock The clock can be adjusted in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 113).

Related information Combined instrument panel (p. 66)

13 Display appearance may differ depending on instrument variant.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

76

Combined instrument panel - license agreement A license is an agreement for the right to oper- ate a certain activity or the right to use someone else's entitlement according to the terms and conditions in the agreement. The following text is Volvo's agreement with the manufacturer/devel- oper.

Combined Instrument Panel Software Open Source Software Notice

This product uses certain free / open source and other software originating from third parties, that is subject to the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2 (LGPLv2), The FreeType Project License ("FreeType License") and other different and/or additional copy right licenses, disclaimers and notices. The links to access the exact terms of LGPLv2, and the other open source software licenses, disclaimers, acknowledgements and notices are provided to you below. Please refer to the exact terms of the relevant License, regarding your rights under said licenses. Volvo Car Corporation (VCC) offers to provide the source code of said free/open source software to you for a charge covering the cost of performing such distribution, such as the cost of media, shipping and handling, upon written request. Please contact your nearest Volvo Dealer.

The offer is valid for a period of at least three (3) years from the date of the distribution of this product by VCC / or for as long as VCC offers spare parts or customer support.

Portions of this product uses software copyrighted 2007 The FreeType Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.

Portions of this product uses software with Copyright 19942013 Lua.org, PUC-Rio (http://www.lua.org/)

This product includes software under following licenses:

LGPL v2.1: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old- licenses/lgpl-2.1.html

GNU FriBidi

DevIL

The FreeType Project License: http:// git.savannah.gnu.org/cgit/freetype/freetype2.git/ tree/docs/FTL.TXT

FreeType 2

MIT License: http://opensource.org/licenses/ mit-license.html

Lua

14 The time is shown in the middle of the instrument panel when an analogue instrument panel is fitted.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 77

Symbols in the display There are a variety of different symbols in the display in the car. The symbols are divided into warning, indicator and information symbols.

Shown below are the most common symbols with their meanings and a reference to where in the manual further information can be found.

- Red warning symbol, illuminates when a fault has been indicated which could affect the safety and/or driveability of the car. An explana- tory text is shown on the information display in the combined instrument panel at the same time.

- When one of the car's systems does not behave as intended, this information symbol illu- minates, and a text appears on the information display in the combined instrument panel. The yellow information symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols.

Warning symbols in the combined instrument panel

Symbol Specification See

Low oil pressure (p. 73)

Parking brake applied, digital instrument panel

(p. 73), (p. 291)

Symbol Specification See

Parking brake applied, analogue instrument panel

(p. 73)

Airbags SRS (p. 32), (p. 73)

Seatbelt reminder (p. 28), (p. 73)

Alternator not charg- ing

(p. 73)

Fault in brake sys- tem

(p. 73), (p. 289)

Warning, safety mode

(p. 32), (p. 41), (p. 73)

Control symbols in the combined instrument panel

Symbol Specification See

ABL fault* (p. 71), (p. 94)

Emissions system (p. 71)

ABS fault (p. 71), (p. 289)

Symbol Specification See

Rear fog lamp on (p. 71), (p. 98)

Stability system, ESC (Electronic Stability Control), Trailer stability assist*

(p. 71), (p. 187), (p. 312)

Stability system, sport mode

(p. 71), (p. 187)

Engine preheater (diesel)

(p. 71)

Low level in fuel tank

(p. 71), (p. 139)

AdBlue system (diesel)

(p. 303)

Information, read display text

(p. 71)

Main beam On (p. 71), (p. 91)

Left-hand direction indicators

(p. 71)

Right-hand direc- tion indicators

(p. 71)

Start/Stop*, engine auto-stopped

(p. 71), (p. 279)

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.78

Symbol Specification See

ECO function* on (p. 71), (p. 287)

Tyre pressure sys- tem*

(p. 71), Tyre monitoring (TM)* (p. 330)

Information symbols in the combined instrument panel

Symbol Specification See

Main beam with auto dimming - AHB*

(p. 92)

Camera sensor*, Laser sensor*

(p. 92), (p. 226), (p. 235), (p. 248), (p. 253)

Adaptive cruise con- trol*

(p. 212)

Adaptive cruise con- trol*

(p. 204), (p. 212)

Adaptive cruise con- trol*, Distance Warn- ing* (Distance Alert)

(p. 212), (p. 197)

Adaptive cruise con- trol*

(p. 203)

Symbol Specification See

Cruise control* (p. 192)

Speed limiter (p. 189)

Radar sensor* (p. 212), (p. 200), (p. 235)

Start/Stop* (p. 285)

Start/Stop* (p. 285)

Start/Stop* (p. 285)

Distance warning* (Distance Alert), City SafetyTM, Collision warning system*, Auto-brake*

(p. 200), (p. 226), (p. 235)

Engine block and passenger compart- ment heater*

(p. 139)

Symbol Specification See

Engine block heater and passenger com- partment heater* Service required

(p. 139)

Activated timer* (p. 139)

Activated timer* (p. 139)

ABL system* (p. 94)

Low battery (p. 139)

Park Assist Pilot - PAP*

(p. 262)

Rain sensor* (p. 102)

Lane assistance* (p. 251)

Driver Alert System*, Lane assistance*

(p. 253)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 79

Symbol Specification See

Driver Alert System*, Lane assistance*

(p. 248), (p. 253)

Driver Alert System*, Time for a break

(p. 247)

Driver Alert System*, Time for a break

(p. 248)

Gear shift indicator (p. 274)

Gear positions (p. 274)

Recorded speed information*

(p. 243)

Measuring the oil level

(p. 347)

Information symbols in the roof console display

Symbol Specification See

Seatbelt reminder (p. 31)

Airbag, passenger seat, activated

(p. 36)

Airbag, passenger seat, deactivated

(p. 36)

Related information Combined instrument panel - meaning of

indicator symbols (p. 71)

Combined instrument cluster - meaning of warning symbols (p. 73)

Messages - handling (p. 113)

Volvo Sensus Volvo Sensus is the heart of the personal Volvo experience and connects you with the car and outside world. Sensus provides information, entertainment and assistance when it is needed. Sensus consists of intuitive functions that both enhance the car journey and simplifies owner- ship of the car.

An intuitive navigation structure makes it possible to receive relevant support, information and entertainment when it is necessary, without dis- tracting the driver.

Sensus covers all the car's solutions that enable connection* to the outside world and provides you with intuitive control over all the car's capabil- ities.

Volvo Sensus combines and presents many func- tions in several of the car's systems on the centre console's screen. With Volvo Sensus the car can be personalised by means of an intuitive user

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.80

interface. Settings can be made in Car settings, Audio and media, Climate control, etc.

With the centre console buttons and controls or the steering wheel's right-hand keypad* functions can be activated or deactivated and many differ- ent settings can be made.

With a press on MY CAR all settings related to the driving and control of the car are presented, such as City Safety, locks and alarm, automatic fan speed, setting the clock, etc.

With a press on the respective function RADIO,

MEDIA, TEL*, *, NAV* and CAM15 other sources, systems and functions can be activated, e.g. AM, FM, CD, DVD*, TV*, Bluetooth*, naviga- tion* and park assist camera*.

For more information about all functions/ systems, see the relevant section in the owner's manual or its supplement.

Overview

Control panel in centre console. The figure is schematic - the number of functions and layout of the buttons both vary, depending on the equipment selected and the mar- ket.

Navigation* - NAV, see separate supplement (Sensus Navigation).

Audio and media - RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*, see separate supplement (Sensus Infotainment).

Internet-connected car - *, see separate supplement (Sensus Infotainment).

Climate control system (p. 122).

Function settings - MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 113).

Key positions The remote control key can be used to set the vehicle's electrical system in different modes/ levels so that different functions are available; see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 81).

Ignition switch with remote control key extracted/ inserted.

NOTE

For cars with the keyless start and lock sys- tem* function the key does not need to be inserted into the ignition switch but can be stored in e.g. a pocket. For more information on the keyless start and lock system, see Keyless drive* (p. 165).

15 Applies to certain car models.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

81

Insert the key 1. Hold the end of the remote control key with

the detachable key blade and insert the key in the ignition switch.

2. Then press the key in the lock up to its end position.

IMPORTANT

Foreign objects in the ignition switch can impair the function or destroy the lock.

Do not press in the remote control key incor- rectly turned - Hold the end with the detacha- ble key blade; see Detachable key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 163).

Withdraw the key Grip the remote control key and pull it out from the ignition switch.

Key positions - functions at different levels To enable the use of a limited number of func- tions with the engine switched off, the car's elec- trical system can be set in 3 different levels - 0, I and II - with the remote control key. This owner's manual describes these levels throughout using the denomination "key positions".

The following table shows the functions available in each key position/level.

Level Functions

0 Odometer, clock and temperature gauge are illuminated.

Electrically operated seats can be adjusted.

The audio system can be used for a limited time - see the Sensus Infotainment supplement.

I Sunroof, power windows, 12 V socket in the passenger compart- ment, navigation, phone, ventilation fan and windscreen wipers can be used.

II The headlamps come on.

Warning/indicator lamps illuminate for 5 seconds.

Several other systems are acti- vated. However, electric heating in seat cushions and the rear window can only be activated after starting the engine.

This key position consumes a lot of current from the starter battery and should therefore be avoided!

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.82

Selecting key position/level Key position 0 - Unlock the car - This

means that the car's electrical system is at level 0.

NOTE

To reach level I or II without starting the engine - do not depress the brake/clutch pedal when these key positions are due to be selected.

Key position I - With the remote control key fully inserted into the ignition switch16 - Briefly press START/STOP ENGINE.

Key position II - With the remote control key fully inserted into the ignition switch16 - Give a long17 press on START/STOP ENGINE.

Back to key position 0 - To return to key position 0 from position II and I - Briefly press on START/STOP ENGINE.

Audio system For information on audio system functions with remote control key removed, see the Sensus Infotainment supplement.

Starting and stopping the engine For information about starting/switching off the engine, see Starting the engine (p. 270).

Towing For important information about the remote con- trol key during towing, see Towing (p. 313).

Related information Key positions (p. 80)

Seats, front The car's front seats have different setting options for optimum seating comfort.

To adjust lumbar support*, turn the wheel18.

Forward/backward: lift the handle to adjust the distance to the steering wheel and ped- als. Check that the seat is locked after adjusting position.

To raise/lower the front edge of seat cush- ion*, pump up/down.

Adjust backrest rake, turn the wheel.

Raise/lower the seat*, pump up/down.

Control panel for power seat*, see Seats, front - electrically operated (p. 84).

16 Not required for cars with keyless start and lock system*. 17 Approx. 2 seconds. 18 Also applies to electrically operated seat.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory. 83

WARNING Adjust the position of the driver's seat before setting off, never while driving. Make sure that the seat is in locked position in order to avoid personal injury in the event of heavy braking or an accident.

Adjusting the front seat head restraints

The height of the head restraints can be adjusted.

Adjust the head restraint based on the person's height so that the whole of the back of the head is covered if possible.

To adjust the height, the button (see illustration) must be pressed while the restraint is moved up or down.

The head restraint can be adjusted in three dif- ferent positions.

Lowering the passenger seat backrest*

The passenger seat backrest can be folded for- ward to make room for long loads.

Move the seat as far back/down as possible.

Adjust the backrest to an upright position.

Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest and fold it forward.

4. Push the seat forward so that the head restraint "locks" in under the glovebox.

Raising takes place in reverse order.

WARNING Do not use the seat behind the passenger seat, or the rear centre seat, when the pas- senger seat's backrest is lowered.

WARNING Grasp the backrest and make sure that it is properly locked after being folded up in order to avoid personal injury in the event of sudden braking or an accident.

Related information Seats, front - electrically operated (p. 84)

Seats, rear (p. 85)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.84

Seats, front - electrically operated The car's front seats have different setting options for optimum seating comfort. The power seat can be moved forward/backward and up/ down. The front edge of the seat cushion can be raised/lowered. The backrest angle can be changed.

Electrically operated seat*

Front edge of seat cushion up/down

Raise/lower seat

Seat, forward/backward

Backrest rake

The power seats have overload protection which is tripped if a seat is blocked by an object. If this should happen, set the car's electrical system in

key position I or 0 and wait a short time before adjusting the seat again.

Only one movement (forward/back/up/down) can be made at a time.

Preparations The seat can be adjusted for a certain time after unlocking the door with the remote control key without the key in the ignition switch. Seat adjust- ment is normally made in key position I and can always be made when the engine is running.

Seat with memory function*

The memory function stores settings for the seat and the door mirrors.

Store setting Memory button

Memory button

Memory button

Button for storing settings

1. Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.

2. Press and hold button M while pressing but- ton 1, 2 or 3 simultaneously. Hold the but- tons depressed until the acoustic signal is heard and the text is shown the combined instrument panel.

The seat must be adjusted again before a new memory can be set.

Using a stored setting Press one of the memory buttons 1-3 until the seat and the door mirrors stop. If the button is released, the movement of the seat and door mir- rors will be interrupted.

Key memory* in remote control key All remote control keys can be used by different drivers to store the settings for the driver's seat and door mirrors19, see Remote control key - per- sonalisation* (p. 157).

19 Only if the car is equipped with power seat with memory and retractable power door mirrors.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 85

Emergency stop If the seat accidentally begins to move, press one of the setting buttons for the seat or memory buttons in order to stop the seat.

WARNING Risk of crushing! Make sure that children do not play with the controls. Check that there are no objects in front of, behind or under the seat during adjustment. Make sure that none of the passengers in the rear seat is in danger of becoming trapped.

Heated seats For heated seats, see Heated front seats* (p. 129) and Heated rear seat* (p. 129).

Related information Seats, front (p. 82)

Seats, rear (p. 85)

Seats, rear The rear seat backrest and the outer seat head restraints can be folded. The centre seat head restraint can be adjusted to suit the height of the passenger.

Head restraint, centre seat, rear

Adjust the head restraint according to passenger height so that the whole of the back of the head is covered if possible. Slide it up as required.

To lower the head restraint again, the button (see illustration) must be pressed while the restraint is carefully moved down.

The head restraint can be adjusted in five differ- ent positions.

WARNING The centre seat head restraint must be in its lowest position when the centre seat is not used. When the centre seat is used, the head restraint must be correctly adjusted to the height of the passenger so that it covers the whole of the back of the head if possible.

Manual lowering of the outer head restraints, rear seat

Pull the locking handle closest to the head restraint to fold the head restraint forward.

The head restraint is moved back manually.

WARNING The head restraint must be in locked position after being folded up.

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

86

Lowering the rear seat backrest

IMPORTANT

When the backrest is to be folded, the rear seat cup holder must not be open and there must be no objects in the rear seat. Nor may the seat belts be connected. Otherwise there is a risk of damage to the rear seat uphols- tery.

NOTE

The front seats may need to be pushed for- wards, and/or the backrests adjusted upwards, in order that the rear backrests can be fully folded forward.

Both sections can be folded separately.

If the entire backrest is to be folded then the different sections should be folded sepa- rately.

If the right-hand section is being lowered - release and adjust head restraint for the cen- tre seat, see the earlier section "Head restraint, centre seat, rear".

The outer head restraints are lowered auto- matically when the backrests are lowered.

Pull up the backrest's locking handle while folding the backrest forward at the same time. A red indicator on the lock catch

shows that the backrest is no longer locked in place.

NOTE

When the backrests have been lowered the head restraints must be moved forward slightly so as not to make contact with the seat cushion.

Raising takes place in reverse order.

NOTE

When the backrest has been raised, the red indicator should no longer be showing. If it is still showing then the backrest is not locked in place.

WARNING Check that the backrests and head restraints in the rear seat are locked properly after being folded up.

Related information Seats, front (p. 82)

Seats, front - electrically operated (p. 84)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 87

Steering wheel The steering wheel can be adjusted in different positions and has controls for horn and cruise control, as well as menu, audio and phone con- trol.

Adjusting

Adjusting the steering wheel.

Lever - releasing the steering wheel

Possible steering wheel positions

The steering wheel can be adjusted for both height and depth:

1. Push the lever forwards to release the steer- ing wheel.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position that suits you.

3. Pull the lever back to fix the steering wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press the steering wheel lightly at the same time as you push the lever back.

WARNING Adjust the steering wheel and fix it before driving away. The steering wheel must never be adjusted while driving.

With speed related power steering* the level of steering force can be adjusted, see Adjustable steering force* (p. 184).

Keypads* and paddles*

Keypads and paddles in the steering wheel.

Cruise control* (p. 192) and Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 201).

Paddle for manual gear changing in an auto- matic gearbox, see Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 274).

Audio and phone control, see supplement Sensus Infotainment.

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.88

Horn

Horn.

Press the centre of the steering wheel to signal.

Light switches The headlamp control activates and adjusts the external lighting. It is also used to adjust display and instrument lighting and ambience lights (p. 100).

Overview, light switches.

Thumbwheel for adjusting display and instru- ment lighting as well as ambience lights*

Button for rear fog lamp

Knob for lighting while driving and parking

Thumbwheel for headlamp levelling

A car with LED20 headlamps* has automatic headlamp levelling and therefore does not have the thumbwheel for headlamp levelling.

Knob positions

Position Specification

Daytime running lightsA when the car's electrical system is in key position II or the engine is running.

Main beam flash can be used.

Daytime running lights, side marker lamps rear and position lamps when the car's electrical system is in key position II or the engine is running.

Side marker lamps rear and posi- tion lamps when the car is parkedB.

Main beam flash can be used.

Daytime running lights, side marker lamps rear and position lamps in daylight when the car's electrical system is in key position II or the engine is running.

Dipped beam, side marker lamps rear and position lamps in weak daylight or darkness, or when rear fog lamps are activated.

The tunnel detection (p. 91)* function is activated.

20 LED (Light Emitting Diode)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory. 89

Position Specification

The Active main beam (p. 92)* function can be used.

Main beam can be activated when dipped beam is switched on.

Main beam flash can be used.

Dipped beam, side marker lamps rear and position lamps.

Main beam can be activated.

Main beam flash can be used.

A Fitted in or under the front bumper. B Also at idle when the engine is running, provided that the knob

is moved to this position from another position.

Volvo recommends that mode is used when the car is driven.

WARNING The car's audio system is not able to deter- mine when daylight is too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in fog and rain, in all situations.

The driver is always responsible for ensuring that the car is driven with a beam pattern suit- able for the traffic situation and in accordance with applicable traffic regulations.

Display and instrument lighting Different display and instrument lighting is switched on depending on key position; see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 81).

The display lighting is automatically subdued in darkness - the sensitivity is set with the thumb- wheel.

The intensity of the instrument lighting is adjusted with the thumbwheel.

Headlamp levelling The load in the car changes the vertical align- ment of the headlamp beam, which could dazzle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting the height of the beam. Lower the beam if the car is heavily laden.

1. Leave the engine running, or have the car's electrical system in key position I.

2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/lower beam alignment.

Thumbwheel positions for different load cases.

Only driver

Driver and passenger in the front passenger seat

Occupants in all seats

Occupants in all seats and maximum load in the cargo area

Driver and maximum load in the cargo area

Related information Position lamps (p. 90)

Daytime running lights (p. 90)

Main/dipped beam (p. 91)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

90

Position lamps Position lamps are switched on using the head- lamp control's knob.

Knob for headlamp control in the position for position lamps.

Turn the knob to the position for (number plate lighting is switched on at the same time).

If the car's electrical system is in key position II or the engine is running then the daytime running lights also switch on.

When it is dark outside and the tailgate is opened the rear position lamps illuminate to alert traffic behind. This takes place irrespective of what position the knob is in or what key position the car's electrical system is in.

When driving for more than 30 seconds at max. 10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), or if the speed exceeds 10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), the daytime

running lights are switched on and Reset light switch position is shown in the combined instrument panel, which prompts you to turn to a

mode other than .

Related information Light switches (p. 88)

Daytime running lights With the knob for headlamp control in position, and the car's electrical system in key position II or the engine running, the daytime running lights are activated automatically in day- light.

Daytime running lights during the day. DRL

Knob for headlamp control in AUTO position.

With the knob for headlamp control in position the daytime running lights (Daytime Running Lights - DRL) are activated automati- cally when the car is driven in daylight. A light sensor on the top of the instrument panel changes from daytime running lights to dipped beam at twilight or when daylight becomes too weak. Switching to dipped beam also takes place when the rear fog lamps are activated.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 91

WARNING This system help to save energy - it cannot determine in all situations when daylight is too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist and rain.

The driver is always responsible for ensuring that the car is driven with the correct beam pattern for the traffic situation and in accord- ance with applicable traffic regulations.

Related information Main/dipped beam (p. 91)

Light switches (p. 88)

Tunnel detection* Tunnel detection changes the lighting from day- time running lights to dipped beam when the car is driven into a tunnel.

The tunnel detection function is available in cars with rain sensor*. The sensor detects the entrance to a tunnel and resets the lighting from daytime running lights to dipped beam. Approx. 20 seconds after the car has left the tunnel, the lighting returns to daytime running lights. If the car is driven into another tunnel within this time period then dipped beam is kept switched on. This prevents frequent changes to the car's beam pattern.

Note that the headlamp control's knob must

remain in position for tunnel detection to work.

Related information Main/dipped beam (p. 91)

Light switches (p. 88)

Main/dipped beam With the knob for headlamp control in position

and the car's electrical system in key posi- tion II or the engine running, the dipped beam is activated automatically in poor light conditions.

Stalk switch and knob for headlamp control.

Position for main beam flash

Position for main beam

Dipped beam With the knob in position, dipped beam is activated automatically at dusk or when daylight becomes too weak. Dipped beam is also acti- vated automatically if the rear fog lamp is acti- vated.

With the knob in position, dipped beam is always switched on when the engine is running or when key position II is active.

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.92

Main beam flash Move the stalk switch gently towards the steering wheel to the position for main beam flash. Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is released.

Main beam Main beam can be activated when the knob is in

position 21 or . Activate/deactivate main beam by moving the stalk switch towards the steering wheel to the end position and then releasing. Alternatively, the main beam can be deactivated by a light press of the stalk switch toward the steering wheel.

When main beam has been activated the symbol illuminates in the combined instrument panel.

Related information Active bending lights* (p. 94)

Active main beam* (p. 92)

Light switches (p. 88)

Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pattern (p. 95)

Tunnel detection* (p. 91)

Active main beam*

Active main beam function detects the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the rear lights of vehicles in front, and switches the lighting from main beam to dipped beam. The lighting returns to main beam when the incoming light has stop- ped.

Active main beam - AHB Active main beam (Active High Beam - AHB) is a function which uses a camera sensor at the top edge of the windscreen to detect the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the rear lights of vehicles in front, and then switches from main beam to dipped beam. The function can also take streetlights into account.

The lighting returns to main beam about a sec- ond after the camera sensor no longer detects the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front.

Activating/deactivating AHB can be activated when the headlamp con-

trol's knob is in position (provided that the function has not been deactivated in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 113)).

Stalk switch and knob for headlamp control in AUTO position.

The function can start while driving in the dark when the car's speed is approx. 20 km/h (12 mph) or higher.

Activate/deactivate AHB by moving the left-hand stalk switch towards the steering wheel to the end position and then releasing. Deactivation when main beam is on means that the lights are reset directly to dipped beam.

Car with analogue combined instrument panel

When AHB is activated the symbol illumi- nates in the instrument's information display.

21 When dipped beam is activated.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory. 93

When main beam has been switched on the

symbol also illuminates in the combined instrument panel.

Car with digital combined instrument panel

When AHB is activated the symbol turns white in the instrument's information display.

When main beam is activated, the symbol shines blue.

Manual operation

NOTE

Keep the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist and dirt.

Do not stick or attach anything to the wind- screen in front of the camera sensor as this may reduce effectiveness or cause one or more of the systems dependent on the cam- era to stop working.

If the message Active main beam Temporary unavailable Switch manually is shown in the combined instrument panel's information display then you have to switch manually between main and dipped beam. However, the knob for head-

lamp control can still remain in position . The same applies if the message Windscreen sensors blocked See manual and the

symbol are shown. The symbol goes out when these messages are shown.

AHB may be temporarily unavailable e.g. in situa- tions with dense fog or heavy rain. When AHB becomes available again, or the windscreen sen- sors are no longer blocked, the message goes

out and the symbol illuminates.

WARNING AHB is an aid for using the optimum beam pattern when conditions are favourable.

The driver always bears responsibility for man- ually switching between main and dipped beam when traffic situations or weather con- ditions so require.

IMPORTANT

Examples of when manual switching between main and dipped beam may be required:

In heavy rain or dense fog

In freezing rain

In snow flurries or slush

In moonlight

When driving in poorly lit built-up areas

When the traffic ahead has weak lighting

If there are pedestrians on or beside the road

If there are highly reflective objects such as signs in the vicinity of the road

When the lighting from oncoming traffic is obscured by e.g. a crash barrier

When there is traffic on connecting roads

On the brow of a hill or in a hollow

In sharp bends.

For more information on the limitations of the camera sensor, see Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations (p. 234).

Related information Main/dipped beam (p. 91)

Light switches (p. 88)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.94

Active bending lights* Active bending lights are designed to provide maximum illumination in bends and junctions.

Cars with LED22 headlamps* can have active bending lights, depending on the car's equip- ment level.

Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) and activated (right) respectively.

The LED headlamps can include the Active bend- ing lights function, depending on the car's equip- ment level. Active bending lights follow steering wheel movements to provide maximum illumina- tion in bends and junctions and thereby increase safety.

The function is activated automatically when the car is started (provided that it has not been deac-

tivated in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 113)). In the event of a fault in the func-

tion the symbol illuminates in the com- bined instrument panel at the same time as the information display shows an explanatory text and a further illuminated symbol.

Symbol Message Specification

Headlamp system malfunction Service required

The system is dis- engaged. Visit a workshop if the message remains. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

The function is only active in twilight or darkness and only when the car is moving.

The function23 can be deactivated/activated in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 113).

Related information Main/dipped beam (p. 91)

Active main beam* (p. 92)

Light switches (p. 88)

22 LED (Light Emitting Diode) 23 Activated on delivery from the factory.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 95

Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pattern The halogen headlamp pattern must be adjusted to avoid dazzling oncoming motorists and can be set for right or left-hand traffic.

LED headlamps* The light pattern does not need to be adjusted. The headlamp pattern is designed in such a way that oncoming traffic is not dazzled.

Halogen headlamps The headlamp pattern for halogen headlamps is readjusted by masking the headlamp lens. The headlamp pattern may not be as good.

Masking the headlamps 1. Copy the A and B templates for left-hand

drive cars or the C and D templates for right- hand drive cars, see later section "Templates for halogen headlamps". The templates have a scale of 1:2. Use a photocopier with a zoom function for example, and copy the templates at 200 %:

A = LHD Right (left-hand drive, right lens)

B = LHD Left (left-hand drive, left lens)

C = RHD Right (right-hand drive, right lens)

D = RHD Left (right-hand drive, left lens)

2. Transfer the template to a self-adhesive waterproof material and cut it out.

3. Start from the design lines on the headlamp lenses; see the lines in the following figure. Position the self-adhesive templates at the design lines with the help of the illustration.

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

96

Upper row: left-hand drive cars, templates A and B. Lower row: right-hand drive cars, templates C and D.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

97

Templates for halogen headlamps

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

98

Rear fog lamp When visibility is reduced by fog the rear fog lamp can be used so that other road users can detect the vehicle in front at an early stage.

Button for rear fog lamp.

The rear fog lamp consists of a lamp on the left- hand side in a left-hand drive car, or on the right- hand side in a right-hand drive car.

The rear fog lamp can only be switched on when key position II is active or the engine is running and the headlamp control's knob is in position

or .

Press the button for On/Off. The indicator sym-

bol in the combined instrument panel and the light in the button both illuminate when the rear fog lamp is switched on.

The rear fog lamp is switched off automatically when the START/STOP ENGINE button is depressed or when the headlamp control's knob

is turned to position or .

NOTE

Regulations on the use of rear fog lamps vary from country to country.

Related information Light switches (p. 88)

Brake lights The brake light automatically comes on during braking.

The brake light is switched on when the brake pedal is depressed. In addition, it is switched on when one of driving support systems Adaptive cruise control (p. 201), City Safety (p. 220) or Collision warning system (p. 227) brakes the car.

Related information Foot brake - emergency brake lights and

automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 290)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

99

Hazard warning flashers The hazard warning flashers warn other road users by means of all of the car's direction indi- cator lamps flashing simultaneously when this function is activated.

Button for hazard warning flashers.

Press the button to activate the hazard warning flashers. Both direction indicator symbols in the combined instrument panel flash when the haz- ard warning flashers are used.

The hazard warning flashers are activated auto- matically when the car has been braked so sud- denly that the emergency brake lights have been activated and speed is below approx. 10 km/h (6 mph). The hazard warning flashers remain active when the car has stopped and are deacti- vated automatically when you start driving again; they can also be deactivated by pressing the but- ton.

Related information direction indicators (p. 99)

Foot brake - emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 290)

direction indicators The car's direction indicators are operated with the left-hand stalk switch. The direction indicator lamps flash three times or continuously, depend- ing on how far up or down the stalk switch is moved.

Direction indicators.

Short flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to the first position and release. The direction indicator lamps flash three times. The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 113).

Continuous flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to its end position.

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.100

The stalk switch remains in its position and is moved back manually, or automatically by the steering wheel movement.

Direction indicator symbols For direction indicator symbols, see Combined instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols (p. 71).

Related information Hazard warning flashers (p. 99)

Interior lighting The passenger compartment lighting is acti- vated/deactivated with the buttons in the con- trols above the front seats and the rear seat.

Controls in roof console for the front reading lamps and passenger compartment lighting.

Reading lamp, left-hand side

Passenger compartment lighting (floor lamps* and ceiling lamps) - On/Off

Auto function for passenger compartment lighting

Reading lamp, right-hand side

All lighting in the passenger compartment can be switched on and off manually within 30 minutes from when:

the engine has been switched off and the car's electrical system is in key position 0

the car has been unlocked but the engine has not been started.

Front reading lamps* The reading lamps are switched on or off by briefly pressing the relevant button in the roof console.

Brightness is adjusted by holding the button pressed in.

Rear reading lamps*

Rear reading lamps.

The lamps are switched on or off by briefly press- ing the relevant button.

Brightness is adjusted by holding the button pressed in.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory. 101

Floor lighting as ambient light* To make the interior brighter while driving the floor lighting can be activated at dimmed level.

Floor lamp intensity can be changed in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 113).

Lighting in the front door storage compartments* Lighting in the front door storage compartments comes on when the engine starts.

Glovebox lighting Glovebox lighting is switched on and off respec- tively when the lid is opened or closed.

Vanity mirror lighting The lighting for the vanity mirror (p. 147) is switched on and off respectively when the cover is opened or closed.

Lighting in the cargo area The lighting in the cargo area is switched on and off respectively when the tailgate is opened or closed.

Auto function for passenger compartment lighting The auto function is activated when the lamp in the AUTO button is lit.

The passenger compartment lighting is then switched on and off as indicated below.

The passenger compartment lighting is switched on and remains on for 30 seconds if:

the car is unlocked with the remote control key or key blade, see Remote control key - functions (p. 160) or Detachable key blade - unlocking doors (p. 164)

the engine has been switched off and the car's electrical system is in key position 0.

Passenger compartment lighting is switched off when:

the engine is started

the car is locked.

The passenger compartment lighting is switched on and off respectively when a side door is opened or closed.

It remains switched on for two minutes if one of the doors is open.

If any lighting is switched on manually and the car is locked then it will be switched off automati- cally after two minutes.

Ambience lights* When the normal passenger compartment light- ing is switched off and the engine is running, an LED illuminates in the front and rear roof console respectively in order to provide a low light and enhance the ambience while driving. The light also makes it easier during dark periods of the day to see objects in storage compartments, etc. This lighting switches off when the engine is

switched off. The intensity and colour of the light can be changed in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 113).

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

102

Home safe lighting Home safe lighting consists of dipped beam, position lamps, lamps in the outside handles and number plate lighting.

Some of the exterior lighting can be kept switched on to work as home safe lighting after the car has been locked.

1. Remove the remote control key from the ignition switch.

2. Move the left-hand stalk switch toward the steering wheel to the end position and release it. The function can be activated in the same way as with main beam flash; see Main/dipped beam (p. 91).

3. Get out of the car and lock the door.

When the function is activated, dipped beam, position lamps, lamps in the outside handles and number plate lighting are switched on.

The length of time for which the home safe light- ing should be kept on can be set in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 113).

Related information Approach light duration (p. 102)

Approach light duration Approach lighting consists of position lamps, lamps in the door mirrors, number plate lighting, interior roof lighting as well as floor lighting.

Approach lighting is switched on with the remote control key, see Remote control key - functions (p. 160), and is used to switch on the car's light- ing at a distance.

When the function is activated with the remote control key, position lamps, lamps in the outside handles, number plate lighting, interior roof light- ing and floor lighting are switched on.

The length of time for which the approach light- ing should be kept on can be set in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 113).

Related information Home safe lighting (p. 102)

Wipers and washers Wipers and washers clean the windscreen and rear window. The headlamps are cleaned with high-pressure washing.

Windscreen wipers24

Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers.

Rain sensor, On/Off

Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency

Windscreen wipers off Move the stalk switch to position 0 to switch off the windscreen wipers.

Single sweep Raise the stalk switch and release to make one sweep.

24 For replacing the wiper blades and service position wiper blades, see Wiper blades (p. 359). For filling washer fluid, see Washer fluid - filling (p. 361).

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 103

Intermittent wiping Set the number of sweeps per time unit with the thumbwheel when inter- mittent wiping is selected.

Continuous wiping The wipers sweep at normal speed.

The wipers sweep at high speed.

IMPORTANT

Before activating the wipers - ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen in, and that any snow or ice on the windscreen (and rear win- dow) is scraped away.

IMPORTANT

Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers are cleaning the windscreen. The windscreen must be wet when the windscreen wipers are operating.

Service position wiper blade For cleaning the windscreen/wiper blades and replacement of wiper blades, see Car wash (p. 376) and Wiper blades (p. 359).

Rain sensor* The rain sensor automatically starts the wind- screen wipers based on how much water it

detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be adjusted using the thumb- wheel.

When the rain sensor is activated a lamp in the button is illuminated and the rain sensor symbol

is shown in the combined instrument panel.

Activating and setting the sensitivity When activating the rain sensor, the car must be running or the remote control key in position I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk switch must be in position 0 or in the position for a single sweep.

Activate the rain sensor by pressing the rain sen-

sor button . The windscreen wipers make one sweep.

Press the stalk switch up for the wipers to make an extra sweep.

Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensitiv- ity and downward for lower sensitivity. (An extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is turned upward.)

Deactivate Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the rain

sensor button or move the stalk switch down to another wiper program.

The rain sensor is automatically deactivated when the remote control key is removed from the igni-

tion switch or five minutes after the engine has been switched off.

IMPORTANT

The windscreen wipers could start and be damaged in an automatic car wash. Switch off the rain sensor while the car is in motion or when the remote control key is in position I or II. The symbol in the combined instrument panel and the light in the button go out.

Washing the headlamps and windows

Washing function.

Washing the windscreen Move the stalk switch toward the steering wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp washers.

The windscreen wipers will make several more sweeps and the headlamps are washed once the stalk switch has been released.

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.104

High-pressure headlamp washing* High-pressure headlamp washing consumes a large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the headlamps are washed automatically at every fifth windscreen wash cycle.

Reduced washing If only approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remains in the reservoir and the message that you should fill the washer fluid is shown in the combined instru- ment panel, then the supply of washer fluid to the headlamps is switched off. This is in order to pri- oritise cleaning the windscreen and the visibility through it.

Wiping and washing the rear window

Rear window wiper intermittent wiping

Rear window wiper continuous speed

Press the stalk switch forward (see the arrow in the illustration above) to initiate rear window washing and wiping.

NOTE

The rear window wiper is equipped with over- heating protection which means that the motor is switched off if it overheats. The rear window wiper works again after a cooling period (30 seconds or longer, depending on the heat in the motor and the outside tem- perature).

Wiper reversing Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen wip- ers are on initiates intermittent rear window wip- ing25. The function stops when reverse gear is disengaged.

If the rear window wiper is already on at continu- ous speed, no change is made.

NOTE

On cars with rain sensors, the rear wiper is activated during reversing if the sensor is activated and it is raining.

Related information Washer fluid - filling (p. 361)

Power windows All power windows can be operated using the control panel for the driver's door - the control panels for the other doors operate their respec- tive power window.

Driver's door control panel.

Electric child safety locks that prevent chil- dren from being able to open the rear doors from inside* and open/close the rear win- dows, see Child safety locks - electrical acti- vation* (p. 176).

Controls for rear windows

Controls for front windows

25 This function (intermittent wiping when reversing) can be deactivated. Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends an authorised Volvo workshop.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

105

WARNING Check that children or other passengers are not trapped when the windows are closed from the driver's door.

WARNING Check that children or other passengers are not trapped if/when the windows are closed using the remote control key.

WARNING If there are children in the car - remember to always switch off the power supply to the power windows by selecting key position 0 and then take the remote control key with you when leaving the car. For information on key positions - see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 81).

Operating

Operating the power windows.

Operating without auto

Operating with auto

All power windows can be operated using the control panel for the driver's door - the control panels for the other doors can only operate their respective power window. Only one control panel can be operated at a time.

In order for the power windows to be used, the key position must be at least I - see Key posi- tions - functions at different levels (p. 81). The power windows can be operated for a few minutes after the engine has been switched off and after the remote control key has been removed - although not after a door has been opened.

Closing of the windows is stopped and the win- dow is opened if anything prevents its movement. It is possible to override the pinch protection when closing has been interrupted, e.g. if there is ice forming. After two successive closing inter- ruptions the pinch protection will be forced and the automatic function deactivated for a short while, now it is possible to close by continually holding the button pulled up.

NOTE

One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise when the rear windows are open is to also open the front windows slightly.

Operating without auto Move one of the controls up/down gently. The power windows move up/down as long as the control is held in position.

Operating with auto Move one of the controls up/down to the end position and release it. The window runs auto- matically to its end position.

Operating with the remote control key or central locking button To operate the power windows from the outside with the remote control key or from inside with the central locking button, see Remote control key - functions (p. 160) or Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 171).

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.106

Resetting If the battery is disconnected then the function for automatic opening must be reset so that it can work correctly.

1. Gently raise the front section of the button to raise the window to its end position and hold it there for one second.

2. Release the button briefly.

3. Raise the front section of the button again for one second.

WARNING A reset must take place for pinch protection to work.

Door mirrors The door mirror positions are adjusted with the joystick in the driver's door controls.

Controls for door mirrors.

Adjusting 1. Press the L button for the left-hand door mir-

ror or the R button for the right-hand door mirror. The light in the button illuminates.

2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the centre.

3. Press the L or R button again. The light should no longer be illuminated.

WARNING Both mirrors are bent to provide optimal vision. Objects may appear further away than they actually are.

Storing settings26

The settings for the door mirrors and the posi- tions of the driver's seat can be stored for each remote control key in the car key memory*, see Remote control key - personalisation* (p. 157).

Angling the door mirror when parking26

The door mirror can be angled down for the driver to view the side of the road when parking for example.

Engage reverse gear and press the L or R button.

When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror automatically returns to its original position after approx. 10 seconds, or earlier by pressing the button labelled L or R respectively.

Automatic angling of the door mirror when parking26

When reverse gear is engaged the door mirror is automatically angled down so that the driver can see the side of the road when parking for exam- ple. When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror

26 Only in combination with power seat with memory, see Seats, front - electrically operated (p. 84).

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 107

automatically returns to its original position after a short time.

The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 113).

Automatic retraction when locking* When the car is locked/unlocked with the remote control key the door mirrors are automatically retracted/extended.

The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 113).

Resetting to neutral Mirrors that have been moved out of position by an external force must be reset electrically to the neutral position for electric retracting/extending to work correctly:

1. Retract the mirrors with the L and R buttons.

2. Fold them out again with the L and R but- tons.

3. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.

The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.

Retractable power door mirrors* The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving in narrow spaces:

1. Depress the L and R buttons simultaneously (key position must be at least I).

2. Release them after approximately 1 second. The mirrors automatically stop in the fully retracted position.

Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L and R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors automati- cally stop in the fully extended position.

Home safe and approach lighting The lamp on the door mirrors illuminates when approach lighting (p. 102) or home safe lighting (p. 102) is selected.

Related information Rearview mirror - interior (p. 108)

Windows and door mirrors - heating (p. 107)

Windows and door mirrors - heating The defroster is used to quickly remove misting and ice from the windscreen, rear window and door mirrors.

Heated windscreen*, rear window and door mirrors

Heating, windscreen

Heating, rear window and door mirrors

The function is used to remove ice and misting from the windscreen, rear window and door mir- rors.

One press of the respective button starts the heating. The light in the button indicates that the function is active. Switch off the heating as soon as the ice/misting is cleared in order not to load the battery unnecessarily. However, the function is switched off automatically after a certain time.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.108

See also Demisting and defrosting the wind- screen (p. 132).

The door mirrors and rear window are demisted/ defrosted automatically if the car is started in an outside temperature lower than +7 C. Automatic defrosting can be selected in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 113).

The compass (p. 109) is deactivated when the heated windscreen is activated. When the heated windscreen is deactivated, the compass is reacti- vated.

Rearview mirror - interior The interior rearview mirror can be dimmed with a control in the mirror's lower edge. Alternatively, the rearview mirror dims automatically.

Control for dimming

Manual dimming Bright light from behind could be reflected in the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use dim- ming with the dimming control when lights from behind are distracting:

1. Use dimming by moving the control in towards the passenger compartment.

2. Return to normal position by moving the con- trol towards the windscreen.

Automatic dimming* Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control for manual dimming is not available on mirrors with auto- matic dimming.

The rearview mirror contains two sensors - one forward facing and one rearward facing - that work together to identify and eliminate dazzling light. The forward facing sensor detects ambient light, while the rearward facing sensor detects the light from vehicle headlights behind.

NOTE

If the sensors are obscured by e.g. parking permits, transponders, sun visors or objects in the seats or in the cargo area in such a way that light is prevented from reaching the sen- sors, then the dimming function of the rear- view mirror is reduced.

Only rearview mirror with automatic dimming can be equipped with compass (p. 109).

Related information Door mirrors (p. 106)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 109

Glass roof* The glass roof's blind can be operated with the control in the roof console.

The glass roof is fixed but the power operated roller blind can be operated in key position I or II with the control in the roof console. For informa- tion on key positions - see Key positions - func- tions at different levels (p. 81).

Automatic opening to end position

Manual opening until the button is released

Manual closing until the button is released

Automatic closing to end position

IMPORTANT

Avoid touching the blind because it may then be damaged.

Only use the control in the roof console to operate the blind.

Compass* The upper right-hand corner of the rearview mir- ror contains a display that shows the compass direction in which the front of the car is pointing.

Operation

Rearview mirror with compass.

Eight different directions are shown with English abbreviations: N (north), NE (north east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW (south west), W (west) and NW (north west).

The compass is activated automatically when the car is started or when key position II is active, see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 81). To deactivate/activate the compass - press in the button on the rear side of the mirror using a paper clip for example.

The compass is deactivated when the heated windscreen is activated. When the heated wind- screen is deactivated, the compass is reactivated.

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

110

Calibration The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. The compass is set for the geographic area to which the car was delivered. The compass should be calibrated if the car is moved across several mag- netic zones. Proceed as follows:

1. Stop the car in a large open area free from steel structures and high-voltage power lines.

2. Start the car.

NOTE

For the best calibration, switch off all electri- cal equipment (climate control system, wipers, etc.) and makes sure that all doors are closed.

3. Hold the button on the underside of the rear- view mirror depressed approx. 3 seconds. The number of the current magnetic zone is shown.

Magnetic zones.

4. Press the button repeatedly until the required magnetic zone (115) is shown. See the map of magnetic zones for the com- pass.

5. Wait until the display returns to showing the character C, or hold the button on the bot- tom of the rearview mirror depressed for approx. 6 seconds (use e.g. a paper clip) until the character C is shown.

6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more than 10 km/h (6 mph) until a compass direc- tion is shown in the display, indicating that calibration is complete. Then drive a further 2 circles to fine-tune calibration.

7. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.

Menu navigation - combined instrument panel The menus shown on the information display in the combined instrument panel (p. 66) are con- trolled with the left-hand stalk switch. Which menus are shown depends on the key position (p. 81).

Information display (analogue combined instrument panel) and menu navigation controls.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory. 111

Information displays (digital combined instrument panel) and controls for menu navigation.

OK - access the menu, acknowledge mes- sages and confirm menu selections.

Thumbwheel browse between menu options.

RESET - reset data in the selected trip com- puter step and go back in the menu struc- ture.

If there is a message (p. 112) then it must be acknowledged with OK in order that the menus shall be shown.

Related information Messages - handling (p. 113)

Menu overview - analogue combined instru- ment panel (p. 111)

Menu overview - digital combined instrument panel (p. 111)

Menu overview - analogue combined instrument panel Which menus are shown in the combined instru- ment panel's information display depends on the key position (p. 81).

Some of the following menu options require the function and hardware to be installed in the car.

Digital speed

Parking heater*

Additional heater*

TC options

Service status

Oil level27

Messages (##)28

AdBlue level

Related information Menu navigation - combined instrument

panel (p. 110)

Menu overview - digital combined instrument panel (p. 111)

Combined instrument panel (p. 66)

Menu overview - digital combined instrument panel Which menus are shown in the combined instru- ment panel's information display depends on the key position (p. 81).

Some of the following menu options require the function and hardware to be installed in the car.

Settings*

Themes

Contrast mode/Colour mode

Service status

Messages29

Oil level30

Parking heater*

Trip computer reset

AdBlue level

Related information Menu navigation - combined instrument

panel (p. 110)

Menu overview - analogue combined instru- ment panel (p. 111)

Combined instrument panel (p. 66)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

112

Messages When a warning, information or indicator symbol illuminates, a corresponding message appears on the information display.

Message Specification

Stop safelyA Stop and switch off the engine. Serious risk of dam- age - consult a workshopB.

Stop engineA Stop and switch off the engine. Serious risk of dam- age - consult a workshopB.

Service urgentA

Contact a workshopB to check the car immediately.

Service requiredA

Contact a workshopB to check the car as soon as possible.

See manualA Read the owner's manual.

Book time for maintenance

Time to book regular service - contact a workshopB.

Message Specification

Time for reg- ular mainte- nance

Time for regular service - contact a workshopB. The timing is determined by the number of kilometres driven, number of months since the last service, engine running time and oil grade.

Maintenance overdue

If the service intervals are not followed then the war- ranty does not cover any damaged parts - contact a workshopB.

Transmission Oil change needed

Contact a workshopB to check the car as soon as possible.

Transmission Reduced per- formance

Transmission cannot handle full capacity. Drive with care until the message clearsC.

If shown repeatedly - con- tact a workshopB.

Message Specification

Transmission hot Reduce speed

Drive more smoothly or stop the car in a safe manner. Disengage the gear and run the engine at idling speed until the message clearsC.

Transmission hot Stop safely Wait for cooling

Critical fault. Stop the car immediately in a safe man- ner and contact a work- shopB.

Temporarily offA

A function has been tempo- rarily switched off and is reset automatically while driving or after starting again.

Low battery charge Power save mode

The audio system is switched off to save energy. Charge the battery.

A Part of message, shown together with information on where the problem has arisen.

B An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. C For more messages concerning automatic gearbox.

27 Certain engines. 28 The number of messages is indicated in brackets. 29 The number of messages is indicated in brackets. 30 Certain engines.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 113

IMPORTANT

For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and follow the instructions in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Related information Messages - handling (p. 113)

Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 110)

Messages - handling Use the left-hand stalk switch to acknowledge and browse among messages (p. 112) that are shown in the information display of the com- bined instrument panel.

When a warning, information or indicator symbol illuminates, a corresponding message is shown in the display. An error message is stored in a mem- ory list until the fault has been rectified.

Press OK on the left-hand stalk switch to acknowledge31 a message. Scroll through mes- sages with the thumbwheel (p. 110).

NOTE

If a warning message appears while you are using the trip computer, the message must be read (press OK) before the previous activity can be resumed.

Related information Menu overview - analogue combined instru-

ment panel (p. 111)

Menu overview - digital combined instrument panel (p. 111)

MY CAR MY CAR is a menu source that handles many of the car's functions, e.g. City Safety, locks and alarm, automatic fan speed, setting the clock, etc.

Certain functions are standard, others are optional - the range also varies depending on the market.

Operation Navigation in the menus is carried out using but- tons in the centre console or with the steering wheel's right-hand keypad*.

31 A message can also be acknowledged via the thumbwheel or RESET button.

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

114

Control panel in centre console and steering wheel key- pad. The figure is schematic - the number of functions

and layout of the buttons both vary, depending on the equipment selected and the market.

MY CAR - opens the menu system MY CAR.

TUNE - turn the knob in the centre console or the thumbwheel on the steering wheel to scroll up/down through the menu options.

OK/MENU - press the button in the centre console or the thumbwheel on the steering wheel to select/tick in the highlighted menu option or store the selected function in the memory.

EXIT

EXIT functions Depending on the function the cursor is on when EXIT is depressed briefly, and on which menu level, one of the following may occur:

phone call is rejected

current function is interrupted

input characters are deleted

most recent selections are undone

leads up in the menu system.

A long press on EXIT leads to the normal view for MY CAR or if you are in the normal view, to the highest menu level (main source menu).

Menu options and search paths For a description of the menu options and search paths in MY CAR, see the Sensus Infotainment supplement.

Trip computer The car's trip computer records and calculates vales such as e.g. distance, fuel consumption and average speed whilst driving.

Trip computer content and appearance varies depending on whether the combined instrument panel is analogue or digital:

Trip computer - analogue combined instru- ment panel (p. 116)

Trip computer - digital combined instrument panel (p. 118)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory. 115

The information from the trip computer can be shown in the combined instrument panel's information display32.

Trip meter The trip computer has two trip meters and one odometer for the total mileage.

Average Average fuel consumption is calculated from the last resetting.

NOTE

There may be a slight deviation if a fuel-driven heater* has been used.

Average speed The average speed is calculated for the driving distance driven since the last reset to zero.

Instantaneous The information for current fuel consumption is updated continuously - approximately once per second. When the car is driven at low speed the consumption is shown per time unit - at a higher speed it is shown related to mileage.

Different units (km/miles) can be selected for the display - see section below."Change unit" (p. 114)

Range - distance to empty tank The trip computer shows the approximate dis- tance that can be driven with the fuel quantity remaining in the tank.

No guaranteed range remains when the heading Distance to empty shows "----".

In which case, refuel as soon as possible.

The calculation is based on the average fuel con- sumption over the last 30 km and the remaining driveable fuel quantity.

NOTE

There may be a slight deviation if the driving style has been changed.

An economic driving style generally results in a longer driving distance. For more information on

how fuel consumption can be influenced, see Environmental philosophy (p. 22).

Digital speed display in another unit33

If the main instrument is graduated in mph, the equivalent digital speed is shown as km/h.

Change unit Distance and fuel unit can be changed in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 113).

NOTE

In addition to in the trip computer, these units are also changed in Volvo's navigation sys- tem*.

Related information Trip computer - analogue combined instru-

ment panel (p. 116)

Trip computer - digital combined instrument panel (p. 118)

Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 120)

32 The appearance and showing of the display may vary depending on the instrument variant. 33 Only digital combined instrument panel and certain markets.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

116

Trip computer - analogue combined instrument panel Information from the trip computer can be shown in the combined instrument panel and operated with the controls on the left-hand stalk switch and with the combined instrument panel's menu.

Checking and settings can be made immediately after the combined instrument panel is automati- cally illuminated in connection with unlocking. If none of the controls are actuated within approx. 30 seconds after the driver's door has been opened then the instrument extinguishes, after which either key position II or engine star- ting is required in order to operate the trip com- puter.

NOTE

If a warning message appears when the trip computer is used then the message must first be acknowledged before the trip computer can be reactivated.

Acknowledge the message by briefly pressing the indicator stalk OK button.

Controls

Information display and controls.

OK opens the combined instrument pan- el's menu, confirms messages or menu selections.

Thumbwheel - browses between menu options or trip computer options.

RESET - resets the current trip meter or goes back out of the menu structure.

Trip computer alternative Choose which trip computer should be shown in the combined instrument panel:

1. To ensure that no control is in the middle of a sequence - reset them first with two presses on RESET.

2. Turn the thumbwheel to browse between the options and stop at the required heading.

The trip computer display in the combined instru- ment panel can be shifted to another option at any time during the journey. One of the options means that no trip computer is shown.

Trip computer

heading in com-

bined instru-

ment panel

Information

Trip meter T1 and total dist.

Long press on RESET resets trip meter T1.

Trip meter T2 and total dist.

Long press on RESET resets trip meter T2.

Distance to empty

For more information - see the section"Range - dis- tance to empty tank" (p. 114).

Fuel con- sumption

Current consumption.

Average speed

Long press on RESET resets Average speed.

No trip com- puter informa- tion.

This option shows a blank display and it also indicates the beginning/end of the loop.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory. 117

Resetting the trip computer 1. Turn the thumbwheel and stop at the trip

computer heading to be reset: T1 and total dist., T2 and total dist. or Average speed.

2. One long press on RESET resets the value for the selected heading.

Each heading must be zeroed individually.

Functions in the combined instrument panel's menu Open the combined instrument panel's menu to activate selectable headings in the trip computer.

1. Press OK.

2. Scroll between menu options using the thumbwheel and select TC options.

3. Select the preferred alternatives. The sym- bols for the options already selected are white with a "tick" - others are grey and have no "tick".

4. Finish by pressing twice on RESET after completed checking/adjustment.

Related information Trip computer (p. 114)

Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 120)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

118

Trip computer - digital combined instrument panel The information from the trip computer can be shown in the combined instrument panel and operated with the controls on the left-hand stalk switch and with the combined instrument panel's menu.

Checking and settings can be made immediately after the combined instrument panel is automati- cally illuminated in connection with unlocking. If none of the trip computer's controls are actuated within approx. 30 seconds after the driver's door has been opened then the instrument extin- guishes, after which either key position II or engine starting is required in order to operate the trip computer.

NOTE

If a warning message appears when the trip computer is used then the message must first be acknowledged before the trip computer can be reactivated.

Acknowledge the message by briefly pressing the indicator stalk OK button.

Controls

Three trip computer options can be displayed simultane- ously one in each "window".

OK - opens the combined instrument panel's menu, confirms messages or menu selec- tions.

Thumbwheel - browses between menu options or trip computer options.

RESET - resets the current trip meter or goes back out of the menu structure.

Trip computer alternative Choose which trip computer should be shown in the combined instrument panel:

1. To ensure that no control is in the middle of a sequence - reset them first with two presses on RESET.

2. Turn the thumbwheel to browse between the heading combinations.

3. Stop at the required combination for the con- stant display of this trip data in the combined instrument panel.

The trip computer display in the combined instru- ment panel can be shifted to another option at any time during the journey. One of the options means that no trip computer is shown.

Heading combinations Information

Average Trip meter T1 + Meter reading Average speed Long press on RESET resets trip meter T1.

Instantaneous Trip meter T2 + Meter reading Distance to empty tank Long press on RESET resets trip meter T2.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory. 119

Heading combinations Information

Instantaneous Meter reading km/h<>mphA km/h<>mph - "Reverse digital speed display", see Trip computer (p. 114).

No trip computer information. This option extinguishes all three trip computer displays and it also indicates the beginning/end of the loop.

A Only certain markets.

Resetting the trip computer

Trip meter 1. Turn the thumbwheel and stop at the head-

ing combination with the trip meter to be reset.

2. One long press on RESET resets the value for the selected heading.

Average speed and average consumption 1. Press OK to open the combined instrument

panel's menu.

2. Browse to the Trip computer reset menu option with the thumbwheel and confirm with OK.

3. Choose to reset average consumption, aver- age speed or to reset both, and confirm your selection with OK.

4. Finish by pressing RESET.

Related information Trip computer (p. 114)

Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 120)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.120

Trip computer - trip statistics* Trip statistics from the trip computer can be shown in the centre console's screen and pro- vide a graphic overview of fuel consumption.

Function Open the menu system MY CAR (p. 113)

and select Trip statistics in order to see the bar chart.

Trip statistics34.

Each bar symbolises 1 km or 10 km driven dis- tance, depending on the scale selected - the bar at the far right shows the value for the current kil- ometre or 10 km.

The TUNE knob can be used to change the scale for each bar between 1 km and 10 km - the cur- sor at the far right changes position between up and down depending on the scale selected.

Settings Different settings can be made in the menu sys- tem MY CAR - Trip statistics.

Reset when vehicle has been off for minimum 4h - highlight the box by select- ing ENTER and go back out of the menu by selecting EXIT. With this option selected, all statistics are deleted automatically after fin- ishing driving and the car has been stationary for more than 4 hours. The journey statistics start again from zero the next time the engine is started.

Start new trip - ENTER is used to delete all previous statistics, back out of the menu by selecting EXIT. If a new driving cycle shall be started before 4 hours have elapsed then the current period must first be deleted manually with this option.

See also information on Eco guide (p. 70).

Related information Trip computer (p. 114)

Trip computer - analogue combined instru- ment panel (p. 116)

Trip computer - digital combined instrument panel (p. 118)

34 The figure is schematic - layout may vary depending on updated software and market.

CLIMATE CONTROL

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.122

General information on climate control The car is equipped with electronic climate con- trol. The climate control system cools or heats as well as dehumidifies the air in the passenger compartment.

There are two different climate control systems:

Electronic temperature control (ETC) (p. 128)

Electronic climate control (ECC) (p. 127)

NOTE

Air conditioning (AC) (p. 131) can be switched off, but to ensure the best possible climate comfort in the passenger compart- ment, and to prevent the windows from mist- ing, it should always be switched on.

To bear in mind To ensure that the air conditioning works

optimally, the side windows must be closed.

Global opening (p. 172) opens/closes all side windows simultaneously and can be used for example to quickly air the car during hot weather.

Remove ice and snow from the climate con- trol system air intake (the grille between the bonnet and the windscreen).

In warm weather, condensation from the air conditioning may drip under the car. This is normal.

When the engine requires full power, e.g. for full acceleration, the air conditioning can be temporarily switched off. There may then be a temporary increase in temperature in the passenger compartment.

Remove misting on the insides of the win- dows primarily by using the defroster func- tion (p. 132). To reduce the risk of misting, keep the windows clean and use window cleaner.

Cars with Start/Stop* With an auto-stopped (p. 279) engine certain equipment may have its function temporarily reduced, e.g. climate control fan speed (p. 130).

Cars with ECO*

Certain equipment may have its function tempo- rarily reduced or deactivated when the ECO (p. 287) function is activated, e.g. the air condi- tioning (p. 131).

NOTE

When the ECO function is activated, several parameters in the climate control system's settings are changed, and several electricity consumer functions are reduced. Certain set- tings can be reset manually, but full function- ality is only restored by deactivating the ECO function.

Related information Actual temperature (p. 123)

Sensors - climate control (p. 123)

Menu settings - climate control (p. 125)

Air distribution in the passenger compart- ment (p. 125)

Air quality (p. 123)

Heated front seats* (p. 129)

Heated rear seat* (p. 129)

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory. 123

Actual temperature The temperature you select in the passenger compartment corresponds to the physical expe- rience with reference to factors such as ambient temperature, air speed, humidity and solar radia- tion etc. in and around the car at the time.

The system includes a sun sensor (p. 123) which detects on which side the sun is shining into the passenger compartment. This means1 that the temperature can differ between the right and left- hand air vents despite the controls being set for the same temperature on both sides.

Related information General information on climate control

(p. 122)

Temperature control in the passenger com- partment (p. 131)

Sensors - climate control The climate control system has a number of sen- sors to help control the temperature (p. 123) in the car.

The sun sensor is located on the top side of the dashboard.

The temperature sensor for the passenger compartment is located below the climate control panel.

The outside temperature sensor is located in the door mirror.

NOTE

Do not cover or block the sensors with cloth- ing or other objects.

Related information General information on climate control

(p. 122)

Air quality The interior in a passenger compartment is designed to be pleasant and comfortable, even for people with contact allergies and for asthma sufferers.

Passenger compartment filter (p. 124)

Material in the passenger compartment (p. 125)

Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) (p. 124)*

Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) (p. 124)*

Related information General information on climate control

(p. 122)

1 Only applies to ECC.

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.124

Air quality - passenger compartment filter All air entering the car's passenger compartment is cleaned with a filter.

The filter must be replaced at regular intervals. Follow the Volvo Service Programme for the rec- ommended replacement intervals. If the car is used in a severely contaminated environment, it may be necessary to replace the filter more often.

NOTE

There are different types of passenger com- partment filter. Make sure that the correct fil- ter is fitted.

Related information Air quality (p. 123)

Air quality - Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)* CZIP comprises a series of modifications that keep the passenger compartment even clearer from allergy and asthma-inducing substances.

The following is included:

An enhanced fan function that means that the fan starts when the car is opened with the remote control key. The fan fills the pas- senger compartment with fresh air. The func- tion starts when required and is disengaged automatically after a time or when one of the passenger compartment doors is opened. The amount of time the fan runs is reduced gradually due to reduced need up until the car is 4 years old.

The air quality system IAQS (p. 124) is a fully automatic system that cleans the air in the passenger compartment from contaminants such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-level ozone.

Related information General information on climate control

(p. 122)

Air quality (p. 123)

Air quality - IAQS* The air quality system IAQS separates gases and particles to reduce the levels of odours and pollution in the passenger compartment.

If the outside air is contaminated then the air intake is closed in order to shut out hydrocar- bons, nitrous oxides and ground-level ozone. The air is recirculated in the passenger compartment.

It is possible to activate/deactivate the function in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 113).

NOTE

The air quality sensor must always be enabled to ensure the best air in the passenger com- partment.

In a cold climate, automatic recirculation is limited so as to prevent misting.

Related information General information on climate control

(p. 122)

Air quality (p. 123)

Air quality - Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)* (p. 124)

CLIMATE CONTROL

}}

* Option/accessory. 125

Air quality - material Tested materials have been developed in order to minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger compartment and to contribute to making the passenger compartment easier to keep clean.

The carpets in both the passenger compartment and the cargo area are removable and easy to remove and clean. Use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo to clean the interior (p. 380).

Related information Air quality (p. 123)

Menu settings - climate control It is possible to activate/deactivate or change the default settings for four of the climate control system's functions via the centre console.

Fan level during automatic climate control* (p. 130).

Recirculation timer (p. 133).

Automatic start of rear window defroster (p. 107).

Interior air quality system* (p. 124).

The climate control system's functions can be reset to the default settings via the menu system in MY CAR. For a description of the menu sys- tem, see MY CAR (p. 113).

Related information General information on climate control

(p. 122)

Air distribution in the passenger compartment The incoming air is divided between a number of different vents in the passenger compartment.

Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO mode*.

If necessary it can be controlled manually; see the air distribution table (p. 134).

||

CLIMATE CONTROL

126

Air vents in the dashboard

Open

Closed

Lateral airflow

Vertical airflow

Aim the vents at the side windows to remove misting.

NOTE

Remember that small children may be sensi- tive to air flows and draughts.

Air distribution

Air distribution - defroster windscreen

Air distribution - air vent instrument panel

Air distribution - ventilation floor

The figure consists of three buttons. When press- ing the buttons the corresponding figure is illumi- nated in the display screen (see figure below) and an arrow in front of each part of the figure shows the air distribution that is selected. For more information, see the air distribution table (p. 134).

The selected air distribution is shown in the centre con- sole display screen.

Related information General information on climate control

(p. 122)

Auto-regulation (p. 130)

Air distribution - recirculation (p. 133)

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory. 127

Electronic climate control - ECC* ECC (Electronic Climate Control) maintains the temperature selected in the passenger compart-

ment and can be set separately for the driver's side and passenger side.

The auto function is used to automatically con- trol temperature, air conditioning, fan speed, recirculation and air distribution.

Fan (p. 130)

AUTO - Automatic climate control (p. 130)

Electrically heated front seat (p. 129), left side

Heated windscreen* and max. defroster (p. 132)

Air distribution (p. 125) - ventilation floor

Air distribution - air vent instrument panel

Air distribution - defroster windscreen

Rear window and door mirror defrosters (p. 107)

Setting, left/right-hand side for temperature control (p. 131)

Electrically heated front seat (p. 129), right side

Temperature control (p. 131)

Recirculation (p. 133)

ECO* (p. 287)

AC - Air conditioning on/off (p. 131)

Related information General information on climate control

(p. 122)

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.128

Electronic temperature control - ETC With ETC (Electronic Temperature Control) the temperature is regulated automatically while air

distribution and fan control are handled man- ually.

Fan (p. 130)

Electrically heated front seat (p. 129), left side

AC - Air conditioning on/off (p. 131)

Heated windscreen and max. defroster*

Air distribution (p. 125) - ventilation floor

Air distribution - air vent instrument panel

Air distribution - defroster windscreen

Rear window and door mirror defrosters (p. 107)

Recirculation (p. 133)

Electrically heated front seat (p. 129), right side

Temperature control (p. 131)

ECO* (p. 287)

Related information General information on climate control

(p. 122)

CLIMATE CONTROL

}}

* Option/accessory. 129

Heated front seats* The front seat heating has three positions for increasing the comfort for driver and passenger when it is cold.

Current heat level is shown in the centre console display screen.

Press the button repeatedly to change between the different levels or to deactivate the func- tion.

There are three heat levels that give different heating outputs:

Highest heat level - three orange fields illu- minate in the centre console's screen (see figure above).

Lower heat level - two orange fields illumi- nate in the screen.

Lowest heat level - one orange field illumi- nates in the screen.

Switch off the heat - no field illuminates.

WARNING Heated seats must not be used by people who find it difficult to perceive an increase in temperature due to a lack of sensation or who otherwise have problems operating the con- trols for the heated seats. Otherwise they may suffer burn injuries.

Related information General information on climate control

(p. 122)

Heated rear seat* (p. 129)

Heated rear seat* The heating for the rear seat's outer positions has three positions for increasing the comfort for passengers when it is cold.

Current heat level is shown in the pushbutton's lamps:

Press the button repeatedly to change between the different levels or to deactivate the function.

There are three heat levels that give different heating outputs:

Highest heat level - three lamps illuminate.

Lower heat level - two lamps illuminate.

Lowest heat level - one lamp illuminates.

Switch off the heat - no lamp illuminates.

||

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.130

WARNING Heated seats must not be used by people who find it difficult to perceive an increase in temperature due to a lack of sensation or who otherwise have problems operating the con- trols for the heated seats. Otherwise they may suffer burn injuries.

Related information General information on climate control

(p. 122)

Heated front seats* (p. 129)

Fan The fan should always be activated in order to avoid misting on the windows.

NOTE

If the fan is fully switched off then the air con- ditioning is not engaged - which can cause a risk of misting on the windows.

With ECC* Turn the knob to increase or decrease fan speed, AUTO is disengaged. If AUTO is selected, then the fan speed is regulated automatically (p. 130) - the fan speed previ- ously set is disengaged.

With ETC Turn the knob to increase or decrease fan speed.

Related information General information on climate control

(p. 122)

Electronic climate control - ECC* (p. 127)

Electronic temperature control - ETC (p. 128)

Auto-regulation Auto-regulation is only possible in electronic cli- mate control (ECC) (p. 127).

The auto function automatically regulates temperature (p. 131), air conditioning (p. 131), fan speed (p. 130), recirculation (p. 133) and air distribution (p. 125).

If you select one or more manual functions, the other functions continue to be controlled auto- matically. All manual settings are disengaged when AUTO is pressed. The display screen shows AUTO CLIMATE.

Fan speed in automatic mode can be set in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 113).

Related information General information on climate control

(p. 122)

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory. 131

Temperature control in the passenger compartment When the car is started, the most recent tem- perature setting is resumed.

NOTE

Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by selecting a higher or lower temperature than the actual desired temperature.

With ECC*

Current temperature for each side is shown in the centre console's display screen.

The temperatures on the driver and passenger sides can be set independently. Repeatedly press L/R in the button to select the setting for left, right or both sides. Set the tempera- ture using the knob - the

selected temperature for either side is displayed in the centre console display.

With ETC The temperature in the passen- ger compartment can be adjusted with the knob.

Related information General information on climate control

(p. 122)

Actual temperature (p. 123)

Electronic temperature control - ETC (p. 128)

Electronic climate control - ECC* (p. 127)

Air conditioning The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies incoming air as required.

When the lamp in the AC but- ton illuminates, the air condi- tioning is controlled by the sys- tem's automatic function.

When the lamp in the AC but- ton is switched off the air con-

ditioning is disconnected. Other functions are still controlled automatically. When the max. defroster function (p. 132) is activated, the air conditioning is switched on automatically so that the air is dehumidified at the maximum setting.

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.132

Demisting and defrosting the windscreen Heated windscreen* and max. defroster are used to quickly remove misting and ice from the windscreen and side windows.

The selected setting is shown in the centre console dis- play screen.

Heated windscreen*

Max. defroster

The light in the defroster but- ton illuminates when the func- tion is active.

Press the button repeatedly to change between the different levels or to deactivate the func-

tion.

For cars without heated windscreen there is one defrost level:

Air flows to the windows - symbol (2) illumi- nates in the screen.

Switch off the function - no symbol illumi- nates.

For cars with heated windscreen there are two defrost levels:

Start the heating for the windscreen2 - sym- bol (1) illuminates in the screen.

Start the heating for the windscreen2 and air flow to the windows - symbols (1) and (2) illuminate in the screen.

Switch off the function - no symbol illumi- nates.

NOTE

Heated windscreen and IR window (p. 20) may have an impact on the performance of transponders and other communication equipment.

NOTE

A triangular area at the end of each side of the windscreen is not electrically heated, where de-icing may take longer.

NOTE

Electrically heated windscreen is not available when the engine is auto-stopped (p. 279).

The following also takes place when the function is active in order to provide maximum dehumidifi- cation in the passenger compartment:

the air conditioning is automatically engaged

recirculation and the air quality system are automatically disengaged.

NOTE

The noise level increases as the fan is operat- ing at max.

When the defroster is switched off the climate control returns to the previous settings.

Related information General information on climate control

(p. 122)

2 The compass goes off when the heated windscreen is active.

CLIMATE CONTROL

133

Air distribution - recirculation Select recirculation to shut out bad air, exhaust gases etc. from the passenger compartment, i.e. no outside air is taken into the car when this function is activated.

When recirculation is engaged the orange lamp in the button illuminates.

IMPORTANT

If the air in the car recirculates for too long, there is a risk of misting on the insides of the windows.

Timer With the timer function activated the system will exit manually activated recirculation mode according to a time that depends on the outside temperature. This reduces the risk of ice, misting and bad air.

It is possible to activate/deactivate the function in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 113).

NOTE

When max. defroster is selected, recirculation is always deactivated.

Related information General information on climate control

(p. 122)

Air distribution in the passenger compart- ment (p. 125)

Air distribution - table (p. 134)

CLIMATE CONTROL

134

Air distribution - table Three buttons are used to select the distribution (p. 125) of the air.

Air distribution Use

A large amount of hot air flows to the windows. to remove ice and misting quickly.

Air to windscreen, via defroster vent, and side windows. Some air flows from the air vents.

to avoid misting and icing in a cold and humid climate (to achieve this the fan level must not be too low).

Airflow to windows and from dashboard air vents. to ensure good comfort in warm, dry weather.

Airflow to the head and chest from the dashboard air vents. to ensure efficient cooling in warm weather.

CLIMATE CONTROL

135

Air distribution Use

Air to the floor and windows. Some air flows from the dashboard air vents.

to ensure comfortable conditions and good demisting in cold or humid weather.

Air to floor and from dashboard air vents. in sunny weather with cool outside temperatures.

Air to floor. Some air flows to the dashboard air vents and windows. to direct heat or cold to the floor.

Airflow to windows, from dashboard air vents and to the floor. to provide cooling along the floor in hot, dry weather or warming upwards in cold weather.

Related information General information on climate control

(p. 122)

Air distribution - recirculation (p. 133)

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.136

Engine block and passenger compartment heater* Preconditioning prepares the heater, engine and passenger compartment before departure so that both wear and energy needs during the jour- ney are reduced. Warming up your car will also extend the driving distance.

The heater can be started directly (p. 137) or with a timer (p. 138).

The heater cannot start if the outside tempera- ture exceeds 15 C. The heater's maximum run- ning time is 50 minutes.

WARNING Do not use the fuel-driven heater indoors. Exhaust gases are secreted.

NOTE

When the fuel-driven auxiliary heater is active there may be smoke from underneath the car, which is perfectly normal.

Refuelling

Warning label on fuel filler flap.

WARNING Fuel which spills out could be ignited. Switch off the fuel-driven auxiliary heater before star- ting to refuel.

Check in the combined instrument panel that the heater is switched off. The heat symbol is shown when it is operating.

Parking on a hill If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of the car should point downhill to ensure that there is a supply of fuel to the fuel-driven heater.

Battery and fuel If the battery has insufficient charge or the fuel level is too low, the heater will be switched off

automatically and a message appears in the dis- play. Acknowledge the message by pressing the indicator stalk (p. 110) OK button once.

IMPORTANT

Repeated use of the heater in combination with short driving distances may cause low charge level in the starter battery, this can lead to the heater stopping or never starting. In the worst case, engine starting will not be possible.

The car should be driven for the same time as the heater is used to ensure that the starter battery is recharged adequately to replace the energy consumed by the heater when it is used on a regular basis. The heater is used for a maximum of 50 minutes each time.

Related information Engine block heater and passenger compart-

ment heater* - messages (p. 139)

Additional heater* (p. 140)

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory. 137

Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - direct start The engine block heater and passenger com- partment heater can be started directly.

Direct start can be performed via:

information display

remote control key*

mobile*.

Upon direct start of the engine block and pas- senger compartment heater (p. 136), it will run for 50 minutes.

Heating of the passenger compartment will begin as soon as the engine coolant has reached the correct temperature.

NOTE

The car can be started and driven while the heater is running.

Direct start via the information display 1. Press OK to access the menu.

2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking heater and select with OK.

3. Scroll forward in the next menu to Direct start in order to activate the heater and select with OK.

4. Exit the menu with RESET.

Direct start via the remote control key*

Indicator lamp on remote control key with PCC*.

The engine block heater and passenger compart- ment heater can be activated via the remote con- trol key:

Hold the button for approach lighting depressed for 2 seconds.

Hazard warning flashers provide information in accordance with the following:

5 short flashes followed by a constant glow for approx. 3 seconds - the signal has reached the car and the heater has been activated.

5 short flashes - the signal has reached the car but the heater has not been acti- vated.

Hazard warning flashers remain switched off - the signal has not reached the car.

If the button for information is depressed when the heater is active then the indicator lamp will show the status for this - at the same time the car's lock status (p. 161) is shown. While the status is being investigated the indicator lamp emits a pair of short flashes followed by a con- stant glow if the heater is active.

Status is also shown in the trip computer during heating.

Direct start via a mobile* Activation and information on selected settings are available via the Volvo On Call* app.

Related information Engine block heater and passenger compart-

ment heater* - timer (p. 138)

Engine block heater and passenger compart- ment heater* - immediate stop (p. 138)

Engine block heater and passenger compart- ment heater* - messages (p. 139)

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.138

Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - immediate stop The engine block heater and passenger com- partment heater can be deactivated directly via the information display.

1. Press OK to access the menu.

2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking heater and select with OK.

3. Scroll forward in the next menu to Stop in order to deactivate the heater and select with OK.

4. Exit the menu with RESET.

Related information Engine block heater and passenger compart-

ment heater* - direct start (p. 137)

Engine block heater and passenger compart- ment heater* - timer (p. 138)

Engine block heater and passenger compart- ment heater* - messages (p. 139)

Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - timer The timer of the engine block and passenger compartment heater (p. 136) is connected to the car's clock.

Two different times can be selected using the timer. Here, time refers to the time when the car is heated and ready. The car's electronic system calculates when heating should be started based on the outside temperature.

NOTE

All timer programming will be cleared if the car's clock is reset.

Adjusting 1. Press OK to access the menu.

2. Scroll with the thumbwheel (p. 110) to Parking heater and select with OK.

3. Select one of the two timers using the thumbwheel and confirm with OK.

4. Briefly press OK to move to the lit hours set- ting.

5. Select the required hour using the thumb- wheel.

6. Briefly press OK to move to the lit minutes setting.

7. Select the required minute using the thumb- wheel.

8. Press OK3 to confirm the setting.

9. Go back in the menu structure using RESET.

10. Select the other time (continue from step 2) or exit the menu with RESET.

Starting 1. Press OK to access the menu.

2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking heater and select with OK.

3. Select one of the two timers using the thumbwheel and activate with OK.

4. Exit the menu with RESET.

Switching off A timer-started heater can be switched off man- ually before the set time has elapsed. Proceed as follows:

1. Press OK to access the menu.

2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking heater and select with OK.

> If a timer is set but not activated, a clock icon is shown next to the set time.

3. Select one of the two timers using the thumbwheel and confirm with OK.

3 Press OK again to activate the timer.

CLIMATE CONTROL

}}

* Option/accessory. 139

4. Deactivate the timer as follows:

long press on OK or

short press on OK to continue in the menu. Then select to stop the timer and confirm with OK.

5. Exit the menu with RESET.

A timer-started heater can be switched off directly (p. 137).

Related information Engine block heater and passenger compart-

ment heater* - messages (p. 139)

Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - messages Symbols and messages regarding the engine block and passenger compartment heater (p. 136) differ depending on whether the com- bined instrument panel is analogue (p. 66) or digital (p. 67).

When the heater has been activated the heat symbol illuminates in the information display.

When one of the timers is activated the symbol for activated timer illuminates in the information display at the same time as the set time is shown next to the symbol.

Symbol for activated timer in analogue combined instrument panel.

Symbol for activated timer in digital combined instrument panel.

The table shows symbols and display texts that appear.

Symbol Message Specification

The heater is switched on and run- ning.

The heater's timer is activated after the remote control key has been removed from the ignition switch and leaving the car - the engine and passenger com- partment are heated at the set time.

Fuel operated heater stopped Battery saving mode

The heater has been stopped by the car's electronics in order to facilitate starting the engine.

||

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.140

Symbol Message Specification

Fuel operated heater stopped Low fuel level

Setting the heater is not possible due to fuel level being too low - this is in order to facilitate starting the engine as well as approx. 50 km driving.

Fuel operated heater Service required

Heater not working. Contact a workshop for repair. Volvo rec- ommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

A display text clears automatically after a time or after one press on the indicator stalk (p. 110) OK button.

Related information Engine block heater and passenger compart-

ment heater* - direct start (p. 137)

Engine block heater and passenger compart- ment heater* - timer (p. 138)

Additional heater* For cars with diesel engines sold in cold climate

zones4 an additional heater may be required to obtain the correct operating temperature in the engine and to obtain sufficient heating in the passenger compartment.

In such instances, the car is equipped with either

electric additional heater (p. 141) or

fuel-driven additional heater (p. 140)5.

Related information Engine block and passenger compartment

heater* (p. 136)

Fuel-driven additional heater* The car is equipped with either an electric (p. 141) or a fuel-driven additional heater (p. 140).

The heater starts automatically when extra heat is required when the engine is running.

The heater is switched off automatically when the correct temperature is reached or when the engine is switched off.

NOTE

When the auxiliary heater is active there may be smoke from underneath the car, which is perfectly normal.

Auto mode or shutdown Automatic start of the additional heater can be deactivated if required.

NOTE

Volvo recommends that the fuel-driven addi- tional heater should be switched off for short distances.

1. Before starting the engine: Select key posi- tion I (p. 81).

4 An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the geographical areas concerned. 5 For cars equipped with parking heater (p. 136).

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory. 141

2. Press OK to access the menu.

3. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Additional heater6 or Settings7 and select with OK.

4. Select one of the options ON or OFF using the thumbwheel and confirm with OK.

5. Exit the menu with RESET.

NOTE

The menu options are only visible in key posi- tion I - any adjustments must therefore be made before starting the engine.

Related information Engine block and passenger compartment

heater* (p. 136)

Electric additional heater* The car is equipped with either a fuel-driven (p. 140) or an electric additional heater (p. 140).

The heater cannot be controlled manually but is instead activated automatically after the engine has been started in outside temperatures below 9 C and is switched off after the set passenger compartment temperature has been reached.

Related information Engine block and passenger compartment

heater* (p. 136)

6 Analogue combined instrument panel. 7 Digital combined instrument panel.

LOADING AND STORAGE

LOADING AND STORAGE

144

Storage spaces Overview of storage spaces in the passenger compartment.

LOADING AND STORAGE

* Option/accessory. 145

Storage compartment1 in door panel

Storage compartment, drivers side (p. 146)

Ticket clip

Storage compartment

Glovebox (p. 147)

Storage compartment, cup holder (p. 146)

Cup holder* in rear seat

Storage pocket2

Storage compartment, rear seat

WARNING Keep loose objects such as mobile phones, cameras, remote controls for accessories, etc. in the glove compartment or other compart- ments. Otherwise they may injure people in the car in the event of sudden braking or a collision.

1 With ice scraper holder on the drivers side. 2 Not applicable to textile upholstery.

LOADING AND STORAGE

* Option/accessory.146

Storage compartment drivers side This storage compartment (p. 144) is located on the driver's side, to the left under the lighting panel.

WARNING Do not keep any sharp objects in the com- partment, or objects which protrude.

Tunnel console The tunnel console is located between the front seats.

Storage compartment (e.g. for CDs) and USB*/AUX input under the armrest.

Includes cup holder for driver and passenger.

Related information Storage spaces (p. 144)

Tunnel console - armrest (p. 146)

Tunnel console - armrest The tunnel console is located between the front seats.

When closed, the tunnel console's armrest can be adjusted* longitudinally.

Related information Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets (p. 148)

LOADING AND STORAGE

* Option/accessory. 147

Glovebox The glovebox is located on the passenger side.

The owner's manual and maps can be kept in here for example. There are also holders for pens on the inside of the lid. The glovebox can be locked* (p. 172), using the key blade (p. 163).

Related information Storage spaces (p. 144)

Inlaid mats* Inlay mats collect e.g. rubbish and slush. Volvo supplies specially manufactured inlay mats.

WARNING Only use one inlaid mat at each seat, and check before setting off that the mat by the driver's seat is firmly affixed and secured in the pins so that it does not get caught adja- cent to and under the pedals.

Related information Cleaning the interior (p. 380)

Vanity mirror The vanity mirror is located on the rear of the sun visor.

Vanity mirror with lighting.

The light illuminates automatically when the cover is lifted.

Related information Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting

(p. 358)

LOADING AND STORAGE

* Option/accessory.148

Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets The electrical sockets (12 V) are located in the tunnel console's storage compartment and beside the cup holder.

12 V socket in tunnel console, front seat.

The electrical sockets can be used for various accessories designed for 12 V, e.g. screens, music players and mobile phones. For the socket to supply current, the remote control key must be in at least key position I (p. 81).

WARNING Always leave the plug in the socket when the socket is not in use.

NOTE

Optional equipment and accessories - e.g. display screens, music players and mobile phones - which are connected to one of the passenger compartment's 12V electrical sockets could be activated by the climate control system, even when the remote control key has been removed or when the car is locked, for example, when the engine block and passenger compartment heater* is acti- vated at a preset time.

For this reason remove the plugs from the electrical sockets for optional equipment or accessories when not in use because the bat- tery could be drained in the event of such an occurrence!

IMPORTANT

Max. power takeoff is 10 A (120 W) in either socket.

NOTE

The compressor for emergency puncture repair (p. 332) has been tested and approved by Volvo.

Related information 12 V socket - cargo area (p. 151)

Loading Payload depends on the car's kerb weight.

Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories reduces the car's payload by a cor- responding weight.

For more detailed information on weights, see Weights (p. 388).

The tailgate is opened via a button on the lighting panel or the remote control key, see Locking/unlocking - tailgate

(p. 172).

WARNING The cars driving properties change depend- ing on the weight and positioning of the load.

To bear in mind when loading Position the load firmly against the rear

seat's backrest.

Note that objects must not prevent the function of the WHIPS system for the front seats if any of the rear seat's backrests is folded down, see WHIPS - seating position (p. 40).

Centre the load.

Heavy objects should be placed as low as possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on low- ered backrests.

LOADING AND STORAGE

* Option/accessory. 149

Cover sharp edges with something soft to avoid damaging the upholstery.

Secure all loads to the load retaining eyelets with straps or web lashings.

WARNING A loose object weighing 20 kg (44 pounds) can, in a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h (30 mph) carry the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg (2200 pounds).

WARNING The protection provided by the inflatable cur- tain in the headlining may be compromised or eliminated by high loads.

Never load cargo above the backrest.

WARNING Always secure the load. Always secure the load. During heavy braking the load may oth- erwise shift, causing personal injury to the car's occupants.

Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with something soft.

Switch off the engine and apply the parking brake when loading/unloading long items. Otherwise you may accidentally knock the gear lever or gear selector with the load into a drive position - and the car could then move off.

Related information Load retaining eyelets (p. 150)

Cargo net* (p. 152)

Loading - long load (p. 149)

Roof load (p. 150)

Loading - long load To simplify loading in the cargo area, the rear seat backrest can be folded down. The passen- ger seat backrest can also be folded for an extra long load.

Folding the passenger seat See Seats, front (p. 82).

Lowering the rear seat backrest See (p. 86).

Related information Loading (p. 148)

LOADING AND STORAGE

* Option/accessory.150

Roof load The load carriers recommended for roof loads are the ones developed by Volvo. This is in order to avoid damage to the car and in order to achieve the maximum possible safety during a journey.

Carefully follow the installation instructions sup- plied with the carriers.

Check periodically that the load carriers and load are properly secured. Lash the load securely with retaining straps.

Distribute the load evenly over the load carri- ers. Put the heaviest objects at the bottom.

The size of the area exposed to the wind, and therefore fuel consumption, increase with the size of the load.

Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration, heavy braking and hard cornering.

WARNING The car's centre of gravity and driving charac- teristics are altered by roof loads.

For information about the maximum permitted load on the roof, including load carriers and any space box, see Weights (p. 388).

Related information Loading (p. 148)

Load retaining eyelets The load retaining eyelets are used to fasten straps in order to anchor items in the cargo area.

WARNING Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects which pro- trude may cause injury under violent braking.

Always secure large and heavy objects with a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.

Related information Loading (p. 148)

Loading - bag holder The bag holders keep carrier bags in place and prevent them from overturning and spreading their contents around the cargo area. The holder has a capacity of max. 3 kg.

Bag holder

Related information Loading (p. 148)

Loading - folding bag holder* (p. 151)

LOADING AND STORAGE

}}

* Option/accessory. 151

Loading - folding bag holder* A folding bag holder in the floor keeps bags in place and prevents them from overturning and spreading their contents in the cargo area, and can be opened up in three positions.

Folding bag holder

It can be set to two adjustment positions and one service position, as it is known, where it is fully unfolded. There are also two floor combination variants, one with adjustment positions in a tub under the floor and one with adjustment posi- tions in plastic rails. The raising below shows the adjustment position in a tub under the floor.

The load on the central holder is max. 3 kg and max. 10 kg on the outer holder.

Folding up

Lift the handle* on the upper floor and fold up the floor.

Move the floor forwards to an appropriate position and place it in the adjustment groove.

3. In service position, the floor is moved all the way forwards towards the rear seat back and placed in the plastic support in the centre.

Related information Loading (p. 148)

Loading - bag holder (p. 150)

12 V socket - cargo area The electrical socket can be used for various accessories designed for 12 Volts, e.g. display screens, music players and mobile phones.

Lower the cover to access the electrical socket.

The socket also provides voltage when the remote control key is not in the ignition switch.

IMPORTANT

Max. socket current is 10 A (120 W).

NOTE

Remember that using the electrical socket with the engine switched off involves the risk of discharging the car's battery.

||

LOADING AND STORAGE

* Option/accessory.152

NOTE

The compressor for emergency puncture repair (p. 332) has been tested and approved by Volvo.

Related information Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets (p. 148)

Cargo net* A cargo net prevents cargo from being thrown forward in the passenger compartment in the event of heavy braking.

The cargo net is fitted into four mounting points.

For safety reasons, the cargo net must always be correctly fastened and secured. The mesh is made of a strong nylon fabric and secured behind the front seat backrests.

WARNING Loads in the luggage compartment must be anchored well, and also have a correctly fitted safety net.

Attaching

NOTE

The easiest way to fit the safety net is via one of the rear doors.

WARNING It is necessary to ensure that the upper secur- ing points of the safety net are fitted correctly and that the puller-straps are secured prop- erly. Damaged nets must not be used.

LOADING AND STORAGE

153

1. Hook the hooks into the roof mounting with the anchoring strap locks turned towards you.

Thread the cargo net's anchoring straps through the eyes on the rear of the seat slide rails - it is easier if the backrests are straight- ened and the seats are moved forward slightly.

Pay attention to make sure that you do not press the seat/backrest hard against the net when the seat/backrest is moved back again - only adjust until the seat/backrest makes contact with the net.

IMPORTANT

If a seat/backrest is pushed backwards hard into the safety net then the net and/or its roof mounts may be damaged.

2. Depress the button in the anchoring strap's lock and thread the anchoring strap from below through the lock.

Tension the cargo net with the anchoring straps.

Removal and storage 1. Release the tension in the cargo net by

pressing in the button on the anchoring strap's lock and feeding out the strap.

2. Unhook the hooks from the roof mountings.

3. Fold up the cargo net and place it in the storage bag in the cargo area.

Related information Loading (p. 148)

Load retaining eyelets (p. 150)

Hat shelf The hat shelf can be removed to provide addi- tional cargo space.

Hat shelf removal

Undo the hat shelf lifting eyes on both sides.

Unhook the front edge of the hat shelf and remove it.

Related information Loading (p. 148)

Loading - long load (p. 149)

LOCKS AND ALARM

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.156

Remote control key Amongst other things, the remote control key is used for locking/unlocking and starting the engine.

There are three variants of key available - Remote control key in basic version, Remote con- trol key without PCC* and Remote control key with PCC*.

Functionality BasicA without

PCCA

with

PCCB

Locking/ unlocking and detachable key blade

x x x

Keyless lock- ing/unlocking

x x

Keyless engine starting

x x

Information but- ton and indica- tor lamps

x

A 5-button key B 6-button key

More information Remote Control Key Basic - is a key in the

basic version, see Remote control key - func-

tions (p. 160) for a description of its func- tions.

Remote control key without PCC - with Key- less Drive* (p. 165) and keyless locking (p. 167) and unlocking (p. 168).

Remote control key with PCC - also has an information button and indicator lamps. Read more about these unique functions (p. 161).

All remote control keys have a detachable key blade (p. 163) made of metal. The visible section is available in two versions so that it is possible to distinguish between the remote control keys.

More remote control keys can be ordered - but not variants other than the one supplied with the car. Up to six keys can be programmed and used for one single car.

The car is supplied with two remote control keys.

WARNING If there are children in the car:

Remember to switch off the supply to the power windows by removing the remote con- trol key if the driver leaves the car.

Remote control key - losing If you lose a remote control key (p. 156) then a new one can be ordered at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

The remaining remote control keys must be taken to the Volvo workshop. The code of the missing remote control key must be erased from the system as a theft prevention measure. The current number of keys registered to the car can be checked in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 113).

Related information Remote control key - functions (p. 160)

Remote control key - range (p. 161)

LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory. 157

Remote control key - personalisation* The key memory in the remote control key means that certain settings in the car can be individually adapted for different people.

The key memory function is available in combina- tion with, for example, power* driver's seat (p. 84).

Settings for door mirrors (p. 106), driver's seat, steering force (p. 184) and the combined instru- ment panel's theme, contrast and colour mode (p. 67) can be stored in the key memory, depend- ing on the car's equipment level.

The function1 can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 113).

When the function is activated, the settings are automatically linked to the key memory. This means that a change in a setting will automati- cally be saved in the specific remote control key's memory.

Storing settings Proceed as follows in order to store the settings and use the key memory in the remote control key:

1. Unlock the car with the remote control key in whose memory the setting2 shall be stored.

2. Make sure that the key memory function is activated in the menu system MY CAR.

3. Make the desired settings for e.g. the seat and the door mirrors.

4. The settings are stored in the current remote control key's memory.

The next time the car is unlocked with the same remote control key, the positions that are stored in the key memory will be set automatically - pro- viding that they have been changed since the last time the current remote control key was used.

Emergency stop If the seat accidentally begins to move, press one of the setting buttons for the seat or memory buttons in order to stop the seat.

Restarting to reach the seat position stored in the key memory is performed by pressing the unlock button on the remote control key. The driver's door must then be open.

WARNING Risk of crushing! Make sure that children do not play with the controls. Check that there are no objects in front of, behind or under the seat during adjustment. Make sure that none of the passengers in the rear seat is in danger of becoming trapped.

Changing settings If several people each with a remote control key approach the car, then the settings for e.g. seat and door mirrors are implemented for the person whose remote control key unlocks the driver's door.

If the driver's door has been opened by person A with remote control key A, but person B with remote control key B shall drive, then the settings can be changed as follows:

Standing by the driver's door, or sitting behind the steering wheel, person B presses the button for unlocking on his/her remote control key.

Select one of three possible memories for seat adjustment with seat button 1-3.

Adjust the seat and door mirrors manually.

1 Known as Car key memory in MY CAR. 2 This setting does not affect settings that have been stored in the power seat's memory function.

||

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.158

Related information Remote control key - functions (p. 160)

Remote control key with PCC* - unique func- tions (p. 161)

Locking/unlocking - indicator When the car is locked or unlocked using the remote control key (p. 156) the direction indica- tors confirm that locking/unlocking was correctly performed.

Locking - one flash and the door mirrors are folded3 in.

Unlocking - two flashes and the door mirrors are folded3 out.

NOTE

Be aware of the risk of locking the remote control key in the car.

When locking, indication is given only if all locks have been locked and all doors are closed. Indi- cation is given when the last door has been closed.

Selecting the function Different options for indicating locking/unlocking with light can be set in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 113).

Lock indicator A flashing LED by the windscreen verifies that the car is locked.

Same LED as alarm indicator (p. 178).

NOTE

Cars that are not equipped with alarm also have this indicator.

Related information Keyless drive* (p. 165)

Alarm indicator* (p. 178)

3 Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors.

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory. 159

Remote control key - electronic immobiliser The electronic immobiliser is a theft protection system that prevents the vehicle from being started (p. 270) by an unauthorised person.

Each remote control key (p. 156) has a unique code. The car can only be started with the correct remote control key with the correct code.

The following error messages in the combined instrument panel's information display are related to the electronic immobiliser:

Message Specification

Insert car key

Error when reading the remote control key during starting - Remove the key from the igni- tion switch, press it in again and make a new start attempt.

Car key not foundA

Error reading the remote control key during starting - Try to start again.

If the error persists: Insert the remote control key into the igni- tion switch and try to start again.

Immobi- liser Try to start again

Error in immobiliser system dur- ing starting. If the error persists: Contact a workshop - an author- ised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.

A Only applies to cars with keyless start and lock system.

Related information Remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking

system* (p. 159)

Keyless drive* (p. 165)

Remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking system*

Remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking sys-

tem4 makes it possible to track and locate the car, and to remotely activate the immobiliser.

Contact your nearest Volvo dealer for more infor- mation and assistance with activating the system.

Related information Remote control key (p. 156)

Remote control key - electronic immobiliser (p. 159)

4 Only certain markets and in combination with Volvo On Call*.

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.160

Remote control key - functions The remote control key has functions such as locking and unlocking the doors.

Functions

Remote control key in basic version.

Locking

Unlocking

Approach light duration

Tailgate

Panic function

Remote control key with PCC* (Personal Car Communicator).

Information button - see Remote control key with PCC* - unique functions (p. 161) for a description of its functionality.

Function buttons Locking Locks the doors and tailgate

while the alarm is activated, see Locking/unlock- ing - from the outside (p. 170).

Press and hold to close all windows simultane- ously. For more information, see Global opening (p. 172).

WARNING If windows are closed using the remote con- trol key, check that nobody's hands are trap- ped.

Unlocking (p. 170) - Unlocks the doors and tailgate while the alarm is deactivated.

Press and hold to open all windows simultane- ously. For more information, see Global opening (p. 172).

The function can be changed from unlocking all doors simultaneously, to unlocking the driver's door only with one press of the button and, after a further press of the button - within ten seconds - unlocking the remaining doors.

The function can be changed in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 113).

Approach light duration (p. 102) - Used to switch on the car's lighting at a distance.

Tailgate (p. 172) - Unlocks and disarms the alarm for the tailgate only.

Panic function Used to attract attention in an emergency.

Press and hold the button for at least three sec- onds or press it twice within three seconds to activate the direction indicators and the horn.

The function can be turned off with the same button once it has been active for at least five seconds. Otherwise the function switches off automatically after approx. three minutes.

Related information Remote control key (p. 156)

LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory. 161

Remote control key - range Remote control key functions (in its basic ver- sion) have a range of approx. 20 metres from the car.

If the car does not verify a button being pressed - move closer and try again.

NOTE

The remote control key functions may be dis- rupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings, topographical conditions, etc. The car can always be locked/unlocked with the key blade (p. 164).

If the remote control key is removed from the car when the engine is running or key position I or II (p. 80) is active, and all doors are closed, then a warning message is shown in the information dis- play in the combined instrument panel and a short audio reminder signal sounds at the same time.

The message extinguishes when the remote con- trol key is returned to the car, followed by a press of the OK button, or when all doors are closed.

Related information Remote control key (p. 156)

Remote control key - functions (p. 160)

Remote control key with PCC* - unique functions A remote control key with PCC* has enhanced functionality compared with a remote control key in basic version (p. 156) in the form of an infor- mation button and indicator lamps.

Remote control key with PCC.

Information button

Indicator lamps

Using the information button enables access to certain information from the car via the indicator lamps.

Using the information button Press the information button .

> All indicator lamps flash for approximately 7 seconds and the light travels around on the PCC. This indicates that information from the car has been read.

If any of the other buttons are pressed during this time then the reading is inter- rupted.

NOTE

If none of the indicator lamps illuminates with repeated use of the information button and in different locations (as well as after 7 seconds and after the light has travelled around on the PCC), contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Indicator lamps display information in accordance with the following illustration:

||

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.162

Green continuous light the car is locked.

Yellow continuous light the car is unlocked.

Red continuous light the alarm has been triggered since the car was locked.

Red light flashing alternately in both indicator lamps The alarm was triggered less than 5 minutes ago.

Related information Remote control key with PCC* - range

(p. 162)

Remote control key with PCC* - range The range of a remote control key with PCC (Personal Car Communicator) for unlocking the doors and tailgate is approx. 20 metres from the car - the other functions are up to approx. 100 metres. If the car does not verify a button being pressed - move closer and try again.

NOTE

The information button function may be dis- rupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings, topographical conditions, etc.

Out of range If the remote control key is too far away from the car for the information to be read then the status the car was last left in is shown, without the light travelling around on the remote control key.

If several remote control keys are used for the car then it is only the remote control key last used for locking/unlocking that shows the cor- rect status.

NOTE

If none of the indicator lamps illuminates with repeated use of the information button and in different locations (as well as after 7 seconds and after the light has travelled around on the PCC), contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information Keyless Drive* - range (p. 166)

Remote control key - range (p. 161)

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory. 163

Detachable key blade The remote control key contains a detachable key blade of metal with which some functions can be activated and some operations carried out.

The key blade's unique code is provided by authorised Volvo workshops, which are recom- mended when ordering new key blades.

Key blade functions

Using the remote control key's detachable key blade:

the left-hand front door can be unlocked manually (p. 164) if central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key.

the rear doors' mechanical child safety locks can be activated/deactivated (p. 176).

the right-hand front door and the rear doors can be locked manually, e.g. in the event of power failure.

the glovebox lock* can be unlocked.

the airbag for front passenger seat (PACOS*) can be activated/deactivated.

Related information Manual locking of the door (p. 170)

Locking/unlocking - glovebox (p. 172)

Passenger airbag - activating/deactivating* (p. 36)

Detachable key blade - detaching/ attaching Detaching/attaching the detachable key blade (p. 163) is carried out as follows:

Removing the key blade

Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.

At the same time pull the key blade straight out backwards.

Attaching the key blade Carefully refit the key blade into its location in the remote control key (p. 156).

1. Hold the remote control key with the slot pointed up and lower the key blade into its slot.

2. Lightly press the key blade. You should hear a "click" when the key blade is locked in.

Related information Detachable key blade - unlocking doors

(p. 164)

Child safety locks - manual activation (p. 176)

Passenger airbag - activating/deactivating* (p. 36)

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.164

Detachable key blade - unlocking doors The detachable key blade can be used if the central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key - e.g. if the remote control key's battery (p. 164) has been discharged.

The left-hand front door can be opened as fol- lows:

1. Unlock the left-hand front door with the key blade in the door handle's lock cylinder. For more information, see Keyless Drive* - unlocking with the key blade (p. 168).

NOTE

When the door has been unlocked using the key blade and is opened, the alarm is trig- gered.

2. Deactivate the alarm by inserting the remote control key in the ignition switch.

For cars with keyless start and lock system, see Keyless Drive* - unlocking with the key blade (p. 168).

Related information Detachable key blade (p. 163)

Remote control key (p. 156)

Remote control key/PCC - replacing the battery The battery5 in the remote control key may need to be replaced.

The battery for the remote control key should be replaced if:

the information symbol is illuminated and the display in the combined instrument panel shows Car key battery low See manual

and/or

the locks repeatedly do not react to signals from the remote control key within 20 metres from the car.

Opening Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.

At the same time pull the key blade straight out backwards.

Insert a 3 mm slot screwdriver in the hole behind the spring-loaded catch and gently prize the remote control key up.

5 Remote control key with PCC has two batteries.

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory. 165

NOTE

Turn the remote control key over with the but- tons facing up, this is to avoid the batteries falling out when it is opened.

IMPORTANT

Avoid touching new batteries and their con- tact surfaces with your fingers as this may impair their function.

Battery replacement

NOTE

Volvo recommends that the batteries to be used in the remote control key/PCC fulfil UN Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III, sub- section 38.3. Batteries fitted in the factory or replaced by an authorised Volvo workshop fulfil the above criteria.

Closely study how the battery/batteries are secured on the inside of the cover, with regard to their (+) and () sides.

Remote control key with one battery 1. Carefully prize out the battery.

2. Install a new one with the (+) side down.

Remote control key with PCC* with two batteries 1. Carefully prize out the batteries.

2. First install one new one with the (+) side up.

3. Position the white plastic tab in between and finally install a second new battery with the (+) side down.

Battery type Use batteries with designation CR2430, 3 V.

Assembly 1. Press the remote control key together.

2. Hold the remote control key with the slot pointed up and lower the key blade into its slot.

3. Lightly press the key blade. You should hear a "click" when the key blade is locked in.

IMPORTANT

Make sure that exhausted batteries are dis- posed of in a manner which is kind to the environment.

Related information Remote control key (p. 156)

Remote control key - functions (p. 160)

Keyless drive* Cars equipped with Keyless Drive have a star- ting and locking system that can be operated keylessly.

With the keyless start and lock system the car can be started, locked and unlocked without the remote control key (p. 156) inserted in the igni- tion switch6. It is enough to have the remote con- trol key with you in a pocket. The system makes it easier and more convenient to e.g. open the car when your hands are full.

Both of the remote control keys included with the car have keyless functionality. It is possible to order more remote control keys.

The car's electrical system can be set to three different levels - key position 0, I and II (p. 81) - with the remote control key.

Related information Keyless Drive* - range (p. 166)

Keyless Drive* - secure handling of the remote control key (p. 166)

Keyless Drive* - interference to remote con- trol key function (p. 167)

6 Does not apply to Remote Control Key Basic.

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.166

Keyless Drive* - range7

In order to unlock the doors or tailgate automati- cally without pressing a button on the remote control key, a remote control key must be within approx. 1.5 metres from the car's door handle or tailgate.

The person who wishes to lock or unlock a door must have the remote control key with him or her. It is not possible to lock or unlock a door if the remote control key is on the opposite side of the car.

The red rings in the above figure indicate the range covered by the system's antennas.

If all remote control keys are removed from the car when the engine is running or key position I or II (p. 81) is active, and if a door has been

opened and then closed, then a warning mes- sage is shown in the information display in the combined instrument panel and an audio reminder signal sounds at the same time.

When the remote control key has been returned to the car, the warning message goes off and the audible reminder ceases once either/or:

a door has been opened and closed

the remote control key has been inserted in the ignition switch

The OK button on the direction indicator stalk.

Related information Keyless drive* (p. 165)

Keyless Drive* - antenna location (p. 169)

Keyless Drive* - secure handling of the remote control key It is important to handle all remote control keys with great care.

If one of the remote control keys8 has been left in the car then the keyless functions are deacti- vated in case the car is e.g. locked with the other remote control key that belongs to the car. This prevents unauthorised entry.

The next time the car is unlocked with the other remote control key the forgotten remote control key is reactivated again.

IMPORTANT

Avoid leaving the remote control key with PCC behind in the car. If someone breaks into your car and takes the remote control key, it will e.g. be possible to start the car by press- ing the remote control key in the ignition switch and then pressing the START/STOP ENGINE button.

Related information Keyless drive* (p. 165)

7 Does not apply to cars with keyless starting 8 Applies to remote control key with PCC (Personal Car Communicator).

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory. 167

Keyless Drive* - interference to remote control key function Electromagnetic fields and screening can inter- fere with the remote control key's keyless func- tions (p. 165).

NOTE

Do not place/store the remote control key with keyless function near a mobile phone or metal object - no closer than 10-15 cm.

If interference is experienced nonetheless, use the remote control key and the key blade like a remote control key in basic version (p. 156).

Related information Remote control key/PCC - replacing the bat-

tery (p. 164)

Keyless Drive* - secure handling of the remote control key (p. 166)

Keyless Drive* - range (p. 166)

Keyless Drive* - locking Cars equipped with keyless start and lock sys- tem have a touch-sensitive area on the outside handle of the doors and a rubberised button next to the tailgate's rubberised pressure plate.

Lock the doors and the tailgate by grasping one of the door handles or pressing the smaller of the tailgate's two rubberised buttons - the lock indi- cator (p. 158) in the windscreen confirms that locking has been completed by starting to flash.

All doors and the tailgate must be closed before the car can be locked - otherwise the car is not locked.

NOTE

In cars with automatic gearbox selectors, the gear selector must be set to the P position; otherwise the car can be neither locked nor alarmed.

NOTE

Be aware that the system may be activated in connection with car washing if the remote control key is in range.

Related information Keyless drive* (p. 165)

Alarm indicator* (p. 178)

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.168

Keyless Drive* - unlocking9

Unlocking takes place when a hand grasps a door handle or the tailgate's rubberised pressure plate is actuated - open the door or tailgate as normal.

NOTE

The door handles normally register a hand that takes hold of the handle, but with thick gloves on or after a very quick hand move- ment a second attempt may be required, or with the glove taken off.

Related information Keyless drive* (p. 165)

Keyless Drive* - locking (p. 167)

Keyless Drive* - unlocking with the key blade If central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key, e.g. if the batteries are dis- charged, then the left-hand front door is unlocked with the remote control key's detacha- ble key blade (p. 163).

Hole for key blade - to loosen the cover.

To access the lock cylinder, the door handle's plastic cover must be removed - this is also done with the key blade:

1. Press the key blade approx. 1 cm straight up into the hole on the underside of the door handle/cover - do not prize.

> The plastic cover loosens automatically by means of the torque when the blade is pushed straight up and into the opening.

2. Then insert the key blade in the lock cylinder and unlock the door.

3. Refit the plastic cover after unlocking.

NOTE

When the left-hand front door is unlocked using the key blade and is opened, this trig- gers the alarm (p. 177). It is switched off by inserting the remote control key in the ignition switch, see Alarm* - remote control key not working (p. 179).

Related information Keyless drive* (p. 165)

Detachable key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 163)

9 Does not apply to remote control keys with keyless starting.

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory. 169

Keyless Drive* - lock settings Lock settings for cars equipped with keyless start and lock system can be adapted by indicat- ing in the menu system MY CAR which doors are to be unlocked.

For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 113).

Related information Keyless drive* (p. 165)

Keyless Drive* - antenna location Cars equipped with keyless start and lock sys- tem have a number of built-in antennas posi- tioned at different locations in the car.

Rear bumper, centre

Door handle, left rear

Cargo area, central and furthest in under the floor

Door handle, right rear

Centre console, under the rear section

Centre console, under the front section.

WARNING People with pacemaker operations should not come closer than 22 cm to the keyless sys- tem's antennae with their pacemaker. This is to prevent interference between the pace- maker and the keyless system.

Related information Keyless drive* (p. 165)

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.170

Locking/unlocking - from the outside Locking/unlocking from the outside is carried out using the remote control key (p. 160). The remote control key can lock/unlock all doors, the tailgate and the fuel filler flap. Different sequen- ces for unlocking can be selected.

In order that the lock sequence can be activated, the driver's door must be closed - if any of the other doors or the tailgate is open, then it/they is/are locked and the alarm is activated only when it/they are closed. For cars equipped with keyless locking system* all doors and the tailgate must be closed, see Keyless Drive* - locking (p. 167) and Keyless Drive* - unlocking (p. 168).

NOTE

Be aware of the risk of locking the remote control key in the car.

If it is not possible to lock/unlock with the remote control key, the battery may be discharged - lock or unlock the left-hand front door with the detachable key blade (p. 163).

NOTE

Remember that the alarm is triggered when the door is opened after being unlocked with the key blade - the alarm is switched off when the remote control key is inserted into the ignition switch.

WARNING Be aware of the risk of being locked in the car when it is locked from the outside using the remote control key - it is then not possible to open any of the doors from the inside with the door controls. For more information, see Deadlocks* (p. 174).

Automatic relocking If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within two minutes of unlocking, all are locked again automatically. This function prevents the car from being left unlocked unintentionally. For cars with alarm, see Alarm* (p. 177).

Related information Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 171)

Remote control key - functions (p. 160)

Manual locking of the door In certain situations the car must be lockable manually, e.g. in the event of power failure.

The left-hand front door can be locked with its lock cylinder and the remote control key's detachable key blade (p. 168).

Other doors have no lock cylinders and instead have a lock switch on the end of each door which must be depressed using the key blade - they are then mechanically locked/blocked to prevent them being opened from outside. The doors can still be opened from the inside.

Manual locking of the door. Not to be mixed up with child safety locks (p. 176).

Remove the detachable key blade (p. 163) from the remote control key. Insert the key blade in the hole for lock reset and press the key in until the key bottoms, approx. 12 mm.

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory. 171

The door can be opened from both the out- side and the inside.

The door is blocked against opening from the outside. To return to position A, the inner door handle must be opened.

The doors can also be unlocked with the unlock button on the remote control key (p. 156) or with the central locking button on the driver's door.

NOTE

A door's lock reset only locks that partic- ular door - not all doors simultaneously.

A manually locked rear door with acti- vated manual child safety locks (p. 176) cannot be opened from either the outside or the inside. A rear door that is locked in this way can only be unlocked with the remote control key or central locking but- ton.

Related information Remote control key/PCC - replacing the bat-

tery (p. 164)

Locking/unlocking - from the inside Locking/unlocking can be performed using the driver's door button for central locking. All doors and tailgate (p. 172) can be locked or unlocked simultaneously.

Central locking

Press one side of the button to lock -

the other side to unlock.

Lamp in lock button When the lamp in the central locking button for the driver's door is illuminated it means that all doors are locked.

Unlocking A door can be unlocked from the inside in two different ways:

Press the central locking button .

A long press also opens all the side windows* simultaneously (see also section Global opening (p. 172)).

Pull the door handle and open the door - the door is unlocked and opened in one opera- tion.

Locking Both front doors must be closed for the cen-

tral locking to be activated. Press the central

locking button - all doors are locked. If any of the rear doors is open, it will lock when it is closed.

A long press also closes all the side windows simultaneously (see also section Global opening (p. 172)).

Automatic locking The doors and tailgate are locked automatically when the car starts to move.

The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 113).

Related information Locking/unlocking - from the outside

(p. 170)

Alarm* (p. 177)

LOCKS AND ALARM

172

Global opening The global opening function opens or closes all side windows simultaneously and can be used for example to quickly air the car during hot weather.

Central locking button

A long press on the symbol in the central locking button or on the remote control key opens all side windows simultaneously. The

same procedure on the button closes all side windows simultaneously.

Related information Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 171)

Power windows (p. 104)

Locking/unlocking - glovebox The glovebox (p. 147) can only be locked/ unlocked using the detachable key blade from the remote control key (p. 156).

For information on the key blade, see Detachable key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 163).

Locking the glovebox:

Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock cyl- inder.

Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise. The keyhole is horizontal in the locked posi- tion.

Pull out the key blade.

Unlock by carrying this out in reverse order.

Related information Remote control key - functions (p. 160)

Locking/unlocking - tailgate The tailgate can be opened, locked and unlocked in a number of different ways.

Manual opening

Rubber plate with electrical contact.

The tailgate is held closed by an electrical lock. To open:

1. Push down gently on the wider of the two rubberised pressure plates under the outer handle - the lock is released.

2. Lift the outside handle in order to fully open the tailgate.

LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory. 173

IMPORTANT

Minimal force is required to release the rear hatch lock - just gently press the rubberised panel.

Do not place the lift force on the rubber panel when opening the rear hatch - lift the handle. Using too much force may damage the electrical contacts on the rubber panel.

Unlocking with the remote control key

Using the remote control key (p. 156) button the alarm for the tailgate can be disarmed* and the tailgate unlocked on its own.

The lock indicator (p. 158) on the instrument panel stops flashing in order to show that not all of the car is locked and the alarm's* level and

movement sensors and the sensors for opening the tailgate are disconnected.

The doors remain locked and armed.

The tailgate can be opened in two different ways using the remote control key:

One press - The tailgate is unlocked, but remains closed - press lightly on the rubberised pressure plate under the outer handle and lift the tailgate. If the tailgate is not opened within 2 minutes then it is relocked and the alarm is re- armed.

Two presses (within 3 seconds) - The tailgate is unlocked and the lock is disengaged at which point the tailgate opens about a centimetre - lift the outer handle to open. Rain, cold, frost or snow could however prevent the tailgate from disengaging from the lock.

NOTE

When the boot lid/tailgate is unlocked with 2 presses from the remote control key or from the car interior, automatic relocking does not take place because the boot lid/tailgate is open - it must be closed manually.

After the boot lid/tailgate has been closed it is unlocked and the alarm is not armed - relock it and re-arm the alarm with the remote control key's lock button

.

Opening the car from inside

Unlocking, tailgate

To open the tailgate:

Press the button (1) on the headlamp control panel.

> The lock releases and the tailgate opens by a few centimetres.

Locking with the remote control key Press the remote control key (p. 160) button

for locking .

> The lock indicator on the instrument panel starts flashing, which means that the car is locked and the alarm* has been acti- vated.

||

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.174

Related information Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 171)

Locking/unlocking - from the outside (p. 170)

Locking/unlocking - fuel filler flap The fuel filler flap is unlocked with the remote

control key (p. 156) button for unlocking ( ).

The fuel filler flap remains unlocked until the car is locked with the remote control key's button for

locking ( ). If the car is locked while driving or with the interior buttons then the fuel filler flap remains unlocked.

The fuel filler flap's locking logic also follows the locking or unlocking of the keyless system and the central locking system.

Related information Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing (p. 295)

Fuel filler flap - manual opening (p. 296)

Deadlocks* Deadlocks10 means that all door handles are mechanically disengaged, which prevents doors being opened from the inside.

The deadlocks are activated with the remote con- trol key (p. 156) and are set after an approx. ten seconds delay after the doors have been locked.

NOTE

If a door is opened within the delay time then the sequence is interrupted and the alarm is deactivated.

The car can only be unlocked with the remote control key when the deadlocks function is acti- vated. The front left door can also be unlocked with the detachable key blade (p. 163).

WARNING Do not allow anyone to remain in the car with- out first deactivating the double lock in order to avoid the risk of anyone being locked in.

10 Only in combination with alarm.

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory. 175

Temporary deactivation

Active menu options are indicated with a cross.

MY CAR

OK MENU

TUNE knob control

EXIT

If someone is going to stay in the car but the doors must be locked from the outside, then the deadlocks function can be temporarily switched off, which is carried out in the menu system MY CAR. For a detailed description of the menu sys- tem, see MY CAR (p. 113).

In MY CAR one of the following options can be selected:

Activate once: - The combined instrument panel then shows Locks and alarm Reduced guard and deadlocks are

switched off when the car is locked, only at this time. (Note that the alarm's movement and tilt detectors* are switched off at the same time.)

During the next time the engine is started, the system is reset to zero and the combined instru- ment panel shows the message Locks and alarm Full guard at which the deadlocks and the alarm's movement and tilt detectors are re- engaged.

Ask on exit: - Each time the engine is switched off, the driver must answer the question Activate Reduced Guard until engine has started again?.

If the deadlocks function shall be switched off

Press OK/MENU and lock the car. (Note that the alarm's movement and tilt detectors* are switched off at the same time.)

> The next time the engine is started, the system is reset to zero and the combined instrument panel shows the message Locks and alarm Full guard at which the deadlocks function and the alarm's movement and tilt detectors are re- engaged.

If the locking system shall not be changed

Press EXIT and lock the car.

NOTE

Remember that the alarm is activated when the car is locked.

If any of the doors are opened from the inside then the alarm is triggered.

The above applies if the deadlocks have not been deactivated temporarily.

Related information Keyless Drive* - unlocking with the key blade

(p. 168)

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.176

Child safety locks - manual activation The child safety locks prevent children from being able to open a rear door from the inside.

The child safety locks are located on the trailing edge of the rear doors and are only accessible when the doors are open.

Activate/deactivate child safety locks

Manual child safety locks. Not to be mixed up with man- ual door lock (p. 170).

Use the remote control key's detachable key blade (p. 163) to turn the knob.

The door is blocked against opening from the inside.

The door can be opened from both the out- side and the inside.

NOTE

A door's knob control only blocks that particular door - not both rear doors simultaneously.

Cars with an electric child safety lock do not have a manual child lock.

Related information Child safety locks - electrical activation*

(p. 176)

Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 171)

Child safety locks - electrical activation* The child safety locks prevent children from being able to open a rear door from the inside.

Activation The electrical child safety locks can be activated/ deactivated in all key positions (p. 80) higher than 0. Activation/deactivation can be performed up to 2 minutes after switching off the engine, provided that no door is opened.

Control panel driver's door.

1. Start the engine or choose a key position higher than 0.

LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory. 177

2. Press the button in the driver's door control panel.

> The information display shows the mes- sage Rear child lock activated and the button's lamp illuminates - the locks are active.

When the electric child safety lock is active then the rear:

windows can only be opened with the driver's door control panel

doors cannot be opened from inside.

The current setting is stored when the engine is switched off - if the child safety locks are acti- vated at engine shutdown, the function will remain activated the next time the engine is started.

Related information Child safety locks - manual activation

(p. 176)

Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 171)

Alarm*

The alarm is a device that warns in the event of e.g. a break-in in the car.

Activated alarm is triggered if:

a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is opened11

a movement is detected in the passenger compartment (if fitted with a movement detector*)

the car is raised or towed away (if fitted with a tilt detector*)

the starter battery's cable is disconnected

the siren is disconnected.

If there is a fault in the alarm system then the information display in the combined instrument panel shows a message. In which case, contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec- ommended.

NOTE

The movement sensors trigger an alarm in the event of movement in the passenger compartment - air currents are also regis- tered. For this reason the alarm is triggered if the car is left with a window open or if the passenger compartment heater is used.

To avoid this: Close the window when leaving the car. If the car's integrated passenger compartment heater (or a portable electric heater) shall be used - direct the airflow from the air vents so that they are not pointing upwards in the passenger compartment. Alternatively, reduced alarm level can be used, Reduced alarm level* (p. 180).

NOTE

Do not attempt to repair or alter components in the alarm system yourself. Any such attempts may affect the terms of the insur- ance.

Arming the alarm Press the remote control key lock button.

Deactivate the alarm Press the remote control key unlock button.

11 Applies to certain markets.

||

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.178

Deactivating a triggered alarm Press the remote control key unlock button

or insert the remote control key in the igni- tion switch.

Related information Alarm* - automatic re-arming (p. 178)

Alarm* - remote control key not working (p. 179)

Alarm indicator* The alarm indicator shows alarm system (p. 177) status.

Same LED as lock indicator (p. 158).

A red LED on the instrument panel indicates the alarm system's status:

LED not lit Alarm not armed

The LED flashes once every other second Alarm is armed

The LED flashes rapidly after disarming the alarm (and until the remote control key is inserted in the ignition switch and key posi- tion I is selected) Alarm has been trig- gered.

Alarm* - automatic re-arming Automatic re-arming of the alarm (p. 177) pre- vents the car being left with the alarm disarmed unintentionally.

If the car is unlocked with the remote control key (p. 156)(and the alarm is disarmed) but none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within 2 minutes, then the alarm is automatically re- armed. The car is relocked at the same time.

Related information Alarm* - automatic arming (p. 179)

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory. 179

Alarm* - automatic arming In certain countries the alarm(p. 177) is acti- vated after a certain delay if the driver's door was opened and closed but the car was not re- locked.

Related information Alarm signals* (p. 179)

Alarm* - remote control key not working If the alarm (p. 177) cannot be deactivated with the remote control key, e.g. if the key's battery (p. 164) is discharged - the car can be unlocked, disarmed and the engine started as follows:

1. Open the left-hand front door with the detachable key blade (p. 168).

> The alarm is triggered, the direction indi- cators flash and the siren sounds.

2. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch.

> The alarm is deactivated.

Alarm signals* When the alarm (p. 177) is triggered a siren sounds and all direction indicators flash.

A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the alarm is switched off. The siren has its own battery and works independently of the car's starter battery.

The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes or until the alarm is switched off.

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.180

Reduced alarm level* Reduced guard means that the movement and tilt detectors can be temporarily deactivated.

To avoid accidental triggering of the alarm - e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or during transport on a car train or car ferry - temporarily deactivate the movement and tilt detectors.

The procedure is the same as with the temporary disengaging of deadlocks, see Deadlocks* (p. 174).

Related information Alarm* (p. 177)

Alarm indicator* (p. 178)

Type approval - remote control key system Type approval for the remote control key system can be read in the table.

Lock system, standard

Country/Area

EU, China

Keyless lock system (Keyless drive)

Coun-

try/

Area

EU Delphi Deutschland GmbH, 42367 Wuppertal hereby certifies that this VO1-125kHz is compliant with the essential attribute requirements and other relevant provisions as stipula- ted in Directive 2014/53/EU (RED). The original declaration of conformity can be viewed here: support.volvocars.com.

Korea

LOCKS AND ALARM

181

Coun-

try/

Area

China

Hong Kong

Related information Remote control key (p. 156)

DRIVER SUPPORT

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.184

Adjustable steering force* Speed related power steering causes the steer- ing wheel force to increase with the speed of the car in order to give the driver enhanced sensitiv- ity.

On motorways the steering feels firmer. Steering is light and requires no extra effort when parking and at low speed.

The driver can choose between three different levels of steering force for road responsiveness or steering sensitivity in the menu system MY CAR (p. 113):

Once there, search for Steering force level and select Low, Medium or High.

This menu is not accessible when the car is mov- ing.

NOTE

In certain situations the power steering may become too hot and then needs to be tempo- rarily cooled - during this time the power steering operates with reduced power and turning the steering wheel may then be per- ceived to be slightly heavier.

In parallel with the temporarily reduced steer- ing assistance the combined instrument panel shows a message.

Related information MY CAR (p. 113)

Electronic stability control (ESC) - general Stability system ESC (Electronic Stability Control) helps the driver to avoid skidding and improves the car's traction.

The activation of the ESC system dur- ing braking may be noticed as a throb- bing sound. The car may accelerate slower than expected when the accel-

erator pedal is depressed.

WARNING

The stability system ESC is supplemen- tary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer it cannot han- dle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.

ESC is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropri- ate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.

The ESC system consists of the following func- tions:

Active Yaw Control

Spin Control

Traction control system

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 185

Engine drag control - EDC

Corner Traction Control - CTC

Driver Steering Recommendation DSR

Trailer Stability Assist* - TSA

Active Yaw Control The function checks the driving and brake force of the wheels individually in order to stabilise the car.

Spin Control The function reduces engine power if the drive wheels slip against the underlying surface in order to maintain stability and traction.

Traction control system The function is active at low speed and transfers power from the driving wheel that is spinning to the one that is not.

Engine drag control - EDC EDC (Engine Drag Control) prevents involuntary wheel locking, e.g. after shifting down or engine braking when driving in low gears on slippery road surfaces.

Involuntary wheel locking while driving can, amongst other things, impair the driver's ability to steer the car.

Corner Traction Control - CTC CTC (Corner Traction Control) compensates for understeer and allows higher than normal accel- eration in a bend without wheelspin on the inner wheel, e.g. on an arcing motorway entrance road to quickly reach the prevailing traffic speed.

Driver Steering Recommendation DSR DSR (Driver Steering Recommendation) helps the driver steer the car in the right direction when there is reduced traction or when the ABS sys- tem engages.

The primary role of the DSR function is to help the driver steer in the right direction when the car is skidding.

DSR engages by applying slight torque to the steering wheel in the direction in which the car should be steered to maintain/achieve maximum possible traction and stabilise the car.

Trailer Stability Assist* - TSA1

Trailer stability assist (p. 312) function is to sta- bilise the car and trailer combination if it begins to snake. For more information, see Driving with a trailer (p. 305).

NOTE

The function is deactivated if the driver selects Sport mode.

Related information Electronic stability control (ESC) - operation

(p. 186)

Electronic stability control (ESC) - symbols and messages (p. 187)

1 Trailer Stability Assist is included in the installation of the Volvo genuine towbar.

DRIVER SUPPORT

186

Electronic stability control (ESC) - operation

Selection of level - Sport mode The ESC system is always activated - it cannot be deactivated.

However, the driver can select the Sport mode, which allows for a more active driving experi- ence.

In Sport mode the system detects whether the accelera-

tor pedal, steering wheel movements and corner- ing are more active than in normal driving and then allows controlled skidding with the rear sec- tion up to a certain level before it intervenes and stabilises the car.

If the driver stops a controlled skid by releasing the accelerator pedal, for example, then the ESC system intervenes and stabilises the car.

With Sport mode, maximum traction is also obtained if the car has become stuck, or when driving on a loose surface - e.g. sand or deep snow.

Proceed as follows to select Sport mode:

Sport mode is selected in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 113).

Sport mode is indicated in the com- bined instrument panel by means of this symbol illuminating with a constant glow until the driver deselects the

function or until the engine is switched off - after the next time the engine is started the ESC sys- tem is back in its normal mode once again.

Related information Electronic stability control (ESC) - general

(p. 184)

Electronic stability control (ESC) - symbols and messages (p. 187)

MY CAR (p. 113)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

187

Electronic stability control (ESC) - symbols and messages

Table

Symbol Message Specification

ESC Temporarily OFF ESC system has been temporarily reduced due to excessive brake disc temperature - the function is reactivated automatically when the brakes have cooled.

ESC Service required ESC system disengaged.

Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again.

Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

and

"Message" There is a message in the combined instrument panel - read it!

Constant glow for 2 seconds.

System check when the engine is started.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

188

Symbol Message Specification

Flashing light. ESC system is being activated.

Constant glow. Sport mode is activated.

NOTE: The ESC system is not deactivated in this mode - it is partially reduced.

Related information Electronic stability control (ESC) - general

(p. 184)

Electronic stability control (ESC) - operation (p. 186)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 189

Speed limiter* A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a reverse cruise control - the driver regulates the speed using the accelerator pedal but is prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre-selected/set speed by the speed limiter.

Steering wheel keypad and combined instrument panel Digital and Analogue.

Speed limiter - On/Off.

Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed.

Standby mode

Activate and adjust the max. speed.

Selected speed

Speed limiter active

Related information Speed limiter* - getting started (p. 189)

Speed limiter - temporary deactivation and standby mode* (p. 191)

Speed limiter* - alarm for speed exceeded (p. 192)

Speed limiter* - deactivation (p. 192)

Speed limiter* - getting started A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a reverse cruise control - the driver regulates the speed using the accelerator pedal but is prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre-selected/set speed by the speed limiter.

Steering wheel keypad and combined instrument panel Digital and Analogue.

Speed limiter - On/Off.

Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed.

Standby mode

Activate and adjust the max. speed.

Selected speed

Speed limiter active

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.190

Switch on and activate When the speed limiter is active, its symbol (6) is shown in combination with a mark (5) by the set maximum speed in the combined instrument panel.

Selection and storage of the highest possible speed in the memory can be made both during a journey and while stationary.

While driving

1. Press the steering wheel button to switch on the speed limiter.

> The symbol (6) for speed limiter illumi- nates in the combined instrument panel.

2. When the car is moving at the desired high- est possible speed: Press one of the steering

wheel buttons or until the combined instrument panel shows a mark (5) next to the desired maximum speed.

> The speed limiter is then active and the selected max. speed is stored in the memory.

When stationary

1. Press the steering wheel button to switch on the speed limiter.

2. Scroll with the button until the combined instrument panel shows a mark (5) by the desired maximum speed.

> The speed limiter is then active and the selected max. speed is stored in the memory.

Related information Speed limiter* (p. 189)

Speed limiter* - changing speed

Changing the stored speed Stored max. speed is changed with short or long

presses on the or steering wheel button.

To adjust +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph):

Use short presses - each press gives +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph).

To adjust +/- 1 km/h (+/- 1 mph):

Hold down the button and release it at the required max. speed.

Last press made is stored in the memory.

Related information Speed limiter* (p. 189)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 191

Speed limiter - temporary deactivation and standby mode* A Speed Limiter (Speed Limiter) can be regar- ded as a reverse cruise control - the driver regu- lates the speed using the accelerator pedal but is prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre- selected/set speed by the speed limiter.

Steering wheel keypad and instrument panel Digital and Analogue.

Speed limiter - On/Off.

Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed.

Standby mode

Activate and adjust the max. speed.

Selected speed

Speed limiter active

Temporary deactivation - standby mode To temporarily deactivate the speed limiter and set it in standby mode:

Press .

> The combined instrument panel's mark (5) changes colour from GREEN to WHITE (Digital) or from WHITE to GREY (Analogue) and the driver can temporarily exceed the set maximum speed.

The speed limiter is reactivated with one

press on . The mark (5) then changes colour from WHITE to GREEN (Digital) or GREY to WHITE (Analogue) and the car's maximum speed is limited again.

Temporary deactivation with the accelerator pedal The speed limiter can also be set in standby mode with the accelerator pedal, e.g. for rapidly accelerating the car out of a situation:

Depress the accelerator pedal fully.

> The combined instrument panel shows the stored maximum speed with a col- oured mark (5) and the driver can tempo- rarily exceed the set maximum speed the mark (5) changes colour from GREEN to WHITE (Digital) or WHITE to GREY (Analogue) during that time.

The speed limiter is automatically reacti- vated after the accelerator pedal is released and the car's speed is slowed down to below the selected/stored maxi- mum speed - the mark (5) changes colour from WHITE to GREEN (Digital) or GREY to WHITE (Analogue) and the car's maxi- mum speed is again limited.

Related information Speed limiter* (p. 189)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.192

Speed limiter* - alarm for speed exceeded A Speed Limiter (Speed Limiter) can be regar- ded as a reverse cruise control - the driver regu- lates the speed using the accelerator pedal but is prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre-selected/set speed by the speed limiter.

On steep roads the speed limiter's engine brak- ing effect may be inadequate and the selected maximum speed is exceeded. The driver is aler- ted about this with an acoustic signal. The signal is active until the driver has slowed to below the selected maximum speed.

NOTE

The alarm is only activated after 5 seconds if the speed has been exceeded by at least 3 km/h (approx. 2 mph), provided that neither

of the or buttons has been depressed during the last half minute.

Related information Speed limiter* (p. 189)

Speed limiter* - deactivation A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a reverse cruise control - the driver regulates the speed using the accelerator pedal but is prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre-selected/set speed by the speed limiter.

To deactivate the speed limiter:

Press the steering wheel button .

> The combined instrument panel's (p. 189) symbol for the speed limiter and the mark for the set speed are extinguished. The selected and stored speed are thus deleted from the memory and cannot be

resumed with the button.

The driver can then use the accelerator pedal to choose a speed without limita- tion.

Related information Speed limiter* (p. 189)

Cruise control* The cruise control (CC Cruise Control) helps the driver maintain an even speed, resulting in more relaxing driving on motorways and long, straight roads with regular traffic flows.

Overview

The steering wheel buttons and combined instrument panel in cars without speed limiter2.

2 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 193

The steering wheel buttons and combined instrument panel in cars with speed limiter2.

Cruise control - On/Off.

Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed.

Standby mode

Activate and adjust the speed.

Selected speed (GREY = Standby mode).

Cruise control active - WHITE symbol (GREY = Standby mode).

WARNING The driver must always be observant with regard to the traffic conditions and intervene when the cruise control is not maintaining a suitable speed and/or suitable distance.

The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely.

Related information Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 193)

Cruise control* temporary deactivation and standby mode (p. 195)

Cruise control* - resume set speed (p. 196)

Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 197)

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 201)

Cruise control* - managing speed It is possible to activate, set and change the stored speed.

Activating and setting the speed

The steering wheel buttons and display in cars without speed limiter3.

2 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market. 3 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.194

The steering wheel buttons and display in cars with speed limiter3.

To start the cruise control:

Press the steering wheel button for CRUISE

(without speed limiter) or (with speed limiter).

> The cruise control symbol (6) in the com- bined instrument panel illuminates - Cruise control is in standby mode.

To activate cruise control:

At the required speed - press the steering

wheel button or .

> The current speed is stored in the memory and the combined instrument panel's marking (5) illuminates at the selected speed and the symbol (6) changes from GREY to

WHITE - the car then follows the stored speed.

NOTE

Cruise Control cannot be enabled at speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph).

Changing the stored speed Stored speed is changed with short or long

presses on the or steering wheel button.

To adjust +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph):

Use short presses - each press gives +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph).

To adjust +/- 1 km/h (+/- 1 mph):

Hold down the button and release it at the required speed.

Last press made is stored in the memory.

If speed is increased using the accelerator pedal

prior to pressing the / button, then it is the car's current speed when the button is pressed that is stored.

A temporary increase in speed with the accelera- tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the cruise control setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released.

NOTE

If any of the Cruise Control buttons are held depressed for several minutes then it is blocked and deactivated. To be able to reacti- vate Cruise Control, the car must be stopped and the engine restarted.

Related information Cruise control* (p. 192)

3 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 195

Cruise control* temporary deactivation and standby mode The function can be temporarily deactivated and set in standby mode.

Temporary deactivation - standby mode

The steering wheel buttons and display in cars without speed limiter4.

The steering wheel buttons and display in cars with speed limiter4.

To temporarily disengage cruise control and set it in standby mode:

Press .

> The combined instrument panel's marking (5) and symbol (6) change colour from WHITE to GREY - Cruise control is tem- porarily disengaged.

Standby mode due to driver intervention Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set automatically in standby mode if:

the foot brake is used

the clutch pedal is depressed for longer than 1 minute5

the gear lever/selector is moved to N posi- tion

the driver maintains speed higher than the stored speed for longer than 1 minute.

The driver must then regulate the speed.

A temporary increase in speed with the accelera- tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released.

Automatic standby mode Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set in standby mode if:

wheels lose traction

engine speed is too low/high

speed falls below 30 km/h (20 mph).

The driver must then regulate the speed.

Related information Cruise control* (p. 192)

Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 193)

Cruise control* - resume set speed (p. 196)

Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 197)

4 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market. 5 Disengaging and selecting a higher or lower gear does not involve standby mode.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.196

Cruise control* - resume set speed The cruise control (p. 192) (CC Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an even speed.

After temporary deactivation and standby mode (p. 195) it is possible to resume the set speed.

The steering wheel buttons and display in cars without speed limiter6.

The steering wheel buttons and display in cars with speed limiter6.

To reactivate the cruise control from standby mode:

Press the steering wheel button .

> The combined instrument panel's marking (5) and symbol (6) change colour from GREY to WHITE - the car then follows the last stored speed.

NOTE

A marked speed increase may occur once the

speed has been resumed by selecting .

Related information Cruise control* (p. 192)

Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 193)

Cruise control* temporary deactivation and standby mode (p. 195)

Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 197)

6 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 197

Cruise control* - deactivate

How it is deactivated is described here.

The steering wheel buttons and display in cars without speed limiter7.

The steering wheel buttons and display in cars with speed limiter7.

The cruise control is switched off with the steer- ing wheel button (1) or by switching off the engine - the stored speed is deleted from the

memory and cannot be resumed with the but- ton.

Related information Cruise control* (p. 192)

Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 193)

Cruise control* temporary deactivation and standby mode (p. 195)

Cruise control* - resume set speed (p. 196)

Distance Warning* The Distance Warning function (Distance Alert) warns the driver if the time interval to the vehicle ahead becomes too short.

Distance Warning is active at speeds above 30 km/h (20 mph) and only reacts to vehicles driving in front of the car, in the same direction. No distance information is provided for oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles.

Orange-coloured warning lamp8.

An orange-coloured warning lamp in the wind- screen illuminates with a constant glow if the dis- tance to the vehicle in front is shorter than the set time interval.

7 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market. 8 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.198

NOTE

Distance warning is deactivated during the time the adaptive cruise control is active.

WARNING Distance warning only reacts if the distance to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the preset value - the speed of the driver's vehicle is not affected.

Operation

Press the button in the centre console to switch the function on or off. The function is switched on if one lamp is illuminated in the button.

Some combinations of the selected equipment leave no vacant space for a button in the centre console - in which case, the function is operated in the car's menu system MY CAR (p. 113) -

once there, search for the Distance Alert func- tion.

Set time interval

Controls and symbol for time interval.

Time interval - Increase/decrease.

Time interval - On.

Different time intervals to the vehicle in front can be selected and shown in the combined instrument panel as 1-5 hori- zontal lines - the more lines the longer the time interval. One line corresponds to

approximately 1 second to the vehicle in front, 5 lines approximately 3 seconds.

The same symbol is also shown when adaptive cruise control (p. 201) is activated.

NOTE

The higher the speed the longer the calcula- ted distance in metres for a given time inter- val.

The set time interval is also used by the func- tion adaptive cruise control (p. 202).

Only use the time intervals permitted by local traffic regulations.

Related information Distance Warning* - limitations (p. 199)

Distance Warning* - symbols and messages (p. 200)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 199

Distance Warning* - limitations

This function, which uses the same radar sensor as Adaptive cruise control (p. 201) and Collision warning with auto brake (p. 227), has certain lim- itations.

NOTE

Strong sunlight, reflections or strong varia- tions in light intensity, as well as wearing sun- glasses, could mean that the warning light in the windscreen cannot be seen.

Poor weather or winding roads could affect the radar sensor's capacity to detect vehicles in front.

The size of other vehicles could also affect detection capacity, e.g. motorcycles. This could mean that the warning lamp illuminates at a shorter distance than the setting or that the warning is temporarily absent.

Extremely high speeds can also cause the lamp to illuminate at a shorter distance than that set due to limitations in sensor range.

For further information on radar sensor limita- tions, see Radar sensor - limitations (p. 214) and Collision warning system* - operation (p. 231).

Related information Distance Warning* (p. 197)

Distance Warning* - symbols and messages (p. 200)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.200

Distance Warning* - symbols and messages

The function has certain symbols and messages that can be shown in the combined instrument

panel if the function is reduced due to its limita- tions (p. 199).

SymbolA Message Specification

Radar blocked See manual

Distance Warning temporarily disengaged.

Radar sensor (p. 214) is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.

For information, see Radar sensor - limitations (p. 214).

Collision warning Service required

Distance Warning and Collision Warning with Auto Brake (p. 232) fully or partially disengaged.

Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

A The symbols are schematic.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 201

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* The adaptive cruise control (ACC Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an even speed combined with a pre-selected time interval to the vehicle ahead.

The adaptive cruise control provides a more relaxing driving experience on long journeys on motorways and long straight main roads in smooth traffic flows.

The driver sets the desired speed (p. 204) and time interval to the car in front. When the radar detector detects a slower vehicle in front of the car, the speed is automatically adapted to that. When the road is clear again the car returns to the selected speed.

If the adaptive cruise control is switched off or set to standby mode and the car comes too close to a vehicle in front, then the driver is warned instead by a Distance Alert (p. 197) about the short distance.

WARNING The driver must always be observant with regard to the traffic conditions and intervene when the adaptive cruise control is not main- taining a suitable speed or suitable distance.

The adaptive cruise control cannot handle all traffic, weather and road conditions.

Read all the sections about the adaptive cruise control in the owner's manual in order to learn about its limitations, of which the driver should be aware before it is used.

The driver always bears responsibility for maintaining the correct distance and speed, even when the adaptive cruise control is being used.

IMPORTANT

Maintenance of adaptive cruise control com- ponents must only be performed at a work- shop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec- ommended.

Automatic gearbox Cars with automatic gearbox have enhanced functionality with the adaptive cruise control's Queue assistance (p. 208) function.

Related information Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 202)

Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 203)

Adaptive cruise control* - managing speed (p. 204)

Adaptive cruise control* - set time interval (p. 205)

Adaptive cruise control* - temporary deacti- vation, and standby mode (p. 206)

Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking another vehicle (p. 207)

Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate (p. 207)

Adaptive Cruise Control* - queue assistance (p. 208)

Adaptive cruise control* - switch cruise con- trol functionality (p. 210)

Radar sensor (p. 214)

Radar sensor - limitations (p. 214)

Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing and action (p. 211)

Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and mes- sages (p. 212)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.202

Adaptive cruise control* - function Adaptive cruise control consists of a cruise con- trol system and a coordinated spacing system.

Function overview

Function overview9.

Warning lamp - braking by driver required

Steering wheel (p. 87) keypad

Radar sensor (p. 214)

Adaptive cruise control consists of a cruise con- trol system and a coordinated spacing system.

WARNING Adaptive cruise control is not a collision avoid- ance system. The driver must intervene if the system does not detect a vehicle in front.

The adaptive cruise control does not brake for humans or animals, and not for small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles. Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles and objects.

Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at junc- tions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on slip roads.

The distance to the vehicle ahead is mainly measured by a radar sensor. The cruise control function regulates the speed with acceleration and braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a low sound when they are being used by the adaptive cruise control.

WARNING The brake pedal moves when the adaptive cruise control brakes. Do not rest your foot beneath the brake pedal - it may then become trapped.

The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the vehicle ahead in the same lane according to what the driver set for time interval (p. 205). If the radar sensor cannot see any vehicle in front then the car will instead maintain the speed set and stored by the driver. This also takes place if the speed of the vehicle in front exceeds the stored speed.

The adaptive cruise control aims to control the speed in a smooth way. In situations that demand sudden braking the driver must brake himself/ herself. This applies with large differences in speed, or if the vehicle in front brakes heavily. Due to limitations in the radar sensor (p. 214) braking may come unexpectedly or not at all.

The adaptive cruise control can be activated to follow another vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h10

(20 mph) up to 200 km/h (125 mph). If the speed falls below 30 km/h (20 mph) or if the engine speed becomes too low, the cruise con- trol is set in standby mode at which automatic braking ceases - the driver must then take over himself/herself to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle in front.

9 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may differ depending on car model. 10 Queue Assist (p. 208) in cars with automatic gearbox can operate in the range 0-200 km/h (0-125 mph).

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 203

Warning lamp - braking by driver required Adaptive cruise control has a braking capacity that is equivalent to approx. 40% of the car's braking capacity.

Audio-visual warning signal in the event of a collision risk11.

If the car needs to be braked more heavily than the adaptive cruise control capacity and the driver does not brake, then the warning lamp and warn- ing sound from the Collision warning system (p. 227) are used in order to alert the driver that immediate intervention is required.

NOTE

The warning lamp may be difficult to see in strong sunlight or when wearing sunglasses.

WARNING The adaptive cruise control only warns of vehicles which the radar sensor has detected. Hence the warning may not be given, or it may be given with a certain delay. Do not wait for a warning without braking when so required.

Steep roads and/or heavy load Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control is primarily intended for use when driving on level road surfaces. It may have difficulty in keeping the correct distance from the vehicle ahead when driving on steep downhill slopes, with a heavy load or with a trailer - in which case, be extra attentive and ready to slow down.

Related information Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 201)

Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 203)

Cruise control* (p. 192)

Adaptive cruise control* - overview Operation of the adaptive cruise control (p. 201) and steering wheel keypad varies depending on whether or not the car is equipped with speed

limiter (p. 189)12.

Adaptive cruise control with Speed limiter

Cruise control - On/Off.

Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed.

Standby mode

Time interval - Increase/decrease.

Activate and adjust the speed.

11 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. 12 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.204

Green marking at stored speed (WHITE = standby mode).

Time distance

ACC is active at the GREEN symbol (WHITE = standby mode).

Adaptive cruise control without Speed limiter

Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed.

Cruise control - On/Off or Standby mode.

Time interval - Increase/decrease.

Activate and adjust the speed.

(Not used)

Green marking at stored speed (WHITE = standby mode).

Time distance

ACC is active at the GREEN symbol (WHITE = standby mode).

Related information Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 201)

Adaptive cruise control* - managing speed (p. 204)

Adaptive cruise control* - set time interval (p. 205)

Adaptive cruise control* - temporary deacti- vation, and standby mode (p. 206)

Cruise control* (p. 192)

Adaptive cruise control* - managing speed

To start the ACC:

Press the steering wheel button - a simi- lar WHITE symbol illuminates in the com- bined instrument panel (8) which shows that the adaptive cruise control is in standby mode (p. 206).

To activate ACC:

At the required speed - press the steering

wheel button or .

> The current speed is stored in the memory, the combined instrument panel shows a "magnifying glass" (6) around the stored speed for a second or so and its marking changes from WHITE to GREEN.

When this symbol changes colour from WHITE to GREEN, ACC is active and the car maintains the stored speed.

Only when the symbol shows an image of another vehicle is the distance to the vehicle in front controlled by ACC.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 205

At the same time a speed range is marked:

the higher speed with GREEN marking is the pre-programmed speed

the lower speed is the speed of the vehicle in front.

Changing the stored speed Stored speed is changed with short or long

presses on the or steering wheel button.

To adjust +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph):

Use short presses - each press gives +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph).

To adjust +/- 1 km/h (+/- 1 mph):

Hold down the button and release it at the required speed.

Last press made is stored in the memory.

If speed is increased using the accelerator pedal

prior to pressing the / button, then it is the car's current speed when the button is pressed that is stored.

A temporary increase in speed with the accelera- tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect

the setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released.

NOTE

If any of the adaptive cruise control buttons are held depressed for several minutes then the function is blocked and deactivated. To be able to reactivate it, the car must be stopped and the engine restarted.

In certain situations it cannot be reactivated - in which case, the combined instrument panel (p. 212) shows Adaptive cruise control unavailable.

Related information Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 201)

Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 203)

Cruise control* (p. 192)

Adaptive cruise control* - set time interval

Different time intervals to the vehicle in front can be selected and shown in the combined instrument panel as 1-5 hori- zontal lines - the more lines the longer the time interval. One line corresponds to

approximately 1 second to the vehicle in front, 5 lines approximately 3 seconds.

To set/change the time distance:

Turn the steering wheel button set's thumb-

wheel (or use the / buttons for cars without Speed limiters).

At low speed, when the distances are short, the adaptive cruise control increases the time interval slightly.

The adaptive cruise control allows the time inter- val to vary noticeably in certain situations in order to allow the car to follow the vehicle in front smoothly and comfortably.

Note that a short time interval only allows the driver a short time to react and take action if any unforeseen traffic problem should arise.

The same symbol is also shown when Distance Alert (p. 197) is activated.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.206

NOTE

Only use the time intervals permitted by local traffic regulations.

If the adaptive cruise control does not appear to react when activated, this may be because the time distance to the vehicle in front is pre- venting an increase in speed.

The higher the speed the longer the calcula- ted distance in metres for a given time inter- val.

Read more how speed is handled (p. 204).

Related information Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 201)

Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 203)

Cruise control* (p. 192)

Adaptive cruise control* - temporary deactivation, and standby mode The adaptive cruise control can be temporarily deactivated and set in standby mode.

Temporary deactivation/standby mode - with speed limiter To temporarily disengage adaptive cruise control and set it in standby mode:

Press the steering wheel button

This symbol and stored speed marking then changes colour from GREEN to WHITE.

Temporary deactivation/standby mode - without speed limiter To temporarily disengage adaptive cruise control and set it in standby mode:

Press the steering wheel button

Standby mode due to driver intervention The adaptive cruise control is temporarily disen- gaged and set automatically in standby mode if:

the foot brake is used

the clutch pedal is depressed for longer than 1 minute13

the gear selector is moved to N position (automatic gearbox)

the driver maintains speed higher than the stored speed for longer than 1 minute.

The driver must then regulate the speed.

A temporary increase in speed with the accelera- tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released.

For more information, see the sections Managing speed (p. 204) and Overtaking another vehicle (p. 207).

Automatic standby mode The adaptive cruise control is dependent on other systems, e.g. Stability system ESC (p. 184). If any of these systems stops working, the adap- tive cruise control is deactivated automatically.

In the event of automatic deactivation a signal will sound and the message Adaptive cruise control cancelled is shown in the combined instrument panel. The driver must then intervene and adapt the speed and distance to the vehicle ahead.

An automatic deactivation can be due to:

the driver opens the door

the driver takes off his seatbelt

engine speed is too low/high

13 Disengaging and selecting a higher or lower gear does not involve standby mode.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 207

speed has fallen below 30 km/h14 (20 mph)

wheels lose traction

brake temperature is high

the radar sensor is covered e.g. by wet snow or heavy rain (radar waves blocked).

For more information on symbols, messages and their meaning, see section Symbols and mes- sages in the display (p. 212).

Resume set speed Adaptive cruise control in standby mode is reacti- vated with one press on the steering wheel but-

ton - the speed is then set to the last stored speed.

NOTE

A marked speed increase may occur once the

speed has been resumed by selecting .

Related information Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 201)

Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 203)

Cruise control* (p. 192)

Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking another vehicle ACC can also assist during overtaking.

When the car is following another vehicle and the driver indicates an impending overtaking manoeuvre with the direction indicator15, the adaptive cruise control helps to briefly accelerate the car towards the vehicle in front.

The function is active at speeds above 70 km/h (43 mph).

Read more about the different time inter- vals (p. 205) to the vehicle in front.

Read more about how you manage the speed (p. 204).

WARNING Be aware that this function can be activated in more situations other than during overtak- ing, e.g. when a direction indicator is used to indicate a change of lane or exit to another road - the car will then accelerate briefly.

Related information Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 201)

Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 203)

Cruise control* (p. 192)

Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate

Keypad with Speed limiter The adaptive cruise control is disengaged with a

short press of the steering wheel button . The set speed is cleared and cannot be resumed with

the button.

Keypad without Speed limiter A short press on the steering wheel button sets the adaptive cruise control in standby mode. With a further short press it is deactivated. The set speed is cleared and cannot be resumed with

the button.

Related information Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 201)

Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 203)

Cruise control* (p. 192)

14 Does not apply to a car with Queue Assist - it can go all the way down to 0 km/h. 15 On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.208

Adaptive Cruise Control* - queue assistance Queue assistance also provides the adaptive cruise control with enhanced functionality at speeds lower than 30 km/h (20 mph).

In cars with automatic gearbox the adaptive cruise control is supplemented with the queue assistance function (also referred to as "Queue Assist").

Queue assistance has the following functions:

Extended speed range - also at lower than 30 km/h (20 mph) and at stationary

Change of target

Automatic braking ceases when stationary

Note that the lowest programmable speed for the adaptive cruise control is 30 km/h (20 mph) - even though the cruise control is capable of fol- lowing another vehicle down to 0 km/h, a lower speed cannot be selected.

Learn more about how you manage the speed (p. 201) and different time intervals to the vehicle in front (p. 205).

Extended speed range

NOTE

In order to activate the cruise control the driv- er's door must be closed and the driver must be wearing the seatbelt.

With an automatic gearbox, the adaptive cruise control can follow another vehicle within the range 0-200 km/h (0-125 mph).

NOTE

Activation of the cruise control below 30 km/h (20 mph) requires a vehicle in front within a reasonable distance.

For shorter stops in connection with inching in slow traffic or at traffic lights driving is automati- cally resumed if the stops do not exceed approx. 3 seconds - if it takes longer before the car in front starts moving again then the cruise control is set in standby mode (p. 206) with auto- matic braking. The driver must then reactivate it in one of the following ways:

Press the steering wheel button

...or...

Depress the accelerator pedal.

> The cruise control will then resume following the vehicle in front.

NOTE

The Queue Assist function can keep the car stationary for a maximum of 4 minutes - then the brakes release.

See more information under the heading "Termination of automatic braking at a stand- still".

Change of target

If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there may be stationary traffic in front.

When the adaptive cruise control is following another vehicle at speeds lower than 30 km/h (20 mph) and the target is changed from a mov- ing vehicle to a stationary vehicle, the cruise con- trol will brake for the stationary vehicle.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 209

WARNING When the adaptive cruise control is following a vehicle in front at speeds in excess of 30 km/h (20 mph) and the target is changed from a vehicle in front to a stationary vehicle, the adaptive cruise control will ignore the sta- tionary vehicle and instead select the stored speed.

The driver must intervene him/herself and brake.

Automatic standby mode with change of target The adaptive cruise control is disengaged and set in standby mode:

when the speed is below 5 km/h (5 mph) and the cruise control is uncertain whether the target object is a stationary vehicle or some other object, e.g. a speed bump.

when the speed is below 5 km/h (5 mph) and the vehicle in front turns off so the cruise control no longer has a vehicle to fol- low.

Termination of automatic braking at a standstill In the following situations, queue assistance stops automatic braking at a standstill:

the driver opens the door

the driver takes off his seatbelt.

This means that the brakes are released and the car will start to roll - the driver must therefore intervene and brake the car himself in order to maintain its position.

IMPORTANT

Queue Assist can keep the car stationary for a maximum of 4 minutes - then the brakes release.

The driver's attention is drawn to this over several stages, with increasing intensity:

1. Acoustic alarm (pinging) and text mes- sage.

2. A warning lamp in the windscreen also starts to flash.

3. "Stabbing" braking occurs.

For more information on symbols, messages and their meaning, see the section Symbols and messages in the display (p. 212).

Queue assistance releases the foot brake and is set to standby mode in these situations as well:

the driver puts his/her foot on the brake pedal

the gear selector is moved to P, N or R posi- tion

the driver sets the cruise control in standby mode

the parking brake is applied.

Related information Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 201)

Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 203)

Cruise control* (p. 192)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.210

Adaptive cruise control* - switch cruise control functionality

Changing from ACC to CC A symbol for active cruise control is shown in the combined instrument panel:

CC

Cruise Control

ACC

Adaptive Cruise Control

Cruise control Adaptive cruise control

With one press of the button the adaptive ele- ment (spacing system) in the adaptive cruise control (p. 201) is deactivated, at which point the car only follows the set/stored speed.

Hold down the steering wheel button - the combined instrument panel's symbol

changes from to .

> This activates Cruise Control CC.

WARNING The car no longer brakes automatically after switching from ACC to CC - it merely follows the set speed.

Changing back from CC to ACC Switch off the cruise control (CC) with 1-2

presses on the button. The next time the sys- tem is switched on it is the adaptive cruise con- trol (ACC) that is activated.

Related information Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 201)

Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 203)

Adaptive cruise control* - temporary deacti- vation, and standby mode (p. 206)

Cruise control* (p. 192)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 211

Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing and action

If the combined instrument panel shows the mes- sage Radar blocked See manual then it

means that the adaptive cruise control's radar sensor (p. 214) cannot detect other vehicles in front of the car.

This message indicates that neither of the func- tions for Distance Alert (p. 197) or Collision Warning with Auto Brake (p. 227) are working.

The following table presents examples of possi- ble causes for a message being shown along with the appropriate action:

Cause Action

The radar surface in the grille is dirty or covered with ice or snow. Clean the radar surface in the grille from dirt, ice and snow.

Heavy rain or snow blocking the radar signals. No action. Sometimes the radar does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.

Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar signals.

No action. Sometimes the radar does not work on a very wet or snowy road sur- face.

The radar surface has been cleaned but the message remains. Wait. It could take several minutes for the radar to sense that it is no longer blocked.

Related information Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 201)

Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 203)

Cruise control* (p. 192)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.212

Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and messages Sometimes the adaptive cruise control may dis- play a symbol and/or text message. Here are

some examples - follow the recommendation given if appropriate:

SymbolA Message Specification

The symbol is WHITE Adaptive cruise control is set to standby mode (p. 206).

The symbol is GREEN The car maintains the stored speed.

Standard cruise control is selected manually.

Set ESC to Normal to enable Cruise

The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated until ESC has been set in Normal mode - Stability system (p. 184).

Adaptive cruise control can- celled

The adaptive cruise control has been deactivated - the driver has to regulate the speed himself.

Adaptive cruise control unavailable

The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated.

This could be due to:

brake temperature is high

the radar sensor is blocked by e.g. wet snow or rain.

For more information about fault tracing, see section Fault tracing and action (p. 211)

Radar blocked See manual The adaptive cruise control is temporarily disengaged.

The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.

The driver can then choose to switch to normal Cruise control (p. 192) (CC) - a text message provides infor- mation on appropriate alternatives.

Read more about radar sensor limitations (p. 214).

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 213

SymbolA Message Specification

Adaptive cruise control Serv- ice required

The adaptive cruise control is disengaged.

Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Press brake to hold vehicle + acoustic alarm + warning light in windscreen + "pulling" brakesB

The car is at a standstill and the adaptive cruise control will release the foot brake, which is why the car may start rolling soon.

The driver must brake himself/herself. The message remains and the alarm sounds until the driver depresses the brake pedal or uses the accelerator pedal.

Below 30 km/h Lead vehicle requiredB

Shown in the event of attempts to activate the adaptive cruise control at speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph) without a vehicle in front within the activation distance.

A The symbols are schematic. B Only with Queue Assist.

Related information Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 201)

Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 203)

Cruise control* (p. 192)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.214

Radar sensor The function of the radar sensor is to detect cars or larger vehicles in the same direction, in the same lane.

The radar sensor is used by the following func- tions:

Distance Warning*

Adaptive cruise control*

Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Pedestrian Detection*

IMPORTANT

In the event of visible damage to the car's grille, or if you suspect that the radar sensor may be damaged:

Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

The function may completely or partially dis- appear - or malfunction - if the grille, the radar sensor or its bracket is damaged or has loosened.

Modification of the radar sensor could result in it being illegal to use.

Related information Radar sensor - limitations (p. 214)

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 201)

Collision warning system* (p. 227)

Distance Warning* (p. 197)

Radar sensor - limitations A radar sensor (p. 214) has certain limitations - due to its limited field of vision for example.

The capacity of the adaptive cruise control to detect a vehicle in front is significantly reduced if:

the speed of vehicles in front is significantly different from your own speed

its radar sensor becomes blocked - e.g. in heavy rain or slush, or if other objects have collected in front of the radar sensor.

NOTE

Keep the surface in front of the radar sensor clean.

Field of vision The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In some situations another vehicle is not detected, or the detection is made later than expected.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 215

ACC field of vision.

Sometimes the radar sensor is late at detect- ing vehicles at close distances - e.g. a vehicle that drives in between the car and vehicles in front.

Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or vehi- cles not driving in the centre of the lane can remain undetected.

In bends the radar sensor may detect the wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle from view.

WARNING The driver must always be observant with regard to the traffic conditions and intervene when the adaptive cruise control is not main- taining a suitable speed or suitable distance.

The adaptive cruise control cannot handle all traffic, weather and road conditions.

Read all the sections about the adaptive cruise control in the owner's manual in order to learn about its limitations, of which the driver should be aware before it is used.

The driver always bears responsibility for maintaining the correct distance and speed, even when the adaptive cruise control is being used.

WARNING Accessories or other objects such as auxiliary lamps must not be fitted in front of the grille.

WARNING Adaptive cruise control is not a collision avoid- ance system. The driver must intervene if the system does not detect a vehicle in front.

The adaptive cruise control does not brake for humans or animals, and not for small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles. Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles and objects.

Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at junc- tions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on slip roads.

Related information Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 201)

Collision warning system* (p. 227)

Distance Warning* (p. 197)

DRIVER SUPPORT

216

Type approval - radar system Type approval for the car's radar units can be seen in the following table.

Market ACCA BLISB Symbol Type approval

Brazil

Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio.

Modelo: L2C0038TR

1071-10-3451

EAN: 07897843800248

Modelo: L2C0055TR

1500-15-8065

EAN: 07897843840978

Europe

Hereby, Delphi Automotive PLC, declares that this ESR is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 2014/53/EU (RED). The original delegation of conformity can be accessed at the following link www.delphi.com/automotive- homologation

Frequency Band: 76GHz 77GHz

Maximum Output Power: 55dBm EIRP

The Declaration of Conformity may be consulted at Delphi Electronics & Safety / 2151 E. Lincoln Road / Kokomo, Indiana 46902 USA.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

217

Market ACCA BLISB Symbol Type approval

The United Arab Emi- rates

TRA

REGISTERED No: 0018923/09

DEALER No: DA37380/15

TRA

REGISTERED No: ER37357/15

DEALER No: DA37380/15

Indonesia 14785/POSTEL/2010 1982

38806/SDPPI/2015 4927

Jordan

Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2009/87

Equipment type: Low Power Device (LPD)

Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2015/3

Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD)

Korea

Certification No.

DPH-L2C0038TR

Certification No.

MSIP-CMI-DPH-L2C0055TR

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

218

Market ACCA BLISB Symbol Type approval

Morocco

AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC

Numero d'agrement : MR 4838 ANRT 2009

Date d'agrement : 22/05/2009

AGREE PAR LANRT MAROC

NUMRO DAGRMENT: MR 9929 ANRT 2014

DATE DAGRMENT: 26/12/2014

Singapore Complies with IDA Standards DA105753

South Africa

TA-2009/163

APPROVED

TA-2014/2390

APPROVED

Taiwan

CCAB09LP4590T3

CCAB15LP0680T0

A ACC = Adaptive Cruise Control B BLIS = Blind Spot Information

DRIVER SUPPORT

219

Type approval for radio equipment

Market Symbol Type approval

Europe

Hereby, Volvo Cars declares that all radio equipments are in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 2014/53/EU. All Declarations of Conformity can be found on support.volvocars.com

Related information Radar sensor (p. 214)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.220

City Safety City Safety is a function for helping the driver to avoid a collision when driving in queues, amongst other things, when changes in the traf- fic ahead, combined with a lapse in attention, could lead to an incident.

The City Safety function is active at speeds below 50 km/h (30 mph) and it helps the driver by automatically braking the car in the event of imminent risk of collision with vehicles in front, should the driver not react in time by braking and/or steering away.

City Safety is activated in situations where the driver should have started braking earlier, which is why it cannot help the driver in every situation.

City Safety is designed to be activated as late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary inter- vention.

City Safety must not be used as an excuse for the driver to change his/her driving style. If the driver solely relies on City Safety to do the braking, there might be a risk of a collision sooner or later.

The driver or passengers normally only notice City Safety if a situation arises where the car is extremely close to being in a collision.

If the car is also equipped with Collision Warning with Auto Brake* (p. 227) these two systems complement each other.

IMPORTANT

Maintenance and replacement of City Safety components must only be per- formed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

WARNING

City Safety does not engage in all driving situations or traffic, weather or road condi- tions.

City Safety does not react to vehicles driv- ing in a different direction from the car, to small vehicles and motorcycles or to people and animals.

City Safety can prevent collision at a speed difference of less than 15 km/h (9 mph) - at a higher speed difference, it is only possible to reduce collision speed. In order to obtain full brake function, the driver must depress the brake pedal.

Never wait for City Safety to engage. The driver always bears responsibility for maintain- ing the proper distance and speed.

Related information City Safety - limitations (p. 222)

City Safety - function (p. 221)

City Safety - operation (p. 221)

City Safety - laser sensor (p. 224)

City Safety - symbols and messages (p. 226)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

221

City Safety - function City Safety detects the traffic in front of the car with a laser sensor (p. 224) fitted in the top edge of the windscreen. If there is an imminent risk of collision, City Safety will automatically brake the car, which may be experienced as heavy braking.

Laser sensor transmitter and receiver window16.

If the speed difference is 4-15 km/h (3-9 mph) in relation to the vehicle in front then City Safety can completely avoid a collision.

City Safety activates a short, sharp braking and stops the car in normal circumstances, just behind the vehicle in front. For most drivers this is well outside normal driving style and may be experienced as being uncomfortable.

If the difference in speed between the vehicles is greater than 15 km/h (9 mph) then City Safety may not avoid the collision on its own - to obtain full brake force, the driver must depress the brake pedal and this could then make it possible to avoid a collision, even at speed differences above 15 km/h (9 mph).

When the function is activated and brakes, the combined instrument panel shows a message (p. 226) to the effect that the function is/has been active.

NOTE

When City Safety brakes, the brake lights come on.

Related information City Safety (p. 220)

City Safety - operation (p. 221)

City Safety - limitations (p. 222)

City Safety - operation City Safety is a function for helping the driver to avoid a collision when driving in queues, amongst other things, when changes in the traf- fic ahead, combined with a lapse in attention, could lead to an incident.

On and Off

NOTE

The City Safety function is activated auto- matically when the engine is started.

In certain situations, it may advisable to disable City Safety, e.g. where leafy branches could sweep over the bonnet and/or windscreen.

City Safety handled in the menu system MY CAR (p. 113) and after starting the engine the function can be deactivated as follows:

Search in MY CAR for Driver support system and select the Off option at City Safety.

However, the function will be enabled the next time the engine is started, regardless of whether the system was enabled or disabled when the engine was switched off.

16 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

222

WARNING The laser sensor (p. 224) emits laser light even when City Safety is disabled manually.

To enable City Safety again:

Follow the same procedure as for disabling, but select the On option.

Related information City Safety (p. 220)

City Safety - limitations (p. 222)

City Safety - symbols and messages (p. 226)

City Safety - limitations The sensor in City Safety is designed to detect cars and other large vehicles in front of the car irrespective of whether it is day or night.

However, the function does have some limita- tions.

The sensor's limitations mean that City Safety has poorer functionality - or none at all - in e.g. heavy snowfall or rain, dense fog, dust storms or white-out situations. Misting, dirt, ice or snow on the windscreen may also disrupt the function.

Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for pro- jecting load, or accessories such as auxiliary lamps and bull bars that are higher than the bon- net limit the function.

The laser light from the sensor in City Safety measures how the light is reflected. The sensor cannot detect objects with low reflection capacity. The rear sections of the vehicle generally reflect the light sufficiently thanks to the number plate and rear light reflectors.

On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is extended, which may reduce the capacity of City Safety to avoid a collision. In such situations the ABS17 and ESC18 systems will provide best possible braking force with maintained stability.

When your own car is reversing, City Safety is temporarily deactivated.

City Safety is not activated at low speeds - below 4 km/h (3 mph), which is why the system does not intervene in situations where a vehicle in front is being approached very slowly, e.g. when parking.

Driver commands are always prioritised, which is why City Safety does not intervene in situations where the driver is steering or accelerating in a clear manner, even if a collision is unavoidable.

When City Safety has prevented a collision with a stationary object the car remains stationary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the car is braked for a vehicle in front that is moving, then speed is reduced to the same speed as that maintained by the vehicle in front.

On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops when City Safety has stopped the car, unless the driver manages to depress the clutch pedal beforehand.

17 (Anti-lock Braking System) - Anti-lock braking system. 18 (Electronic Stability Control) - Stability system.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

223

NOTE

Keep the windscreen surface in front of the laser sensor (p. 224) free from ice, snow and dirt. For an illustration of sen- sor location, see City Safety - function (p. 221).

Do not affix or mount anything on the windscreen in front of the laser sensor

Remove ice and snow from the bonnet - snow and ice must not exceed a height of 5 cm.

Fault tracing and action If the message (p. 226) Windscreen sensors blocked See manual is shown in the combined instrument panel it indicates that the laser sensor is blocked and cannot detect vehicles in front of the car. This means that City Safety is not operational.

The Windscreen sensors blocked See manual message is not shown for all situations in which the laser sensor is blocked. The driver must therefore be diligent about keeping the windscreen and area in front of the laser sensor clean.

The following table presents possible causes for the message being shown, along with sugges- tions for appropriate action.

Cause Action

The windscreen surface in front of the laser sen- sor is dirty or covered with ice or snow.

Clean the wind- screen surface in front of the sensor from dirt, ice and snow.

The laser sensor field of vision is blocked.

Remove the block- ing object.

IMPORTANT

If there are cracks, scratches or stone chips in the windscreen in front of either of the laser sensor's "windows" and they cover a surface of approx. 0.5 x 3.0 mm (or larger), then a workshop must be contacted for replacement of the windscreen - an authorised Volvo work- shop is recommended. For an illustration of sensor location, see City Safety - function (p. 221).

Failure to take action may result in reduced performance for City Safety.

To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or reduced operation for City Safety, the fol- lowing also applies:

Volvo recommends that you do not repair cracks, scratches or stone chips in the area in front of the laser sensor - instead, the whole windscreen should be replaced.

Before replacing a windscreen, contact an authorised Volvo workshop to verify that the correct windscreen is ordered and fitted.

The same type or Volvo-approved wind- screen wipers must be fitted during replacement.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

224

Related information City Safety (p. 220)

City Safety - function (p. 221)

City Safety - operation (p. 221)

City Safety - laser sensor The City Safety function includes a sensor which transmits laser light. Contact a qualified workshop in the event of a fault or if the laser sensor needs servicing - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. It is absolutely essential to follow the prescribed instructions when handling the laser sensor.

The following two labels relate to the laser sen- sor:

The upper label in the figure describes the laser beam's classification:

Laser radiation - Do not look into the laser beam with optical instruments - Class 1M laser product.

The lower label in the figure describes the laser beam's physical data:

IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies with FDA (U.S. Food Administration) stand- ards for laser product design with the excep- tion of deviations in accordance with "Laser Notice No. 50" from 26 July 2001.

Radiation data for the laser sensor The following table specifies the laser sensor's physical data.

Maximum pulse energy 2.64 J

Maximum average output 45 mW

Pulse duration 33 ns

Divergence (horizontal x vertical) 28 12

DRIVER SUPPORT

225

WARNING If any of these instructions are not followed then there is a risk of eye injury!

Never look into the laser sensor (which emits spreading invisible laser radiation) at a distance of 100 mm or closer with magnifying optics such as a magnifying glass, microscope, lens or similar optical instruments.

Testing, repair, removal, adjustment and/or replacement of the laser sensor's spare parts must only be carried out by a qualified workshop - we recommend an authorised Volvo workshop.

To avoid exposure to harmful radiation, do not carry out any readjustments or main- tenance other than those specified here.

The repairer must follow specially drawn up workshop information for the laser sensor.

Do not remove the laser sensor (this includes removing the lenses). A removed laser sensor fulfils laser class 3B as per standard IEC 60825-1. Laser class 3B is not eye-safe and therefore entails a risk of injury.

The laser sensor's connector must be unplugged before removal from the wind- screen.

The laser sensor must be fitted onto the windscreen before the sensor's connec- tor is plugged in.

The laser sensor transmits a laser light when the remote control key is in key position II (p. 81) even if the engine is switched off.

Related information City Safety (p. 220)

DRIVER SUPPORT

226

City Safety - symbols and messages In conjunction with automatic braking by the City Safety (p. 220) system, one or more symbols

(p. 226) may illuminate in the combined instru- ment panel and a text message may be shown. A text message can be acknowledged by briefly

pressing the OK button on the direction indica- tor stalk.

SymbolA Message Meaning/Action

Auto braking by City Safety City Safety is braking or has automatically braked.

Windscreen sensors blocked See manual The laser sensor is temporarily non-operational because something is blocking it.

Remove the object blocking the sensor and/or clean the windscreen in front of the sensor.

Read about the laser sensor's(p. 222) limitations.

City Safety Service required City Safety is not operational.

Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

A The symbols are schematic.

Related information City Safety (p. 220)

City Safety - function (p. 221)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 227

Collision warning system*

"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to assist the driver when there is a risk of colliding with a pedestrian, cyclist or vehicle in front that are sta- tionary or moving in the same direction.

"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is activated in situa- tions where the driver should have started brak- ing earlier, which is why it cannot help the driver in every situation.

"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is designed to be acti- vated as late as possible in order to avoid unnec- essary intervention.

"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" can prevent a collision or reduce collision speed.

"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" must not be used as an excuse for the driver to change his/her driving style. If the driver solely relies on Collision Warn- ing with Auto Brake to do the braking, there might be a risk of a collision sooner or later.

Two system levels Depending on how the car is equipped, the "Col- lision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and

Pedestrian Detection" function may appear in two variants:

Level 1 The driver is merely warned19 of occurring obsta- cles by means of visual and acoustic signals - no automatic braking intervenes, the driver must himself brake.

Level 2 The driver is warned of occurring obstacles by means of visual and acoustic signals - the car is braked automatically if the driver himself does not act within a reasonable time.

IMPORTANT

Maintenance of the internal components of the "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" must only be performed at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information Collision warning system* - function (p. 228)

Collision warning system* - detection of pedestrians (p. 230)

Collision warning system* - detection of cyclists (p. 229)

Collision warning system* - operation (p. 231)

Collision warning system* - limitations (p. 233)

Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations (p. 234)

Collision warning system* - symbols and messages (p. 235)

19 No warning for cyclists with "Level 1".

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.228

Collision warning system* - function

Function overview20.

Audio-visual warning signal in the event of a collision risk.

Radar sensor21

Camera sensor

Collision Warning with Auto Brake executes three steps in the following order:

1. Collision warning

2. Brake support21

3. Auto Brake21

The collision warning system and City Safety (p. 220) complement each other.

1 - Collision warning The driver is first warned of a potentially immi- nent collision.

The collision warning system can detect pedes- trians, cyclists or vehicles that are stationary or moving in the same direction as your car and are located in front of you.

If there is a risk of collision with a pedestrian, cyclist or a vehicle then the driver's attention is attracted with a flashing red warning signal (1) and an acoustic signal.

2 - Brake support If the risk of collision has increased further after the collision warning then the brake support is activated.

This means that the brake system is prepared for rapid braking by applying the brakes lightly, which may feel like a slight jolt.

If the brake pedal is depressed sufficiently quickly then full brake function is implemented.

Brake support also reinforces the driver's braking if the system considers that the braking is not sufficient to avoid a collision.

3 - Auto Brake The automatic brake function is activated last.

If in this situation the driver has not yet started to take evasive action and the risk of collision is imminent then the automatic braking function is deployed - this takes place irrespective of whether or not the driver brakes. Braking then takes place with full brake force in order to reduce collision speed, or with limited brake force if it is sufficient to avoid a collision. For cyclists, the warning and full brake intervention may come very late or simultaneously.

20 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. 21 With system Level 2 only.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 229

WARNING The collision warning system does not engage in all driving situations or traffic, weather or road conditions. The collision warning system does not react to vehicles or cyclists driving in another direction to the car or to animals.

Warning only activated in the event of a high risk for collision. This section "Function" and the section "Limitations" inform about limita- tions that the driver must be aware of before using the Collision Warning system with Auto Brake.

Warnings and brake interventions for pedes- trians and cyclists are deactivated at vehicle speeds above 80 km/h (50 mph).

Warnings and brake interventions for pedes- trians and cyclists do not work in darkness and tunnels - not even when streetlights are lit.

The auto-brake function can prevent a colli- sion or reduce collision speed. To ensure full brake performance, the driver should always depress the brake pedal - even when the car auto-brakes.

Never wait for a collision warning. The driver is always responsible that the correct distance and speed are maintained - even when the collision warning system with auto-brake is used.

Related information Collision warning system* (p. 227)

Collision warning system* - detection of cyclists

The function only "sees" cyclists from behind, who are travelling in the same direction.

Optimal example of what the system interprets as a cyclist - with clear body and bicycle contours, directly from behind and in the car's centre line.

Optimal performance of the system requires that the system function that detects a cyclist receives as unambiguous information as possible about the body and bicycle contours - this implies the opportunity to identify the bicycle, head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and lower body combined with a normal human pattern of movement.

If large parts of the cyclist's body or bicycle are not visible to the function's camera then the sys- tem cannot detect a cyclist.

For the function to be able to detect a cyclist, he/she must be an adult and riding an "adult bicycle".

The function can only detect cyclists directly from behind and who are travelling in the same direction - not at an angle from behind, not from the side.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.230

The bicycle must be equipped with a highly visible and approved22 rearward-facing red reflector, fitted at least 70 cm above the roadway.

Cyclists travelling on the left or right-hand edge of the car's imagined/extended side lines may be detected late or not at all.

The function's capacity to detect cyclists at dusk and dawn is limited - just like the human eye.

The function's capacity to detect cyclists is deactivated when driving in darkness and tunnels - even when streetlights are lit.

For optimum bicycle detection, the City Safety function must be activated, see City Safety (p. 220).

WARNING Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Cyclist Detection is a means of assistance.

The function cannot detect:

all cyclists in all situations and does not see partially obscured cyclists, for exam- ple.

cyclists in clothing that obscures the con- tours of the body or who are approaching from the side.

bicycles that have no rearward-facing red reflector.

bicycles loaded with large objects.

The driver is always responsible that the vehi- cle is driven properly and with a safety dis- tance adapted to the speed.

Related information Collision warning system* (p. 227)

Collision warning system* - detection of pedestrians

Optimal examples of what the system regards as pedes- trians with clear body contours.

Optimal performance of the system requires that the system function that detects pedestrians receives as unambiguous information as possible about the contours of the body - this implies the opportunity to identify the head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and lower body combined with a nor- mal human pattern of movement.

If large parts of the body are not visible to the function's camera then the system cannot detect a pedestrian.

22 The reflector must fulfil the recommendations and conditions of the traffic authority in the market in question.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 231

In order for a pedestrian to be detected he/she must appear full-length and have a height of at least 80 cm.

The camera sensor's ability to see pedes- trians at dusk and dawn is limited - just like the human eye.

The camera sensor's capacity to detect pedestrians is deactivated when driving in darkness and tunnels - even when street- lights are lit.

WARNING "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is a means of assistance. The function cannot detect all pedestrians in all situations and does not see, for example:

partially obscured pedestrians, people in clothing that hides their body contour or pedestrians shorter than 80 cm.

pedestrians who are carrying larger objects.

The driver is always responsible that the vehi- cle is driven properly and with a safety dis- tance adapted to the speed.

Related information Collision warning system* (p. 227)

Collision warning system* - operation

Settings for the collision warning system are made from MY CAR via the centre console screen and menu system, see MY CAR (p. 113).

Warning signals On and Off

1. Acoustic and visual warning signal in the event of a collision risk23.

It is possible to select whether the collision warn- ing system's acoustic and visual warning signals should be switched on or off.

When starting the engine, the setting that was selected when the engine was switched off is obtained automatically.

NOTE

The Brake Support and Auto Brake functions are always activated - they cannot be deacti- vated.

Settings for the collision warning system are made via the centre console's screen and the menu system MY CAR, see (p. 113).

Light and acoustic signals When the collision warning system's light and acoustic warnings are activated, the warning lamp (no. [1] in previous illustration) is tested each time the engine is started by briefly illuminating the warning lamp's separate points of light.

After starting the engine, both light and acoustic signals are switched off:

Search for Collision warning in Driver support system in the menu system MY CAR (p. 113) - and there select to uncheck the function.

Audible signal After starting the engine the warning sound can be activated/deactivated separately:

Search for Warning sound in Collision warning in the menu system MY CAR (p. 113) - and there select On or Off.

Following which, the collision warning system is only indicated with a light signal.

23 The illustration is schematic - car model and details may differ.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.232

Set warning distance The warning distance regulates the distance at which the visual and acoustic warnings are deployed.

Search for Warning distance in Collision warning in the menu system MY CAR (p. 113) - and there select Long, Normal or Short.

The warning distance determines the system's sensitivity. Warning distance Long provides an earlier warning. First test with Long and if this setting produces too many warnings, which could be perceived as irritating in certain situations, then change to warning distance Normal.

Only use warning distance Short in exceptional cases, e.g. for dynamic driving.

NOTE

When the adaptive cruise control is in use the warning lamp and warning sound will be used by the cruise control even if the collision warning system is switched off.

The collision warning system warns the driver in the event of a risk of a collision, but the function cannot shorten driver reaction time.

In order for the collision warning system to be effective, always drive with Distance Alert (p. 197) set at time interval 45.

NOTE

Even if the warning distance has been set to Long warnings could be perceived as being late in certain situations, e.g. when there are large differences in speed or if vehicles in front brake heavily.

WARNING No automatic system can guarantee 100 % correct function in all situations. Therefore, never test Collision Warning with Auto Brake by driving at people or vehicles - this may cause severe damage and injury and risk lives.

Checking settings The settings required can be controlled on the centre console display screen.

Search in the menu system MY CAR (p. 113) for Collision warning in Driver support system.

Maintenance

Camera and radar sensor24.

For the sensors to work correctly, they must be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo.

NOTE

Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will reduce their function and may prevent meas- urement.

Related information Collision warning system* (p. 227)

24 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 233

Collision warning system* - limitations The function has certain limitations - for example, it is not active until 4 km/h (3 mph).

The collision warning system's visual warning sig- nal may be difficult to notice in the event of strong sunlight, reflections, when sunglasses are being worn or if the driver is not looking straight ahead. The warning sound should therefore always be activated.

On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is extended, which may reduce the capacity to avoid a collision. In such situations the ABS and ESC (p. 184) systems will provide best possible brak- ing force with maintained stability.

NOTE

The visual warning signal can be temporarily disengaged in the event of high passenger compartment temperature caused by strong sunlight for example. If this occurs then the warning sound is activated even if it is deacti- vated in the menu system.

Warnings may not appear if the distance to the vehicle in front is small or if steer- ing wheel and pedal movements are large, e.g. a very active driving style.

WARNING Warnings and brake interventions could be implemented late or not at all if the traffic sit- uation or external influences mean that the radar or camera sensor cannot detect a pedestrian, a vehicle or a cyclist in front cor- rectly.

The sensor system has a limited range for pedestrians and cyclists25 - the system can give effective warnings and brake interven- tions for them at vehicle speeds up to 50 km/h (30 mph). For stationary or slow- moving vehicles, warnings and brake interven- tions are effective at vehicle speeds up to 70 km/h (43 mph).

Warnings for stationary or slow-moving vehi- cles could be disengaged due to darkness or poor visibility.

Warnings and brake interventions for pedes- trians and cyclists are deactivated at vehicle speeds exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).

The collision warning system uses the same radar sensors as the adaptive cruise control (p. 201).

If warnings are perceived as being too frequent or disturbing then the warning distance can be reduced. This then leads to the system providing a warning at a later stage, which reduces the

total number of warnings; see Collision warning system - operation (p. 231).

Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily deactivated with reverse gear engaged.

Collision Warning with Auto Brake is not acti- vated at low speeds - below 4 km/h (3 mph), which is why the system does not intervene in sit- uations where the car is approaching a vehicle in front very slowly, e.g. when parking.

In situations where the driver demonstrates active, aware driving behaviour, a collision warn- ing may be postponed slightly in order to keep unnecessary warnings to a minimum.

When Auto Brake has prevented a collision with a stationary object the car remains stationary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the car is braked for a vehicle in front that is moving, then speed is reduced to the same speed as that maintained by the vehicle in front.

On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops when Auto Brake has stopped the car, unless the driver manages to depress the clutch pedal beforehand.

Related information Collision warning system* (p. 227)

25 For cyclists, the warning and full brake intervention may come very late or simultaneously.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.234

Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations The function uses the car's camera sensor, which has certain limitations.

The cars camera sensor is also used - as well as by Collision Warning with Auto Brake - by the functions:

Active main beam (p. 92)

Road sign information (p. 242)

Driver Alert Control - DAC (p. 246)

Lane Keeping Aid (p. 249).

NOTE

Keep the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist and dirt.

Do not stick or attach anything to the wind- screen in front of the camera sensor as this may reduce effectiveness or cause one or more of the systems dependent on the cam- era to stop working.

The camera sensors have limitations similar to the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in darkness, heavy snowfall or rain and in thick fog for exam- ple. Under such conditions the functions of cam- era-dependent systems could be significantly reduced or temporarily disengaged.

Strong oncoming light, reflections in the carriage- way, snow or ice on the road surface, dirty road surfaces or unclear lane markings could also sig- nificantly reduce camera sensor function when it is used to scan the carriageway and detect pedestrians and other vehicles.

The field of vision of the camera sensor is limited, which is why pedestrians, cyclists and vehicles cannot be detected in some situations, or they are detected later than anticipated.

During very high temperatures the camera is temporarily switched off for about 15 minutes after the engine is started in order to protect camera functionality.

Fault tracing and action If the display shows the message Windscreen sensors blocked See manual then this means that the camera sensor is blocked and cannot detect pedestrians, cyclists, vehicles or road markings in front of the car.

At the same time, this means that - besides Colli- sion Warning with Auto Brake - the following functions will not have full functionality either:

Active main beam

Driver Alert Control

Lane Keeping Aid

Road sign information

The following table presents possible causes for a message being shown along with the appropri- ate action.

Cause Action

The windscreen sur- face in front of the camera is dirty or cov- ered with ice or snow.

Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera from dirt, ice and snow.

Thick fog, heavy rain or snow means that the camera does not work sufficiently well.

No action. At times the camera does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.

The windscreen sur- face in front of the camera has been cleaned but the mes- sage remains.

Wait. It may take sev- eral minutes for the camera to measure the visibility.

Dirt has appeared between the inside of the windscreen and the camera.

Visit a workshop to have the windscreen inside the camera cover cleaned - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.

Related information Collision warning system* (p. 227)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 235

Collision warning system* - symbols and messages

SymbolA Message Specification

Collision warning system OFF

Collision warning system switched off.

Shown when the engine is started.

The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.

Collision warning system Unavailable

The collision warning system cannot be activated.

Shown when the driver attempts to activate the function.

The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.

Auto Braking was acti- vated

Auto Brake has been active.

The message clears after one press of the OK button.

Windscreen sensors blocked See manual

Camera sensor (p. 234) is temporarily disengaged.

Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.

Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.

Radar blocked See man- ual

Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily disengaged.

Radar sensor (p. 214) is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.

Collision warning Service required

Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged.

Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

A Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.236

Related information Collision warning system* (p. 227)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 237

BLIS BLIS (Blind Spot Information System) is a func- tion designed for providing support for the driver when driving in dense traffic on roads with sev- eral lanes in the same direction.

BLIS is a driver's aid intended to provide a warn- ing about:

vehicles in the car's blind spot

quickly approaching vehicles in the left and right lanes closest to the car.

WARNING BLIS is a supplementary aid and does not work in all situations.

BLIS is no substitute for a safe driving style and the use of rearview and door mirrors.

BLIS can never replace the driver's responsi- bility and attention - it is always the driver's responsibility to change lanes in a safe man- ner.

Overview

Position of the BLIS lamp26.

Indicator lamp

BLIS symbol

NOTE

The lamp illuminates on the side of the car where the system has detected the vehicle. If the car is overtaken on both sides at the same time then both lamps illuminate.

Maintenance The sensors for the BLIS functions are located inside the rear wing/bumper on each corner of the car.

Keep this surface clean - also on the left-hand side.

To ensure optimal functionality, the areas in front of the sensors must be kept clean.

Related information BLIS - operation (p. 238)

BLIS and CTA - symbols and messages (p. 241)

CTA* (p. 239)

26 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

238

BLIS - operation BLIS (Blind Spot Information System) is a func- tion designed for providing support for the driver when driving in dense traffic on roads with sev- eral lanes in the same direction.

Activate/deactivate BLIS BLIS is activated when the engine is started. This is confirmed by the indicator lamps in the door panels flashing once.

Button for activating/deactivating.

The BLIS function can be deactivated/activated by pressing the BLIS button on the centre con- sole.

Some combinations of the selected equipment leave no vacant space for a button in the centre

console - in which case the function is handled by the car's menu system MY CAR27:

Select On or Off at Settings Car

settings BLIS.

When BLIS is deactivated/activated the lamp in the button goes out/illuminates and the com- bined instrument panel confirms the change with a text message. The door panel indicator lamps flash once upon activation.

To extinguish the message:

Press the left stalk switch OK button.

or

Wait approx. 5 seconds the message extin- guishes.

When BLIS operates

Principle for BLIS: 1. Zone in blind spot. 2. Zone for quickly approaching vehicle.

The BLIS function is active at speeds above 10 km/h (6 mph).

The system is designed to react when:

the vehicle is overtaken by other vehicles

another vehicle is quickly approaching the vehicle.

When BLIS detects a vehicle in zone 1 or a quickly approaching vehicle in zone 2, the door panel BLIS lamp illuminates with a constant glow. If the driver activates the direction indicator on the same side as the warning in this situation then the BLIS lamp will change from a constant glow to flashing with a more intense light.

27 For information on the menu system - MY CAR (p. 113).

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 239

WARNING BLIS does not work in sharp bends.

BLIS does not work when the car is being reversed.

Limitations Dirt, ice and snow covering sensors can

reduce functionality and make it impossible to provide warnings. BLIS cannot detect haz- ards if it is covered.

Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in the area of the sensors.

BLIS is deactivated when a trailer is con- nected to the car's electrical system.

IMPORTANT

Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' com- ponents or repainting the bumpers must only be performed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information BLIS (p. 237)

BLIS and CTA - symbols and messages (p. 241)

CTA* The BLIS function CTA (Cross Traffic Alert) is a driver aid intended to warn about crossing traffic when the car is reversing. CTA is a supplement to BLIS (p. 237).

Activate/deactivate CTA CTA is activated when the engine is started. This is confirmed by the indicator lamps in the door panels flashing once.

On/Off for parking assistance and CTA sensors.

In cars equipped with Parking assistance (p. 254), the CTA function can be deactivated/ activated separately with the parking assistance On/Off button.

In cars without a button for parking assistance, the CTA function can be operated in the menu system MY CAR (p. 113), as follows:

Search for Cross Traffic Alert under BLIS and uncheck - the CTA function is then deactivated.

However, the BLIS function remains activated after the CTA has been deactivated.

WARNING CTA is a supplementary aid and does not work in all situations.

CTA is no substitute for a safe driving style and the use of rearview and door mirrors.

CTA can never replace the driver's responsi- bility and attention - it is always the driver's responsibility to reverse in a safe manner.

When CTA operates

Principle for CTA.

CTA supplements the BLIS function by being able to see crossing traffic from the side during

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

240

reversing, such as when reversing out of a park- ing space.

CTA is primarily designed to detect vehicles. In favourable conditions, it may also be able to detect smaller objects, such as cyclists and pedestrians.

CTA is only active during reversing and is acti- vated automatically when reverse is selected at the gearbox.

If CTA detects something approaching from the side, an acoustic warning signal sounds. The signal comes from either the left or the right speaker depending on which direction the approaching object is coming from.

CTA also warns by illuminating the BLIS lamps.

An additional warning is provided in the form of an illuminated icon in the display screen's PAS graphics (p. 254).

Limitations CTA does not perform optimally in all situations, but has a certain limitation - for example, the CTA sensors cannot "see" through other parked vehi- cles or obstructing objects.

Here are some examples of when CTA's "field of vision" may be limited from the beginning and approaching vehicles cannot therefore be detected until they are very close:

The car is parked deep inside a parking slot.

Blind CTA sector.

Sector where CTA can detect/"see".

In an angled parking slot CTA can be completely "blind" on one side.

However, when the driver is slowly reversing the car, the angle is changed in relation to the vehi-

cle/object that is blocking, at which the blind sector rapidly decreases.

Examples of further limitations:

Dirt, ice and snow covering sensors can reduce functionality and make it impossible to provide warnings. CTA cannot detect haz- ards if it is covered.

CTA is deactivated when a trailer is con- nected to the cars electrical system.

IMPORTANT

Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' com- ponents or repainting the bumpers must only be performed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Maintenance The sensors for the BLIS and CTA functions are located inside the rear wing/bumper on each corner of the car.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 241

Keep this surface clean - also on the left-hand side.

To ensure optimal functionality, the areas in front of the sensors must be kept clean.

Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in the area of the sensors.

Related information BLIS (p. 237)

BLIS and CTA - symbols and messages (p. 241)

BLIS and CTA - symbols and messages In situations where the BLIS (Blind Spot Information System) (p. 237) and CTA (p. 239) functions fail or are interrupted, the combined instrument panel may show a symbol, supple- mented by an explanatory message. Follow any recommendation given.

Message examples:

Message Specification

CTA OFF CTA has been deactivated manually. BLIS is active.

BLIS and CTA OFF Trailer attached

BLIS and CTA are temporarily disabled because a trailer is connected to the cars electri- cal system.

BLIS and CTA Service required

BLIS and CTA are not work- ing.

Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo work- shop is recommended.

A text message can be acknowledged by briefly pressing the OK button on the direction indicator stalk.

Related information BLIS (p. 237)

CTA* (p. 239)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.242

Road Sign Information* (RSI) The Road Sign Information function (RSI28) helps the driver to observe speed-related road signs and certain prohibition signs as the car passes them.

Examples of readable signs29.

RSI provides information about such things as current speed, when a motorway or road is star- ting/ending, when overtaking is prohibited or when the direction of travel is one-way.

If both a sign for motorway/road for motorised traffic and a sign showing the maximum permit- ted speed are passed, RSI decides to show the sign symbol for motorway/road for motorised traffic.

WARNING

The Road Sign Information function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.

Road Sign Information is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe man- ner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.

RSI On/Off The function for Road Sign Information is select- able - the driver can select On or Off.

Activate RSI as follows:

1. Search and locate the function in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 113).

2. Highlight Road sign information by press- ing the OK/MENU button once and go back out with EXIT.

Related information Road Sign Information (RSI)* - operation

(p. 243)

Road Sign Information* (RSI) - limitations (p. 245)

28 Road Sign Information 29 Road signs are market-dependent - illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 243

Road Sign Information (RSI)* - operation The Road Sign Information function (RSI30) reg- isters and shows road signs in different ways depending on the sign and the situation.

Example31 of detected speed information.

When RSI has recorded a road sign with an imposed speed, the combined instrument panel displays the sign as a symbol.

An additional31 sign, such as "no overtaking", may be shown together with the speed limit symbol.

End of speed limit or motorway When RSI detects an "indirect speed sign" that means end of current speed limit - e.g. at end of motorway - a symbol with the corresponding road sign is shown in the combined instrument panel.

Examples of indirect speed sign31 are:

End of all restrictions.

End of motorway.

The symbol in the combined instrument panel extinguishes after 10-30 seconds and remains extinguished until the next speed-related sign is passed.

Changed speed limit On passing a direct speed sign when the speed limit changes, a symbol with the corresponding road sign is shown in the combined instrument panel.

Example of a direct speed sign31.

The symbol in the combined instrument panel extinguishes after approx. 5 minutes and remains extinguished until the next speed-related sign is passed.

Sensus Navigation If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation, speed information is read from the navigation unit in the following cases:

On detection of signs that indirectly indicate a speed limit, such as motorway, dual car- riageway and city limit signs.

If a previously detected speed sign is assumed not to apply any longer, but no new sign has been detected.

30 Road Sign Information 31 Road signs are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show examples.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.244

Additional signs

Examples of additional signs31.

Sometimes different speed limits are signposted for the same road - an additional sign then indi- cates the circumstances under which the differ- ent speeds apply. The road section may be par- ticularly susceptible to accidents in rain and/or fog, for example.

An additional sign relating to rain is displayed only if the windscreen wipers are in use.

The speed applicable on an exit is indicated in certain markets by means of an additional sign containing an arrow.

Speed signs linked to this type of additional sign are displayed

only if the driver is using the direction indicator.

Some speeds are applicable only after e.g. a specific dis- tance or at a certain time of day. The driver's attention is drawn to the situation by means of a symbol for an addi- tional sign under the symbol

showing speed.

A symbol for additional sign in the form of an empty frame under the combined instrument panel's speed symbol31 means that RSI has detected an addi- tional sign with supplementary information for the current

speed limit.

Speed Alert On/Off The Speed Limit Warning subfunction for RSI is selectable - the driver can select On or Off.

The speed warning is given in the form of the combined instrument panel's symbol31 for maximum permitted speed temporarily flashing when the speed is exceeded by 5 km/h (5 mph) or more.

Activate Speed alert as follows:

1. Search and locate the function in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 113).

2. Highlight Speed alert by pressing the OK/ MENU button once and go back out with EXIT.

Related information Road Sign Information* (RSI) (p. 242)

Road Sign Information* (RSI) - limitations (p. 245)

MY CAR (p. 113)

31 Road signs are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show examples.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 245

Road Sign Information* (RSI) - limitations The Road Sign Information (RSI32) function may have limitations in certain situations.

The camera sensor for RSI has limitations just like the human eye. Find out more about this in the section on the camera sensor limitations (p. 234).

Signs which indirectly provide information on a prevailing speed limit, e.g. name signs for towns/ districts, are not recorded by RSI.

Examples of factors that can reduce RSI are as follows:

Faded signs

Signs positioned on bends

Rotated or damaged signs

Signs positioned high above the roadway

Fully/partially obscured or poorly positioned signs

signs completely or partly covered with frost, snow and/or dirt

digital road maps33 are out-of-date, inaccu- rate or have no speed information34.

Related information Road Sign Information* (RSI) (p. 242)

Road Sign Information (RSI)* - operation (p. 243)

Driver Alert System*

The Driver Alert System is intended to assist dri- vers whose driving ability is deteriorating or who are inadvertently leaving the lane they are driving on.

The Driver Alert System consists of different functions which can either be switched on at the same time or individually:

Driver Alert Control - DAC (p. 247).

Lane Keeping Aid (p. 251).

A switched-on function is set in standby mode and is not activated automatically until speed exceeds 65 km/h (40 mph).

The function is deactivated again when speed decreases to below 60 km/h (37 mph).

The functions use a camera which is dependent on the lane having side markings painted on each side.

WARNING Driver Alert System does not work in all situa- tions but is designed merely as a supplemen- tary aid.

The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely.

32 Road Sign Information 33 In cars equipped with Sensus Navigation. 34 Map data with speed information does not exist for all areas.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.246

Related information Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 246)

Lane assistance* (p. 249)

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* DAC is intended to attract the driver's attention when he or she starts to drive less consistently, e.g. if the driver becomes distracted or starts to fall asleep.

The objective for DAC is to detect slowly deterio- rating driving ability and it is primarily intended for major roads.

A camera detects the side markings painted on the carriageway and compares the section of the road with the driver's steering wheel movements. The driver is alerted if the vehicle does not follow the carriageway evenly.

In some cases driving ability is not affected despite driver fatigue. In which case there may not be any warning issued for the driver. For this reason it is always important to stop and take a break in the event of any signs of driver fatigue,

irrespective of whether or not DAC issues a warning.

NOTE

The function must not be used to extend a period of driving. Always plan breaks at regu- lar intervals, and make sure you are well rested.

Limitation In some cases the system may issue a warning despite driving ability not deteriorating, for exam- ple:

in strong side winds

on rutted road surfaces.

DAC is not intended for city traffic.

NOTE

The camera sensor has certain limitations, see Collision warning system* - camera sen- sor limitations (p. 234).

Related information Driver Alert System* (p. 245)

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation (p. 247)

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and messages (p. 248)

Lane assistance* (p. 249)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 247

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation Settings are made from the centre console dis- play screen and its menu system.

On/Off The Driver Alert function can be set in standby mode via the menu system MY CAR (p. 113):

Checked box - function activated.

Unchecked box - the function is deactivated.

Function Driver Alert is activated when speed exceeds 65 km/h (40 mph) and remains active as long as the speed is above 60 km/h (37 mph).

If the vehicle is being driven erratically, the driver is notified by an acoustic sig- nal plus the text message (p. 248) Driver Alert Time for a break - the

linked symbol is illuminated in the combined instrument panel at the same time. The warning is repeated after a time if driving ability does not improve.

The warning symbol can go off:

Press the left stalk switch OK button.

WARNING An alarm should be taken very seriously, as a sleepy driver is often not aware of his/her own condition.

In the event of an alarm or a feeling of tired- ness; stop the car in a safe manner as soon as possible and rest.

Studies have shown that it is equally as dan- gerous to drive while tired as it is under the influence of alcohol.

Related information Driver Alert System* (p. 245)

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 246)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.248

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and messages Driver Alert Control - DAC (p. 246) can show symbols and text messages in the combined

instrument panel or in the centre console's screen in different situations.

Here are some examples:

SymbolA Message Specification

Driver Alert Time for a break

The vehicle has been driven inconsistently - the driver is alerted by an acoustic warning signal + text.

Windscreen sensors blocked See manual

The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.

Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.

Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.

Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations (p. 234).

Driver Alert system Serv- ice required

The system is disengaged.

Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

A The symbols are schematic.

Related information Driver Alert System* (p. 245)

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation (p. 247)

Lane assistance* (p. 249)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 249

Lane assistance* Lane Keeping Aid is one of the functions in the Driver Alert System - sometimes also referred to as LKA (Lane Keeping Aid).

The function is intended for use on motorways and similar major roads in order to reduce the risk of the vehicle accidentally leaving its own lane in certain situations.

A camera reads the painted side lines of the road/lane. If the car is about to cross a side line then Lane Keeping Aid will actively steer the car back into the lane with a slight steering torque in the steering wheel.

If the car reaches or crosses a side line then Lane Keeping Aid will also alert the driver with vibration in the steering wheel.

WARNING LKA is merely a driver's aid and does not engage in all driving situations or traffic, weather or road conditions.

The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely and that applicable laws and road traffic regu- lations are followed.

Related information Lane Keeping Aid - function (p. 249)

Lane Keeping Aid - operation (p. 251)

Lane Keeping Aid - limitations (p. 251)

Lane Keeping Aid - symbols and messages (p. 253)

Driver Alert System* (p. 245)

Lane Keeping Aid - function Certain settings can be made for the Lane Keep- ing Aid (Lane Keeping Aid) function.

Off & On Lane Keeping Aid is active within the speed range 65-200 km/h (40-125 mph) on roads with clearly visible side lines. The function is temporar- ily deactivated on narrow roads with less than 2.6 metres between the lane side lines.

Press the centre console's button to activate or deactivate the function. The button's lamp illumi- nates when the function is switched on.

Some combinations of the selected equipment leave no vacant space for an On/Off button in the centre console - in which case, the function is instead operated in the car's menu system MY CAR (p. 113). Here, proceed as follows:

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.250

Search for Lane Keeping Aid and then select On or Off.

In addition, the following selections can be made in MY CAR:

Warning with vibration in the steering wheel: Vibration only - On or Off.

Active steering: Steering assist only- On or Off.

Both Warning with vibration in the steering wheel and Active steering: Full function - On or Off.

Active steering Lane Keeping Aid strives to keep the car within the side lines for the lane.

LKA intervenes and steers away.

If the car approaches the left or right side line of the lane and the direction indicator is not acti- vated, the car is steered back into the lane.

Warning with vibration in the steering wheel

LKA steers and alerts with steering wheel vibration35.

If the car crosses a side line then Lane Keeping Aid will alert the driver with vibration in the steer- ing wheel36. This occurs regardless of whether the car is actively steered back by applying a slight steering torque.

Dynamic cornering

LKA does not engage in sharp inside curves.

In certain cases Lane assistance will allow the car to cross lane lines without engaging active steering or activating a warning. Using an adja- cent lane for cutting a corner when there is a clear line of vision is an example of this.

Related information Lane assistance* (p. 249)

35 The figure shows 3 vibrations when the side line is crossed. 36 Steering wheel vibration varies - the longer the time for which the car has crossed the side line, the more pulses there are.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 251

Lane Keeping Aid - operation Lane Keeping Aid is complemented in the com- bined instrument panel with intuitive graphics in different situations. Here are some examples:

NOTE

LKA is temporarily deactivated for as long as the direction indicator is switched on.

LKA "sees" the following side lines.

If Lane Keeping Aid is active and detects/"sees" the side lines, the LKA symbol indicates this with WHITE lines.

GREY side line - Lane Keeping Aid does not see a line on that side of the car.

LKA engages on the right side.

Lane Keeping Aid intervenes and steers away from the side line - this is indicated with:

RED line for the side in question.

Related information Lane assistance* (p. 249)

Lane Keeping Aid - limitations Lane Keeping Aid's camera sensor has limita- tions in a similar way to the human eye.

For more information, see Collision warning sys- tem* - camera sensor limitations (p. 234) and (p. 232).

NOTE

In certain demanding situations Lane assis- tance may have difficulty assisting the driver in the right way - in which case it is recom- mended to deactivate the function.

Examples of such situations may be:

roadworks

winter road conditions

poor road surface

very sporty driving style

poor weather with reduced visibility.

Hands on the steering wheel In order for Lane Keeping Aid to operate, the driver must have his/her hands on the steering wheel. LKA continually monitors this. If hands are not detected on the steering wheel then a text message is shown, prompting the driver to actively steer the car.

If the driver does not follow the request to begin steering then Lane Keeping Aid goes into

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.252

standby mode and will remain in this mode until the driver begins to steer the car again.

Related information Lane assistance* (p. 249)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 253

Lane Keeping Aid - symbols and messages In situations where there is no Lane assistance function, a symbol may be shown in the com-

bined instrument panel in combination with an explanatory message - follow the recommenda- tion given if appropriate.

Message examples:

Symbol Message Specification

Windscreen sensors blocked See manual

The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.

Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.

Clean the windscreen in front of the camera sensor.

Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations (p. 234) and (p. 232).

Lane Keeping Aid Service required

The system is disengaged.

Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Lane Keeping Aid Inter- rupted

LKA has been set to standby mode. The lines of the LKA symbol indicate when the function is active again.

Related information Lane assistance* (p. 249)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.254

Park Assist* Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the centre console's display screen indicate the dis- tance to the detected obstacle.

Parking assistance sound level can be adjusted during the ongoing acoustic signal using the cen- tre console's VOL knob or in the car's menu sys- tem MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 113).

Parking assistance is available in two variants:

Rear only

Both front and rear.

NOTE

Since a towbar is configured with the car's electrical system, towbar protrusion is included when the function measures the dis- tance to an object behind the car.

WARNING

Parking assistance does not relinquish the driver's own responsibility during parking.

The sensors have blind spots where obstacles cannot be detected.

Be aware of e.g. people and animals near the car.

Related information Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors

(p. 257)

Park assist syst* - function (p. 254)

Park assist syst* - forward (p. 256)

Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 257)

Park assist syst* - backward (p. 255)

Park assist camera (p. 258)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 262)

Park assist syst* - function The parking assistance system is automatically activated when the engine is started - the switch's On/Off lamp is illuminated. If parking assistance is switched off with the button, the lamp goes out.

On/Off for the sensors for parking assistance and CTA37.

The centre console's display screen shows an overview of the relationship between the car and detected obstacle.

37 Side warning, CTA (Cross Traffic Alert) (p. 239)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 255

Display screen view - showing an obstacle left front and right rear.

Marked sectors show which of the four sensor(s) detected an obstacle. The closer to the car sym- bol a selected sector box is, the shorter the dis- tance between the car and a detected obstacle.

The frequency of the signal increases the shorter the distance to an obstacle, in front of or behind the car. Other sound from the audio system is muted automatically.

When the distance is within 30 cm the tone is constant and the active sensor's field nearest the car is filled in. If the detected obstacle is within the distance for the constant tone both behind and in front of the car, then the tone sounds alternately from the loudspeakers.

IMPORTANT

Objects e.g. chains, thin glossy poles or low barriers may be in the "signal shadow" and are then temporarily not detected by the sen- sors - the pulsating tone may then unexpect- edly stop instead of changing over to the expected constant tone.

The sensors cannot detect high objects, such as projecting loading docks.

In such situations, pay extra attention and manoeuvre/reposition the car particularly slowly or stop the current parking manoeuvre - there may be a high risk of damage to vehicles or other objects since information from the sensors is not always reliable in such situations.

Related information Park Assist* (p. 254)

Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors (p. 257)

Park assist syst* - forward (p. 256)

Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 257)

Park assist syst* - backward (p. 255)

Park assist camera (p. 258)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 262)

Park assist syst* - backward Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the centre console's display screen indicate the dis- tance to the detected obstacle.

The distance covered to the rear of the car is about 1.5 metres. The acoustic signal for obsta- cles behind comes from one of the rear loud- speakers.

Rear parking assistance is activated when reverse gear is engaged.

When reversing with e.g. a trailer on the towbar, rear parking assistance is switched off automati- cally - otherwise the sensors would react to the trailer.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.256

NOTE

When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike car- rier on the towbar - without Volvo genuine trailer wiring - parking assistance may need to be switched off manually in order that the sensors do not react to them.

Related information Park Assist* (p. 254)

Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors (p. 257)

Park assist syst* - function (p. 254)

Park assist syst* - forward (p. 256)

Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 257)

Park assist camera (p. 258)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 262)

Park assist syst* - forward Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the centre console's screen indicate distance to detected obstacles.

The parking assistance system is automatically activated when the engine is started - the switch's On/Off lamp is illuminated. If parking assistance is switched off with the button, the lamp goes out.

The distance covered in front of the car is about 0.8 metres. The acoustic signal for obstacles in front comes from one of the front loudspeakers.

Forward parking assistance is active up to 10 km/h (6 mph). If the Parking Assistance Sys- tem is deactivated because the car is moving too quickly - 11 km/h (7 mph) or above - the func-

tion is reactivated when the speed falls below 10 km/h (6 mph).

IMPORTANT

When auxiliary lamps are fitted: Remember that these must not obscure the sensors - the auxiliary lamps may then be perceived as an obstacle.

Related information Park Assist* (p. 254)

Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors (p. 257)

Park assist syst* - function (p. 254)

Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 257)

Park assist syst* - backward (p. 255)

Park assist camera (p. 258)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 262)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 257

Park assist syst* - fault indication Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the centre console's display screen indicate the dis- tance to the detected obstacle.

If the combined instrument panel's information symbol illuminates with constant glow and the text message

Park Assist System Service required is shown then parking assistance is disengaged.

IMPORTANT

Under some circumstances, the parking sen- sors can give false warning signals due to external sound sources which emit the same ultrasound frequencies as those with which the system works.

Examples of such sources include horns, wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.

Related information Park Assist* (p. 254)

Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors (p. 257)

Park assist syst* - function (p. 254)

Park assist syst* - forward (p. 256)

Park assist syst* - backward (p. 255)

Park assist camera (p. 258)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 262) Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the centre console's display screen indicate the dis- tance to the detected obstacle.

The sensors for parking assistance must be cleaned regularly to ensure that they work prop- erly. Clean them with water and car shampoo.

Sensor location, front.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.258

Sensor location, rear.

NOTE

Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will reduce their function and may prevent meas- urement.

Related information Park Assist* (p. 254)

Park assist syst* - function (p. 254)

Park assist syst* - forward (p. 256)

Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 257)

Park assist syst* - backward (p. 255)

Park assist camera (p. 258)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 262)

Park assist camera The parking camera is an auxiliary system and is activated when the reverse gear is selected.

The camera image is shown on the centre con- sole's screen.

NOTE

Since a towbar is configured with the car's electrical system, towbar protrusion is included when the function measures the dis- tance to an object behind the car.

WARNING

The parking camera is an aid and can never replace the responsibilities of the driver when reversing.

The camera has blind spots where obsta- cles cannot be detected.

Be aware of people and animals near the car.

Function and operation

Camera location next to the opening handle.

The camera shows what is behind the car and if something appears from the sides.

The camera shows a wide area behind the car and part of the bumper and any towbar.

Objects on the screen may appear to tilt slightly - this is normal.

NOTE

Objects on the display screen may be closer to the car than they appear to be on the screen.

If another view is active then the parking camera system takes over automatically and its camera image is displayed on the screen.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 259

When reverse gear is selected, two unbroken lines are shown graphically which illustrate where the car's rear wheels will roll with the current steering wheel angle - this facilitates parallel parking, reversing into tight spaces and for hitch- ing a trailer. The car's approximate external dimensions are illustrated by means of dashed lines. The park assist lines can be deactivated - see section Settings (p. 261).

If the car is also equipped with Parking assis- tance sensors * (p. 254) then their information is shown graphically as coloured areas in order to illustrate the distance to detected obstacles, see heading "Cars with reversing sensors" later in the text.

The camera is active approx. 5 seconds after reverse gear has been disengaged or until the car's speed exceeds 10 km/h (6 mph) forward or 35 km/h (22 mph) backward.

Light conditions The camera image is adjusted automatically according to prevailing light conditions. Because of this, the image may vary slightly in brightness and quality. Poor light conditions can result in a slightly reduced image quality.

NOTE

Keep the camera lens clear of dirt, snow and ice to ensure optimum function. This is partic- ularly important in poor light.

Park assist lines

Examples of how the park assist lines can be displayed for the driver.

The lines on the screen are projected as if they were at ground level behind the car and are directly related to steering wheel movement, which shows the driver the path the car will then take - also when the car is turning.

NOTE

When reversing with a trailer which is not connected electrically to the car, the lines on the display show the route the car will take - not the trailer.

The screen shows no lines when a trailer is connected electrically to the car's elec- trical system.

The parking camera is deactivated auto- matically when towing a trailer if a Volvo genuine trailer cable is used.

IMPORTANT

Remember that the display only shows the area behind the car - so pay attention to the sides and front of the car when turning the steering while reversing.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.260

Boundary lines

Different lines in the system.

Boundary line, free reversing zone

"Wheel tracks"

The dashed line (1) frames in a zone up to about 1.5 m back from the bumper. It is also the limit of the car's most protruding parts, such as door mirrors and corners - also when the car is turning.

The wide "wheel tracks" (2) between the side lines indicate where the wheels will roll and can extend about 3.2 m back from the bumper if no obstacle is in the way.

Cars with reversing sensors*

Coloured areas (x 4 - one per sensor) show distance.

If the car is also equipped with Parking assis- tance (p. 254) the distance is shown with col- oured fields for each sensor that registers an obstacle.

The colour of the areas changes with decreasing distance to the obstacle - from light yellow to yel- low, via orange to red.

Colour / paint Distance (metres)

Light yellow 0,71,5

Yellow 0,50,7

Orange 0,30,5

Red 00,3

Related information Park assist camera - settings (p. 261)

Park assist camera - limitations (p. 262)

Park Assist* (p. 254)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 262)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 261

Park assist camera - settings

Activate switched-off camera If the camera function is switched off when reverse gear is selected, it is activated in the fol- lowing way:

Main source menu38.

1. Give one or two long presses on EXIT to access the main source menu.

2. Turn to the "Camera" option with TUNE and press OK/MENU.

3. In the following menu: - Turn to the desired camera view with TUNE and press OK/ MENU - the screen shows the current cam- era view.

Options* Cars with the front camera option have a CAM button on the climate panel.

Button location may vary depending on options for other equipment.

Press CAM to activate the camera - the screenshows the current camera view.

To change view between the reversing camera and front camera:

Press CAM or turn TUNE.

Change setting The default setting is that the camera is activated when reverse gear is selected.

The settings for the parking camera can be changed when the screen shows a camera view:

1. Press OK/MENU when a camera view is shown - the screenchanges to a menu with various options.

2. Turn to reach the desired option with TUNE.

3. Highlight the option by pressing OK/MENU once and go back out with EXIT.

Towbar The camera can be used to advantage when hitching a trailer. A park assist line for the tow- bar's intended "trajectory" toward the trailer can be shown on the screen - exactly as for the "wheel tracks".

A choice can be made between showing the "wheel tracks" or the towbar's trajectory - both options cannot be shown simultaneously.

1. Press OK/MENU when a camera view is shown.

2. Turn to reach the Tow bar trajectory guide line option with TUNE.

3. Highlight the option by pressing OK/MENU once and go back out with EXIT.

38 See the Sensus Infotainment supplement for more information about the menu system.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.262

Zoom If precise manoeuvring is required then the cam- era view can be zoomed in:

Press CAM or turn TUNE - repeated press/ turn changes back to the normal view.

If more options are available, they are in a loop - press/turn until the desired camera view is shown.

Related information Park assist camera (p. 258)

Park assist camera - limitations (p. 262)

Park Assist* (p. 254)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 262)

Park assist camera - limitations

NOTE

Bicycle racks or other accessories mounted on the back of the car may obscure the line of sight of the camera.

To bear in mind Pay attention to the possibility that, even if it only looks like a relatively small part of the image is obscured, it could be a relatively large sector that is hidden from view. Obstacles could thereby go undetected until they are very close to the car.

Keep the camera lens free from dirt, ice and snow.

Clean the camera lens regularly with luke- warm water and car shampoo - take care not to scratch the lens.

Related information Park assist camera (p. 258)

Park assist camera - settings (p. 261)

Park Assist* (p. 254)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 262)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* The Park Assist Pilot (PAP Park Assist Pilot) helps the driver to park by first checking whether a space is sufficiently large and then turning the steering wheel and steering the car into the space.

The combined instrument panel uses symbols, graphics and text when elements are to be exe- cuted.

The On/Off button is on the centre console.

NOTE

Since a towbar is configured with the car's electrical system, towbar protrusion is included when the function measures the dis- tance to an object behind the car.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 263

WARNING

The PAP function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer it cannot handle all situa- tions in all traffic, weather and road condi- tions.

Be particularly aware of people and ani- mals near the car.

PAP is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropri- ate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.

Related information Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - function (p. 263)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - operation (p. 264)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - limitations (p. 266)

Active Park Assist (PAP)* - symbols and messages (p. 267)

Park assist camera (p. 258)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - function

The combined instrument panel uses symbols, graphics and text when elements are to be exe- cuted.

NOTE

The PAP function measures the space and steers the car - the driver's task is to:

keep a close watch around the car

follow the instructions in the combined instrument panel

change gear (reverse/forward)

control and maintain a safe speed

brake and stop.

PAP can be activated if the following criteria are met once the engine has been started:

The functions ABS39 or ESC40 must not intervene when the PAP function is activated - these can be activated in the event of e.g. steep and slippery surfaces, see the sections on Foot brake (p. 289) and Stability system ESC (p. 184) for more information.

Trailers must not be connected to the car.

Speed must be lower than 50 km/h (30 mph).

Principle for PAP.

The PAP function parks the car using the follow- ing steps:

1. The function searches for a parking space and measures it - during measurement, speed must not exceed 30 km/h (20 mph).

2. The car is steered into the space during reversing.

3. The car is positioned in the space by means of driving forward/backward.

Related information Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 262)

Park assist camera (p. 258)

39 (Anti-lock Braking System) - Anti-lock braking system. 40 (Electronic Stability Control) - Stability system.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.264

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - operation

The driver is instructed about how PAP works by means of simple, clear instructions in the com- bined instrument panel - using both graphics and text graphics and text message (p. 267).

NOTE

Remember that certain steering wheel posi- tions may obstruct the combined instrument panel's instructions when you turn it during the parking manoeuvre.

1 - Searching and checking measurements

NOTE

The PAP function measures the space and steers the car - the driver's task is to:

keep a close watch around the car

follow the instructions in the combined instrument panel

change gear (reverse/forward)

control and maintain a safe speed

brake and stop.

NOTE

The distance between the car and parking spaces should be 0.5-1.5 metres (1.6-5.0 ft) while PAP is searching for a parking space.

The PAP function searches for a parking space and checks whether it is big enough. Proceed as follows:

1. Activate PAP by pressing this button and do not drive faster than 30 km/h (20 mph).

2. Keep an eye on the combined instrument panel and be prepared to stop the car when the graphics and text message so request.

3. Stop the car when the graphics and text so request.

NOTE

PAP searches the area for parking, displays instructions and guides the car in on its pas- senger side. But if required the car can also be parked on the driver's side of the street:

Activate the direction indicator to the driver's side - then the system searches for a parking space on that side of the car instead.

2 - Reversing in

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 265

During the Reversing step, PAP will steer the car into the parking space. Proceed as follows:

1. Check that the area behind the car is clear, then engage reverse gear.

2. Reverse slowly and carefully without touching the steering wheel - and no faster than 7 km/h (4 mph).

3. Keep an eye on the combined instrument panel and be prepared to stop the car when the graphics and text message so request.

NOTE

Keep your hands away from the steering wheel when the PAP function is acti- vated.

Make sure that the steering wheel is not hindered in any way and can rotate freely.

To achieve optimum results - wait until the steering wheel is fully turned before starting to drive backward/forward.

3 - Positioning

When the car has reversed into the parking space, it must be straightened up and stopped.

1. Engage first gear or D position, wait until the steering wheel has been turned, then drive slowly forwards.

2. Stop the car when the graphics and text message so request.

3. Engage reverse gear and drive backwards slowly until the graphics and text message tell you to stop.

The function is deactivated automatically and the graphics and message show that parking is com- plete. It may be necessary for the driver to correct the positioning. Only the driver can determine whether the car is properly parked.

IMPORTANT

The warning distance is shorter when the sensors are used by PAP compared with when Park Assist uses the sensors.

Related information Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 262)

Park assist camera (p. 258)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.266

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - limitations

The PAP sequence is stopped:

if the car is driven too quickly - above 7 km/h (4 mph)

if the driver touches the steering wheel

if the ABS41 or ESC42 function is engaged - e.g. if a wheel loses grip on a slippery road surface.

A text message indicates where the PAP sequence was stopped.

NOTE

Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will reduce their function and may prevent meas- urement.

IMPORTANT

Under certain circumstances, PAP is unable to find parking spaces - one reason for this may be the fact that there is interference with the sensors from external sound sources which emit the same ultrasound frequencies as those with which the system works.

Examples of such sources include horns, wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.

To bear in mind The driver should bear in mind that the Park Assist Pilot is an aid not an infallible, fully-auto- matic function. The driver must therefore be pre- pared to intervene. There are also a few details to bear in mind while parking, e.g.:

PAP starts out from the current location of the parked vehicles - if they are inappropri- ately parked then the car's tyres and wheel rims may be damaged against kerbs.

PAP is designed for parking on straight streets - not sharp curves or bends. For this reason, make sure the car is parallel to the parking space when PAP measures the space.

It is not always possible to find parking spaces on narrow streets since there is not enough space for manoeuvring. In such park- ing situations, it helps the system to drive as close to the side of the road as possible where you intend to park.

Bear in mind that the front of the car may swing out towards oncoming traffic while being parked.

Objects situated higher than the detection areas of the sensors are not included when calculations are made for the parking manoeuvre. This may cause PAP to swing into the parking space too early, and hence such parking spaces should be avoided.

The driver is responsible for determining whether the space selected by PAP is suita- ble for parking.

Use approved tyres43 with the correct tyre pressure - this affects the ability of PAP to park the car.

Heavy rain or snow may cause the system to measure the parking space incorrectly.

Do not use PAP if snow chains or a spare wheel are fitted.

Do not use PAP if loaded objects are pro- truding from the car.

41 (Anti-lock Braking System) - Anti-lock braking system. 42 (Electronic Stability Control) - Stability and traction control system. 43 "Approved tyres" refers to tyres of the same type and make as those fitted new on delivery from the factory.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 267

IMPORTANT

Changing to another approved wheel rim and/or tyre dimension may involve a changed tyre circumference, which means that the PAP system's parameters may then need to be updated. Consult a workshop - an author- ised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Maintenance

The PAP sensors are located in the bumpers44 - 6 front and 4 rear.

For the PAP function to work correctly, its sen- sors must be cleaned(p. 257) regularly with water and car shampoo.

Related information Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 262)

Park assist camera (p. 258)

Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors (p. 257)

Active Park Assist (PAP)* - symbols and messages

The combined instrument panel can show differ- ent combinations of symbols and text with varying content - sometimes with a self-explanatory piece of advice on appropriate action.

If a message says that the Park Assist Pilot is disengaged, contact with an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 262)

Park assist camera (p. 258)

44 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

STARTING AND DRIVING

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.270

Starting the engine The engine is started and switched off using the remote control key and the START/STOP ENGINE button.

Ignition switch with remote control key extracted/ inserted. and START/STOP ENGINE button.

IMPORTANT

Do not press in the remote control key incor- rectly turned - Hold the end with the detacha- ble key blade; see Detachable key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 163)

1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch and press it in to its end position.

2. Hold the clutch pedal fully depressed1. (For cars with automatic gearbox - Depress the brake pedal.)

3. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button and then release it.

The starter motor works until the engine is started or until its overheating protection triggers.

IMPORTANT

If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts - wait for 3 minutes before making a further attempt. Starting capacity increases if the bat- tery is allowed to recover.

WARNING Always remove the remote control key from the ignition switch when leaving the car, and make sure that the key position is 0 - in par- ticular if there are children in the car. For information on how this works, see Key posi- tions (p. 80).

NOTE

The idling speed can be noticeably higher than normal for certain engine types during cold starting. This is done in order that the emissions system can reach normal operating temperature as quickly as possible, which minimises exhaust emissions and protects the environment.

Keyless starting (Keyless drive)* Follow steps 23 for keyless (p. 165) starting of petrol and diesel engines.

NOTE

A prerequisite for the engine to start is that one of the car's remote control keys with the keyless start and lock function is in the pas- senger compartment or cargo area.

WARNING Never remove the remote control key from the car while driving or during towing.

Related information Key positions (p. 80)

1 If the car is moving then it is enough to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the car.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

271

Switching off the engine The engine is switched off using the START/ STOP ENGINE button.

To switch off the engine:

Press the START/STOP ENGINE button - the engine stops.

If the car has an automatic gearbox and the gear selector is not in a position P or if the car is moving - Press twice or hold the START/STOP ENGINE button depressed until the engine stops.

Related information Key positions (p. 80)

Steering lock The steering lock makes steering difficult if the car is e.g. taken unlawfully. A mechanical noise may be noticed when the steering lock unlocks or locks.

Function The steering lock is activated when the driv-

er's door is opened after the engine has been switched off.

The steering lock is deactivated when the remote control key is in the ignition switch2

and the START/STOP ENGINE button is depressed.

Related information Starting the engine (p. 270)

Key positions (p. 80)

Steering wheel (p. 87)

Jump starting If the starter battery (p. 362) is discharged then the car can be started with current from another battery.

When jump starting the car, the following steps are recommended to avoid short circuits or other damage:

1. Set the car's electrical system in key position 0, see Key positions (p. 80).

2. Check that the donor battery has a voltage of 12 V.

3. If the donor battery is installed in another car - switch off the donor car's engine and make sure that the two cars do not touch each other.

2 In cars with keyless start and lock system it is enough to have a remote control key inside the passenger compartment.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

272

4. Connect one of the red jump lead's clamps to the donor battery's positive terminal (1).

IMPORTANT

Connect the start cable carefully to avoid short circuits with other components in the engine compartment.

5. Open the clips on the front cover of the bat- tery in your car and remove the cover.

6. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp onto the car's positive terminal (2).

7. Connect one of the black jump lead's clamps to the donor battery's negative terminal (3).

8. Connect the other clamp to a grounding point, e.g. right-hand engine mounting at the top, the outer screw head (4).

9. Check that the jump lead clamps are affixed securely so that there are no sparks during the starting attempt.

10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and allow it to run a few minutes at a speed slightly higher than idle approx. 1500 rpm.

11. Start the engine in the car with the dis- charged battery.

IMPORTANT

Do not touch the connections between cable and car during the starting attempt - this would involve a risk of sparks.

12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order - first the black and then the red.

> Make sure that none of the black jump lead's clamps comes into contact with the battery's positive terminal or the clamp connected to the red jump lead.

WARNING

The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can be formed if a jump lead is connected incorrectly, and this can be enough for the battery to explode.

The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns.

If sulphuric acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes - seek medical attention imme- diately.

Related information Starting the engine (p. 270)

STARTING AND DRIVING

273

Gearboxes There are two main types of gearbox - Manual and Automatic.

Manual gearbox (p. 273)

Automatic gearbox, Geartronic (p. 274)

IMPORTANT

To prevent damage to any drive system com- ponents, the working temperature of the gearbox is checked. If there is a risk of over- heating, a warning symbol in the combined instrument panel lights up and a text mes- sage is shown. Follow the recommendation given in the text message.

Manual gearbox The function of the gearbox is to change the gear ratio depending on speed and power requirements.

Gearing pattern.

The manual gearbox has 6 gears, the shifting pattern is imprinted on the gear lever.

Depress the clutch pedal fully during each gear change.

Take your foot off the clutch pedal between gear changes.

WARNING Always apply the parking brake when parking on a slope - leaving the car in gear is not suf- ficient to hold the car in all situations.

Reverse gear inhibitor The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibility of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse gear during normal forward travel.

Follow the gearing pattern printed on the gear lever and start from neutral position, N before moving it to R position.

Engage reverse gear only when the car is stationary.

Related information Transmission fluid - grade and volume

(p. 397)

Gearboxes (p. 273)

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.274

Gear shift indicator* The gear shift indicator notifies the driver when it is appropriate to engage the next higher or lower gear in order to obtain the lowest possible fuel consumption.

An essential detail in connection with environ- mental driving is to drive in the right gear and to change gear in plenty of time.

An indicator is available as an aid on some vari- ants - GSI (Gear Shift Indicator) - which notifies the driver when it is appropriate to engage the next higher or lower gear in order to obtain the lowest possible fuel consumption. However, tak- ing into consideration characteristics such as performance and vibration-free running, it may be advantageous to change gear at a higher engine speed.

Manual gearbox Gear shift indicator for manual gearbox. Only one marker is illuminated at a time - it is illu- minated in the centre only dur- ing normal driving.

At the recommended upshift the cursor illuminates "+", and at the recom- mended downshift the cursor illuminates "-" (marked red in the illustration).

Automatic gearbox

Combined instrument panel "Digital" with gear shift indicator.

The framed number indicates the current gear.

With "Analogue" combined instrument panel, the gear positions and indicator arrows are displayed in its centre.

Related information Manual gearbox (p. 273)

Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 274)

Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* The automatic gearbox Geartronic has a hydraulic torque converter that transfers power from engine to gearbox. It has two different gear modes - Automatic and Manual.

D: Automatic gear positions. +/: Manual gear positions. S: Sport mode*.3

The combined instrument panel shows the posi- tion of the gear selector using the following indi- cations: P, R, N, D, S*, 1, 2, 3 etc.

Gear positions Automatic gear positions are indicated on the right of the combined instrument panel. (Only one marker is illuminated at a time - the one showing the current gear selector position.)

3 The gear lever's gearshift pattern varies depending on engine option.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

275

Symbol "S" for Sport mode is ORANGE when the mode is active.

P Parking position Select P when starting the engine or when the car is parked.

To be able to move the gear selector from the P position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the key position (p. 81) must be II.

The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the P position is engaged. Also apply the parking brake when the car is parked, see Parking brake (p. 291).

NOTE

The gear selector must be in P position to allow the car to be locked and alarmed.

IMPORTANT

The car must be stationary when position P is selected.

WARNING Always apply the parking brake when parking on a slope - the automatic transmission in P is not sufficient to hold the car in all situa- tions.

R Reverse The car must be stationary when position R is selected.

N Neutral No gear is engaged and the engine can be started. Apply the parking brake if the car is sta- tionary with the gear selector in position N.

In order to be able to move the gear selector from the N position to another gear position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the key posi- tion (p. 81) must be II.

D Drive D is the normal driving position. Shifting up and down takes place automatically based on the level of acceleration and speed. The car must be stationary when the gear selector is moved to position D from position R.

Geartronic Manual gear positions (+/-) The driver can also change gear manually using the Geartronic automatic gearbox. The car engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal is released.

The manual gear position is reached by moving the lever to the side from position D to the end position at "+/-". The combined instrument pan- el's symbol "+/-" changes colour from WHITE to ORANGE and the digits 1, 2, 3 etc. are displayed

in a box which corresponds to the gear that has just been selected.

Move the lever forwards towards + (plus) to change up a gear and release the lever, which returns to its neutral position between "+" and "".

or

Pull the lever back towards "" (minus) to change down a gear and release it.

The manual gearshift mode "+/-" can be selected at any time while driving.

Geartronic automatically shifts down if the driver allows the speed to decrease lower than a level suitable for the selected gear, in order to avoid jerking and stalling.

To return to automatic driving mode:

Move the lever to the side to the end position at D.

NOTE

f the gearbox has a Sport programme then the gearbox will only become manual after the lever has been moved forwards or backwards in its "+/-" position. The combined instrument panel then shifts the indication from S to show which of the gears 1, 2, 3 etc. is engaged.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.276

Paddles* As a supplement to manual gear changing with the gear selector there are also controls located on the steering wheel, so-called "paddles".

To be able to change gear with the steering wheel paddles they must first be activated. This is by means of pulling one of the paddles toward the steering wheel - the combined instrument panel then changes indication from "D" to a fig- ure, which indicates the current gear.

To then change gear one step:

Pull one of the paddles backwards - towards the steering wheel - and release.

Both steering wheel "paddles".

"-": Selects the next lower gear.

"+": Selects the next higher gear.

A gear change occurs at each pull of the paddle provided that the engine speed does not leave the permitted range.

After each gear change the combined instrument panel changes figure to show the current gear.

NOTE

Automatic deactivation

If the steering wheel paddles are not used then they are deactivated after a short time - this is indicated when the combined instru- ment panel switches indication, from the fig- ure for the current gear back to "D".

The exception is during engine braking - then the paddles are activated as long as engine braking is in progress.

Manual deactivation

The steering wheel paddle shifters can also be deactivated manually:

Pull both paddles toward the steering wheel and hold until the combined instru- ment panel changes character from the figure for the current gear to "D".

The paddles can also be used with the gear selector in Sport mode* - then the paddles are constantly activated without being deactivated.

Geartronic - Sport mode (S) The Sport programme provides sportier characteristics and allows higher engine speed for the gears. At the same time it responds more quickly to

acceleration. During active driving, the use of a lower gear is prioritised, leading to a delayed upshift.

To activate Sport mode:

Move the gear selector to the side from D position to the end position at "+S" - the combined instrument panel changes indica- tion from D to S.

Sport mode can be selected at any time while driving.

Geartronic - Winter mode It can be easier to pull away on slippery roads if 3rd gear is engaged manually.

1. Depress the brake pedal and move the gear selector from D position to the end position at "+/" - the combined instrument panel shifts the indication from D to the figure 14.

2. Scroll up to gear 3 by pushing the lever for- ward towards "+" (plus) twice - the combined instrument panel shifts the indication from 1 to 3.

3. Release the brake and accelerate carefully.

4 If the car has Sport mode* then "S" is shown first.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

277

The gearbox "winter mode" means that the car moves off with a lower engine speed and reduced engine power on the drive wheels.

Kick-down When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the way to the floor (beyond the position normally regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is immediately engaged. This is known as kick- down.

If the accelerator is released from the kick-down position, the gearbox automatically changes up.

Kick-down is used when maximum acceleration is needed, such as for overtaking.

Safety function

To prevent overrevving the engine, the gearbox control program has a protective downshift inhibi- tor which prevents the kick-down function.

Geartronic does not permit downshifting/kick- down which would result in an engine speed high enough to damage the engine. Nothing happens if the driver still tries to shift down in this way at high engine speed the original gear remains engaged.

When kick-down is activated the car can change one or more gears at a time depending on engine speed. The car changes up when the engine reaches its maximum speed in order to prevent damage to the engine.

Towing If the car has to be towed - see important infor- mation in the section Towing (p. 313).

Related information Transmission fluid - grade and volume

(p. 397)

Gearboxes (p. 273)

Gear selector inhibitor There are two different types of gear selector inhibitor - mechanical and automatic.

Mechanical gear selector inhibitor

G 0 2 1 3 5 1

The gear selector can be moved forward and back freely between N and D. Other positions are locked with a latch that is released with the inhib- itor button on the gear selector.

With the inhibitor button depressed the lever can be moved forwards or backwards between P, R, N and D.

Automatic gear selector inhibitor The automatic gearbox has special safety sys- tems:

Parking position (P)

Stationary car with engine running:

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.278

Keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the gear selector to another position.

Electric gear inhibitor Shiftlock Parking position (P) In order to be able to move the gear selector from P to other gear positions, the brake pedal must be depressed and the key position (p. 81) must be II.

Shiftlock Neutral (N) If the gear selector is in the N position and the car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds (irrespective of whether the engine is running) then the gear selector is locked.

In order to be able to move the gear selector from the N position to another gear position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the key posi- tion (p. 81) must be II.

Deactivate automatic gear selector inhibitor

If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a flat bat- tery, the gear selector must be moved from the P position so that the car can be moved.

Lift out the contoured insert in the compart- ment behind the centre console and locate a spring-loaded button in the bottom of the compartment.

Press and hold the button.

Move the gear selector from the P position and release the button.

4. Refit the storage compartment insert.

Related information Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 274)

Hill start assist (HSA)* The foot brake can be released before setting off or reversing uphill - the HSA (Hill Start Assist) function means that the car does not roll backwards.

The function means that the pedal pressure in the brake system remains for several seconds while the driver's foot is moved from brake pedal to accelerator pedal.

The temporary braking effect releases after sev- eral seconds or when the driver accelerates.

Related information Starting the engine (p. 270)

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory. 279

Start/Stop* Some engine and gearbox combinations come fitted with a Start/Stop function which engages in the event of e.g. stationary traffic or waiting at traffic lights - the engine is then switched off temporarily and restarts automatically when the journey is due to continue.

Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpora- tion's core values and it influences all of our operations. This target orientation has resulted in several separate energy-saving functions of which Start/Stop is one, all with the collective task of reducing fuel consumption, which in turn helps to reduce exhaust emissions.

General information on Start/Stop

The engine is switched off - it becomes quieter and cleaner...

The Start/Stop function gives the driver the opportunity for a more active environmentally

conscious way of driving the car by means of being able to allow the engine to stop automati- cally, whenever appropriate.

The car's menu system MY CAR (p. 113) under heading Drive-E contains information on Volvo's Start/Stop system, as well as recommendations for energy-saving driving techniques.

Manual or automatic gearbox Note that there are differences in the Start/Stop function depending on whether the gearbox is manual or automatic.

Related information Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 279)

Starting the engine (p. 270)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-start (p. 283)

Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 282)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p. 281)

Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gear- box (p. 284)

Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p. 285)

Battery - Start/Stop (p. 365)

Start/Stop* - function and operation The Start/Stop function is activated automati- cally when the engine is started with the key.

The Start/Stop function is acti- vated automatically when the engine is started with the key. The driver is made aware of the function by the function's On/Off button symbol lighting up in the combined instrument panel and the On/Off button lamp illuminating.

All of the car's normal systems such as lighting, radio, etc. work as normal even with an engine that has stopped automatically, except that some equipment may have the func- tion temporarily reduced, e.g. the climate control system's fan speed or extremely high volume on the audio system.

Auto-stopping the engine The following is required for the engine to auto- stop:

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

280

Conditions M/AA

Declutch, set the gear lever in neutral position and release the clutch pedal - the engine stops automatically.

M

Stop the car with the foot brake and then keep your foot on the pedal - the engine stops automatically.

A

A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.

If the ECO function is activated then the engine may auto-stop before the car is completely stationary.

For certain engine variants the engine may auto- stop before the car is stationary regardless of whether the ECO function is activated.

When the engine is auto-stopped, the combined instrument panel's symbol for the Start/Stop function illuminates.

Auto-starting the engine

Conditions M/A A

With the gear lever in neutral position:

1. Depress the clutch pedal or press the accelerator pedal - the engine starts.

2. Engage a suitable gear and drive.

M

Release the foot pressure on the foot brake - the engine starts automatically and the journey can continue.

A

Maintain foot pressure on the foot brake and depress the accelerator pedal - the engine auto-starts.

A

The following option is also available on a downhill gradient:

Release the foot brake and let the car move off - the engine starts automatically when the speed exceeds normal walking pace.

M + A

A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.

Deactivating the Start/Stop function In certain situations, it may advisable to temporarily switch off the automatic Start/Stop function - this is carried out with a push of this button.

Disengaged function is indicated by the combined instrument panel's Start/Stop symbols and the button's lamp extinguishing.

The Start/Stop function is disengaged until it is reactivated with the button or until the next time the engine is started with the key.

Start assistance HSA The foot brake can also be released on an uphill slope to auto-start the engine - the HSA (p. 278) (Hill Start Assist) function prevents the car from rolling backwards.

HSA means that the pressure in the brake sys- tem remains temporarily available while the driv- er's foot is moved from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal for driving off with the engine having stopped automatically. The temporary braking effect releases after a couple of seconds or when the driver accelerates.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory. 281

Related information Start/Stop* (p. 279)

Starting the engine (p. 270)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-start (p. 283)

Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 282)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p. 281)

Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gear- box (p. 284)

Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p. 285)

Battery - Start/Stop (p. 365)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop Although the Start/Stop function is activated, the engine does not always stop automatically.

The engine does not auto-stop if:

Conditions M/AA

the car has not first achieved approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) after a key start or the last auto-stop.

M + A

the driver has opened the seatbelt's buckle.

M + A

the capacity of the starter battery is below the minimum permissible level.

M + A

the engine does not have normal operating temperature.

M + A

ambient temperature is around freez- ing point or above approx. 30 C.

M + A

the windscreen's electric heating is activated.

M + A

the environment in the passenger compartment differs from the preset valuesB - indicated by the ventilation fan running at a high speed.

M + A

the car is reversed. M + A

Conditions M/AA

the starter battery's temperature is below freezing point or too high.

M + A

the driver makes greater steering wheel movements.

M + A

the exhaust system's particulate filter is full - the temporarily disengaged Start/Stop function is reactivated as soon as an automatic cleaning cycle has been performed (see Diesel parti- cle filter (DPF) (p. 301)).

M + A

the road is very steep. M + A

a trailer is connected electrically to the cars electrical system.

M + A

the bonnet has been openedC. M + A

the gearbox does not have normal operating temperature.

A

the atmospheric air pressure is less than equivalent to 1500-2500 metres above sea level - the current air pres- sure varies with the prevailing weather conditions.

A

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.282

Conditions M/AA

adaptive cruise control Queue Assist is activated.

A

the gear selector is moved out of the D position to R, S positionD or "+/-".

A

A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox. B Car with ECC. C With certain engines only. D Sport mode.

Related information Start/Stop* (p. 279)

Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 279)

Starting the engine (p. 270)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-start (p. 283)

Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 282)

Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gear- box (p. 284)

Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p. 285)

Battery - Start/Stop (p. 365)

Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts An auto-stopped engine may restart in certain cases without the driver having decided that the journey should continue.

In the following cases the engine also starts automatically if the driver has not depressed the clutch pedal (manual gearbox) or takes his/her foot off the brake pedal (automatic gearbox):

Conditions M/AA

Misting forms on the windows. M + A

The environment in the passenger compartment deviates from the preset valuesB.

M + A

There is a temporarily high current take-off or battery capacity drops below the lowest permissible level.

M + A

Repeated pumping of the brake pedal.

M + A

The bonnet is openedC. M + A

The car starts to roll, or there is a small increase in speed if the car auto-stopped without being com- pletely stationary.

M + A

The driver's seatbelt buckle is opened with the gear selector in D or N posi- tion.

A

Conditions M/AA

Steering wheel movementsC. A

The gear selector is moved out of the D position to S positionD, R or "+/-".

A

The driver's door is opened with the gear selector in D position - a "ping" sound and text message inform that the Start/Stop function is active.

A

A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox. B Car with ECC. C With certain engines only. D Sport mode.

WARNING Do not open the bonnet when the engine has stopped automatically - the engine may sud- denly start automatically. First switch off the engine as normal using the START/STOP ENGINE button before opening the bonnet.

Related information Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 279)

Starting the engine (p. 270)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-start (p. 283)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p. 281)

Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gear- box (p. 284)

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory. 283

Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p. 285)

Battery - Start/Stop (p. 365)

Start/Stop* (p. 279)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-start The engine does not always auto-start after hav- ing auto-stopped.

In the following cases the engine does not auto- start after having auto-stopped:

Conditions M/A A

A gear is engaged without declutching - a display text prompts the driver to set the gear lever in neutral position in order to enable automatic starting.

M

The driver is unrestrained. M

The driver is unrestrained, the gear selector is in P position and the drivers door is open - a normal engine start must take place.

A

A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.

Related information Start/Stop* (p. 279)

Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 279)

Starting the engine (p. 270)

Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 282)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p. 281)

Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gear- box (p. 284)

Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p. 285)

Battery - Start/Stop (p. 365)

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.284

Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gearbox

If a start-up fails and the engine stops, proceed in accordance with the below:

1. Check that the driver side's seatbelt is locked in the seatbelt buckle.

2. Depress the clutch pedal again - the engine starts automatically.

3. In certain cases the gear lever must be set in neutral position. The combined instrument panel then shows the text Put gear in neutral.

Related information Start/Stop* (p. 279)

Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 279)

Starting the engine (p. 270)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-start (p. 283)

Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 282)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p. 281)

Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p. 285)

Battery - Start/Stop (p. 365)

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory. 285

Start/Stop* - symbols and messages The Start/Stop function can show text messages in the combined instrument panel.

Text message In combination with this indicator lamp the Start/Stop function may display text messages in the combined instru-

ment panel for certain situations. For some of

them there is a recommended action that should be performed. The following table shows some examples.

Symbol Message Info/Action M/AA

Auto Start/Stop Service required

Start/Stop is not operational. Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. M + A

Autostart Engine running + acoustic signal

Activated if the driver's door is opened with auto-stopped engine and the gear selector in D posi- tion.

A

Press start button The engine will not start automatically - start the engine as normal with the START/STOP ENGINE button.

M + A

Depress clutch pedal to start The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the clutch pedal to be depressed. M

Depress brake and clutch pedals to start

The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the brake or clutch pedal to be depressed. M

Put gear in neutral to start Gear is engaged without declutching - disengage and set the gear lever in neutral position. M

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.286

Symbol Message Info/Action M/AA

Select P or N to start Start/Stop has been deactivated - move the gear selector to N or P position and start the engine as normal with the START/STOP ENGINE button.

A

Press start button The engine will not start automatically - start the engine as normal with the START/STOP ENGINE button and the gear selector in P or N.

A

A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.

If a message does not go out following comple- tion of the action then a workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec- ommended.

Related information Start/Stop* (p. 279)

Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 279)

Starting the engine (p. 270)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-start (p. 283)

Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 282)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p. 281)

Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gear- box (p. 284)

Battery - Start/Stop (p. 365)

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory. 287

Drive mode ECO*

ECO5 drive mode is a function for automatic cars, optimising the car's driving characteristics for greater fuel economy and more eco-friendly driving.

General The following characteristics are adapted when activating ECO drive mode:

Gearbox gearshift points.

Engine management and response from the accelerator pedal.

Start/Stop function - the engine can also auto-stop before the car has stopped down to being completely stationary.

The Eco Coast freewheel function is acti- vated engine braking ceases.

Climate control system settings some elec- tricity consumers are deactivated or operate at reduced power.

NOTE

When the ECO function is activated, several parameters in the climate control system's settings are changed, and several electricity consumer functions are reduced. Certain set- tings can be reset manually, but full function- ality is only restored by deactivating the ECO function.

Operation

ECO button

ECO symbol in the combined instrument panel

The ECO function is deactivated when the engine is switched off, and must therefore be activated after each time the engine is started. There are

exceptions for certain engines. However, it is easily verified by means of both the combined instrument panel's ECO symbol and the ECO button's lamp illuminating when the function is activated.

Activate and deactivate ECO drive mode Press the button to activate or deactivate the function. An indi- cator in the button illuminates when the function is activated.

Disengaged ECO function is indicated by the combined instrument panel ECO symbol and the ECO button lamp extinguishing. The function is then switched off until it is reactivated with the ECO button.

Eco Coast - Function The Eco Coast subfunction means in practice that engine braking is deactivated, meaning in turn that the car's kinetic energy is used to coast for longer distances. When the driver releases the accelerator pedal the gearbox is automatically disengaged from the engine whose speed is reduced to idling speed with minimum consump- tion.

5 Not possible on the V40 CROSS COUNTRY with AWD.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

288

This function is intended for use in the event of an anticipated reduction in speed, e.g. to coast into a zone with a lower speed limit.

A combination of Eco Coast and temporarily deactivated ECO function can also collectively contribute to reduced consumption:

Active Eco Coast: Long coasting without engine braking = Low consumption

and

Deactivated ECO function: Short coasting with engine braking = Minimum consump- tion.

NOTE

However, to achieve optimal low fuel con- sumption, Eco Coast in combination with short coasting distances should generally be avoided.

Activating Eco Coast The function is activated when the accelerator pedal is fully released, in combination with the following parameters:

ECO button activated

The gear selector is in D position

Speed within the range of approx. 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph)

The road's downhill gradient is not steeper than approx. 6%.

Deactivate Eco Coast In certain situations it may be desirable to deacti- vate the Eco Coast function. Examples of such situations include:

on steep downhill gradients - to be able to use engine braking.

before an imminent overtaking manoeuvre - in order to be able to complete it in the saf- est possible way.

Deactivating Eco Coast and returning to engine braking can be performed as follows:

Press the ECO button.

Move the gear lever to manual "S+/" posi- tion.

Changing gear with steering wheel paddles.

Actuate the accelerator or brake pedal.

Eco Coast - Limitations The function is not available if:

cruise control is activated

the road's downhill gradient is steeper than approx. 6%

manual gear changing is performed with the steering wheel paddle shifters*

engine and/or gearbox are not at normal operating temperature

the gear selector is moved from D - to S+/ position

speed is outside the range of approx. 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph).

More information and settings

The car's menu system MY CAR contains further information on the ECO concept - see the sec- tion MY CAR (p. 113).

Related information Economical driving (p. 304)

General information on climate control (p. 122)

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory. 289

Foot brake The foot brake is part of the brake system.

The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If a brake circuit is damaged then the brake pedal will engage deeper and a higher pressure on the pedal is needed to produce the normal braking effect.

The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted by a brake servo.

WARNING The brake servo only works when the engine is running.

If the brake is used when the engine is switched off then the pedal will feel stiff and more force must be used to brake the car.

For cars with the Hill start assist (HSA)* (p. 278)* function, the pedal returns more slowly than usual to normal position if the car is parked on a gradient or on an uneven surface.

In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy load the brakes can be relieved by using engine braking. Engine braking is most efficiently used if the same gear is used downhill as up.

For more general information on heavy loads on the car, Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p. 393).

Braking on wet roads When driving for a long time in heavy rain without braking, the braking effect may be delayed slightly when next using the brakes. This may also be the case after a car wash. It is then nec- essary to depress the brake harder. For this rea- son, maintain a greater distance to the traffic ahead.

Brake the car firmly after driving on wet roads and after a car wash. The brake discs are then warmed up, dry more quickly and are protected against corrosion. Take the prevailing traffic sit- uation into account when braking.

Braking on salted roads When driving on salted roads a layer of salt may form on the brake discs and brake linings. This may extend braking distance. For this reason, keep an extra-large safety distance to the vehicle ahead. Also make sure of the following:

Brake occasionally to remove any layer of salt. Make sure that other road users are not put at risk by the braking.

Gently depress the brake pedal when driving is finished and before the next journey starts.

Maintenance To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible, follow the Volvo service intervals as specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

New and replaced brake linings and brake discs do not provide optimal braking effect until they have been "worn in" a few hundred kilometres. Compensate for the reduced braking effect by depressing the brake pedal harder. Volvo recom- mends only fitting brake linings that are approved for your Volvo.

IMPORTANT

The wear on the brake system's components must be checked regularly.

Contact a workshop for information about the procedure or engage a workshop to carry out the inspection - an authorised Volvo work- shop is recommended.

Symbols in the combined instrument panel

Symbol Specification

Constant glow Check the brake fluid level. If the level is low, fill with brake fluid and check for the cause of the brake fluid loss.

Constant glow for 2 seconds when the engine is started automatic function check.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

290

WARNING

If and illuminate at the same time, there may be a fault in the brake system.

If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is nor- mal at this stage, drive carefully to the nearest workshop and have the brake system checked - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.

If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.

The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated.

Related information Parking brake (p. 291)

Foot brake - emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 290)

Foot brake - emergency brake assistance (p. 291)

Foot brake - anti-lock braking system (p. 290)

Foot brake - anti-lock braking system The anti-lock braking system, ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), prevents the wheels from lock- ing up during braking.

The function allows the steering ability to be maintained, and it is easier to swerve to avoid a hazard for example. Vibration may be felt in the brake pedal when this is engaged and this is nor- mal.

A short test of the ABS system is made automat- ically after the engine has been started when the driver releases the brake pedal. A further auto- matic test of the ABS system may be made at low speed. The test may be experienced as pul- ses in the brake pedal.

Related information Foot brake (p. 289)

Parking brake (p. 291)

Foot brake - emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 290)

Foot brake - emergency brake assistance (p. 291)

Foot brake - emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers Emergency brake lights are activated to alert vehicles behind about heavy braking. The func- tion means that the brake light flashes instead of - as in normal braking - shining with a constant glow.

Emergency brake lights are activated at speeds above 50 km/h (31 mph) if the ABS system is working and/or in the event of heavy braking. After the car's speed has been slowed below 10 km/h (6 mph) the brake light returns from flashing to the normal constant glow - while at the same time the hazard warning flashers(p. 99) are activated, and they flash until the driver accel- erates the car to at least 20 km/h (12 mph) or they are deactivated with their button.

Related information Foot brake (p. 289)

Parking brake (p. 291)

Foot brake - emergency brake assistance (p. 291)

Foot brake - anti-lock braking system (p. 290)

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

291

Foot brake - emergency brake assistance Emergency brake assistance EBA (Emergency Brake Assist) helps to increase the braking force and so reduce the braking distance.

EBA detects the driver's braking style and increa- ses the braking force when necessary. The brake force can be reinforced up to the level when the ABS system is engaged. The EBA function is interrupted when the pressure on the brake pedal is reduced.

NOTE

When EBA is activated the brake pedal low- ers slightly more than usual, depress (hold) the brake pedal as long as necessary. If the brake pedal is released then all braking ceases.

Related information Foot brake (p. 289)

Parking brake (p. 291)

Foot brake - emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 290)

Foot brake - anti-lock braking system (p. 290)

Parking brake The parking brake prevents the car from rolling away from stationary by means of mechanically locking/blocking two wheels.

WARNING Always apply the parking brake when parking on a slope - leaving the car in gear, or in P if it has automatic transmission, is not sufficient to hold the car in all situations.

Combined instrument panel warning symbol.

Applying the parking brake 1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.

2. Pull the lever firmly.

> The combined instrument panel warning symbol comes on. The warning symbol illuminates regardless of whether the parking brake is applied gently or firmly.

3. Release the foot brake pedal and make sure that the car is at a standstill position.

4. If the vehicle moves then the parking brake lever must be applied at least a little more firmly.

When parking the vehicle, always engage 1st gear (for manual gearbox) or put the gear selec- tor in position P (for automatic gearbox).

Parking on a hill If the car is parked facing uphill:

Turn the wheels away from the kerb.

If the car is parked facing downhill:

Turn the wheels towards the kerb.

Disengaging the parking brake 1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.

2. Pull the lever up slightly, press the button, release the lever and release the button.

> The combined instrument panel warning symbol goes off.

If the driver forgets to release the parking brake in addition to the illuminated warning lamp a pinging sound combined with a message in the

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

292

combined instrument panel alerts the driver of this when the car's speed exceeds 10 km/h (6 mph).

Related information Foot brake (p. 289)

Driving in water Driving in water means that the car is driven through deep water on a water-covered road- way. Fording must be carried out with great cau- tion.

The car can be driven through water at a maxi- mum depth of 25 cm at a maximum speed of walking pace. Extra caution must be exercised when passing through flowing water.

During driving in water, maintain a low speed and do not stop the car. When the water has been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly and check that full brake function is achieved. Water and mud for example can make the brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake function.

If necessary, clean the contacts for the elec- tric heater and trailer coupling after driving in water and mud.

Do not let the car stand with water over the sills for any long period of time - this could cause electrical malfunctions.

IMPORTANT

Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter.

In depths greater than 25 cm, water could enter the transmission. This reduces the lubri- cating ability of the oils and shortens the service life of these systems.

Damage to any component, engine, transmis- sion, turbocharger, differential or its internal components caused by flooding, hydrostatic locking or oil shortage, is not covered by the warranty.

In the event of the engine stalling in water, do not try restart - tow the car from the water to a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Risk of engine breakdown.

Related information Recovery (p. 315)

Towing (p. 313)

STARTING AND DRIVING

293

Overheating Under special conditions, for example hard driv- ing in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is a risk that the engine and drive system may overheat - in particular with a heavy load.

For information about overheating when driving with a trailer, see Driving with a trailer (p. 305).

Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front of the grille when driving in hot climates.

If the temperature in the engine's cooling system is too high then a warning symbol is illuminated and a text message High engine temperature Stop safely is shown in the combined instrument panel's information dis- play - stop the car in a safe way and allow the engine to run at idling speed for several minutes in order to cool down.

If the text message High engine temperature Turn off engine or Engine coolant level low Stop safely is shown then the engine must be switched off after stopping the car.

In the event of overheating in the gearbox a built-in protection function is activated, which is indicated in the combined instrument panel with a warning symbol and the text message Transmission hot Reduce speed or Transmission hot Stop safely Wait for cooling - follow the recommenda- tion given and lower the speed and stop the car in a safe way and allow the engine to run

at idling speed for a few minutes in order to allow the gearbox to cool down.

If the car overheats, the air conditioning may be switched off temporarily.

Do not turn the engine off immediately you stop after a hard drive.

NOTE

It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to operate for a time after the engine has been switched off.

Related information Driving with a trailer - manual gearbox

(p. 307)

Driving with a trailer - automatic gearbox (p. 307)

Driving with open tailgate When driving with the tailgate open, toxic exhaust fumes can be sucked into the car through the cargo area.

WARNING Do not drive with an open tailgate! Toxic exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car through the cargo area.

Related information Loading (p. 148)

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.294

Overload - starter battery The electrical functions in the car load the starter battery to varying degrees. Avoid using the key position II when the engine is switched off. Instead use the I mode - which uses less power, see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 81).

Also, be aware of different accessories that load the electrical system. Do not use functions which use a lot of power when the engine is switched off. Examples of such functions are:

ventilation fan

headlamps

windscreen wiper

audio system (high volume).

If the battery voltage is low the information dis- play shows the text Low battery charge Power save mode. The energy-saving function then shuts down certain functions or reduces certain functions such as the ventilation fan and/or audio system.

In which case, charge the starter battery by starting the engine and then running it for at least 15 minutes - battery charging is more effective during driving than running the engine at idling speed while stationary.

Related information Starter battery - general (p. 362)

Preparations for a long trip Before heading off on a driving holiday or taking any other long trip, it is important to carry out an additional check of the car's functions and equipment.

Check that the engine is working normally and that fuel consumption (p. 402) is nor- mal.

Make sure that there are no leaks (fuel, oil or other fluid).

Check all bulbs adjust the headlamp angle if your car is heavily loaded.

Check the tyre tread depth and tyre pres- sures. Change to winter tyres when driving to areas where there is a risk of snowy or icy road surfaces, and take snow chains with you 6.

Make sure that your starter battery is fully charged.

Check that your wiper blades are in good condition.

Carrying a warning triangle (p. 329) is a legal requirement in certain countries.

It may also be advisable to make sure that the map data in the navigation system* is updated, and to check the regulations for loading and for travelling on a car ferry or train, if appropriate.

Related information Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 347)

Spare wheel* (p. 324)

Lamp replacement - general (p. 351)

6 Use Volvo genuine snow chains.

STARTING AND DRIVING

295

Winter driving For winter driving it is important to perform cer- tain checks of the car in order to ensure that it can be driven safely.

Check the following in particular before the cold season:

The engine coolant (p. 396) must contain 50% glycol. This mixture protects the engine against frost erosion down to approximately 35 C. To avoid health risks, different types of glycol must not be mixed.

The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent condensation.

Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate starting in cold weather and also reduce fuel con- sumption while the engine is cold. For more information on suitable oils, see Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p. 393).

IMPORTANT

Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard driving or in hot weather.

The condition of the starter battery and charge level must be inspected. Cold weather places great demands on the starter

battery and its capacity is reduced by the cold.

Use washer fluid (p. 361) to avoid ice form- ing in the washer fluid reservoir.

Slippery driving conditions To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo recom- mends using winter tyres on all wheels if there is a risk of snow or ice.

NOTE

The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement in certain countries. Studded tyres are not permitted in all countries.

Practise driving on slippery surfaces under con- trolled conditions to learn how the car reacts.

Related information Winter tyres (p. 324)

Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing The fuel filler flap can be opened/closed as fol- lows:

Opening/closing the fuel filler flap

Open the fuel filler flap by slightly pressing in the rear part of the hatch.

Take out the flap.

Close the flap after fuelling.

For a description of locking and unlocking the fuel filler flap, see Locking/unlocking - fuel filler flap (p. 174). The fuel filler flap's lock logic also follows the locking or unlocking of the keyless system and the central locking system.

Related information Filling up with fuel (p. 296)

STARTING AND DRIVING

296

Fuel filler flap - manual opening The fuel filler flap can be opened manually when it cannot be opened from outside.

Open/remove the side hatch in the cargo area (same side as fuel filler flap).

Carefully pull the line back in a straight line. The flap can now be opened from outside.

IMPORTANT

Pull the wire gently - minimal force is required to disengage the hatch lock.

Related information Locking/unlocking - fuel filler flap (p. 174)

Filling up with fuel (p. 296)

Filling up with fuel The fuel tank is fitted with a capless fuel filler system. Filling is carried out as follows:

1. Open the fuel filler door.

2. Choose fuel that is approved for use in the car in accordance with the identifier7 on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

See information on approved fuels in the respective section on petrol (p. 297) and diesel (p. 298).

3. Insert the pump nozzle in the fuel filler open- ing. Take care to insert the nozzle properly into the filler pipe. The filler pipe consists of two opening caps. The nozzle must be pushed past both caps before refuelling is started.

4. Do not overfill the tank but stop refuelling when the pump nozzle cuts out the first time.

NOTE

Overfilled fuel in the tank can overflow in hot weather.

NOTE

Avoid spilling by waiting approximately 5-8 seconds before carefully removing the nozzle once refuelling is complete.

Related information Filling with fuel - with a fuel can (p. 300)

Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing (p. 295)

7 The identifier in accordance with the CEN standard EN16942 is located on the inside of the fuel filler flap, and will be on corresponding fuel pumps and their nozzles at filling stations throughout Europe at the latest by the end of 2018.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

297

Fuel - handling Fuel of a lower quality than that recommended by Volvo must not be used as engine power and fuel consumption is negatively affected.

WARNING Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and fuel splashing in the eyes.

In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty of water for at least 15 minutes and seek medi- cal attention.

Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol and diesel are highly toxic and could cause per- manent injury or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical attention immediately if fuel has been swallowed.

WARNING Fuel which spills onto the ground can be igni- ted.

Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star- ting to refuel.

Never carry an activated mobile phone when refuelling. The ring signal could cause spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes, leading to fire and injury.

IMPORTANT

Mixtures of various fuel types or use of fuels which are not recommended will invalidate Volvo's guarantees and any supplementary service agreements; this is applicable to all engines.

NOTE

Extreme weather conditions, driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combina- tion with fuel grade are factors that could affect the car's performance.

Related information Economical driving (p. 304)

Fuel - petrol Petrol is a type of engine fuel that is intended for cars with a petrol engine.

Only use petrol from well-known producers. Never use fuel of dubious quality. The petrol must fulfil the EN 228 standard.

Identifier for petrol The identifier in accordance with the CEN stand- ard EN16942 is located on the inside of the fuel filler flap, and will be on corresponding fuel pumps and their nozzles at filling stations throughout Europe by the end of 2018 at the lat- est.

These are the identifiers that apply for current standard fuels in Europe. Petrol with the following identifiers may be used in cars with petrol engine:

E5 is a petrol with maximum 2.7 % oxygen and maximum 5 volume % ethanol.

E10 is a petrol with maximum 3.7 % oxygen and maximum 10 volume % ethanol.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

298

IMPORTANT

Fuel that contains up to 10 percent by volume ethanol is permitted.

EN 228 E10 petrol (max 10 percent by volume ethanol) is approved for use.

Ethanol higher than E10 (max. 10 percent by volume ethanol) is not permitted, e.g. E85 is not permitted.

Octane rating RON 95 can be used for normal driving.

RON 98 is recommended for optimum per- formance and minimum fuel consumption.

When driving in temperatures above +38 C, fuel with the highest possible octane rating is recom- mended for optimum performance and fuel econ- omy.

IMPORTANT

Use only unleaded petrol to avoid damag- ing the catalytic converter.

Fuel containing metallic additives must not be used.

Do not use any additives which have not been recommended by Volvo.

Related information Economical driving (p. 304)

Fuel - handling (p. 297)

Filling up with fuel (p. 296) Fuel - diesel Diesel is a type of engine fuel that is intended for cars with a diesel engine.

Only use diesel fuel from well-known producers. Never use fuel of dubious quality. Diesel fuel must fulfil the EN 590 or SS 155435 standard. Diesel engines are sensitive to contaminants in the fuel, such as excessively high volumes of sul- phur and metals.

Identifier The identifier in accordance with the CEN stand- ard EN16942 is located on the inside of the fuel filler flap, and will be on corresponding fuel pumps and their nozzles at filling stations throughout Europe by the end of 2018 at the lat- est.

This is the identifier that applies for current standard fuel in Europe. Diesel with the following identifiers may be used in cars with diesel engine:

B7 is diesel with maximum 7 volume % fatty acid methyl ester (FAME).

At low temperatures (lower than 0 C) a paraffin precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which may lead to ignition problems. The fuel qualities that

STARTING AND DRIVING

299

are sold must be adapted for season and climate zone, but in the event of extreme weather condi- tions, old fuel or moving between climate zones, paraffin precipitate may occur.

The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When refu- elling, check that the area around the fuel filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the paint- work. Wash off any spillage with detergent and water.

IMPORTANT

Diesel fuel must:

fulfil the EN 590 and/or SS 155435 standards

have a sulphur content not exceeding 10 mg/kg

have a maximum of 7 vol % FAME8 (B7).

IMPORTANT

Diesel type fuels that must not be used:

Special additives

Marine diesel fuel

Heating oil

FAME9 and vegetable oil.

These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in accordance with Volvo recommendations and generate increased wear and engine damage that is not covered by the Volvo warranty.

Empty tank

Once the engine has stopped due to fuel starva- tion, the fuel system needs a few moments to carry out a check. Before starting the engine after the fuel tank has been filled with diesel - proceed as follows:

1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch and push it in to the end position, see Key positions (p. 80).

2. Press the START button without depressing the brake and/or clutch pedal.

3. Wait approx. one minute.

4. To start the engine: Depress the brake and/or clutch pedal and then press the START button again.

NOTE

Before filling with fuel in the event of fuel shortage:

Stop the car on as flat/level ground as possible - if the car is tilting there is a risk of air pockets in the fuel supply.

Service intervals for fuel filter For optimum performance, it is important to fol- low the service intervals for fuel filter change as well as to use genuine parts developed specifi- cally for this purpose.

Related information Diesel particle filter (DPF) (p. 301)

Emission control with AdBlue (p. 301)

Fuel - handling (p. 297)

Economical driving (p. 304)

8 Fatty Acid Methyl Ester 9 Diesel fuel with maximum 7 vol % FAME (B7) is permitted.

STARTING AND DRIVING

300

Catalytic converters The purpose of the catalytic converters is to purify exhaust gases. They are located close to the engine so that operating temperature is reached quickly.

The catalytic converters consist of a monolith (ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/ rhodium/palladium. These metals act as cata- lysts, i.e. they participate in and accelerate a chemical reaction without being used up them- selves.

Lambda-sondTM oxygen sensor The Lambda-sond is part of a control system intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel economy. For more information, see Fuel con- sumption and CO2 emissions (p. 402).

An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content of the exhaust gases leaving the engine. This value is fed into an electronic system that contin- uously controls the injectors. The ratio of fuel to air directed to the engine is continuously adjusted. These adjustments create optimal con- ditions for efficient combustion, and together with the three-way catalytic converter reduce harmful emissions (hydrocarbons, carbon monoxide and nitrous oxides).

Related information Economical driving (p. 304)

Fuel - petrol (p. 297)

Fuel - diesel (p. 298) Filling with fuel - with a fuel can When filling with fuel (p. 296) from a fuel can, use the funnel located under the floor hatch in the cargo area.

IMPORTANT

Statutory provisions relating to storage of reserve fuel cans in cars vary from country to country. Check what does apply.

Take care to insert the funnel properly into the filler pipe. The filler pipe consists of two opening flaps. The funnel must be pushed past both flaps before filling is started.

Related information Locking/unlocking - fuel filler flap (p. 174)

Fuel filler flap - manual opening (p. 296)

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory. 301

Diesel particle filter (DPF) Diesel cars are equipped with a particle filter, which results in more efficient emission control.

The particles in the exhaust gases are collected in the filter during normal driving. So-called "regeneration" is started in order to burn away the particles and empty the filter. This requires the engine to have reached normal operating temperature.

Filter regeneration takes place automatically and normally takes 10-20 minutes. It may take a little longer at a low average speed. Fuel consumption may increase slightly during regeneration.

Regeneration in cold weather If the car is frequently driven short distances in cold weather then the engine does not reach normal operating temperature. This means that regeneration of the diesel particle filter does not take place and the filter is not emptied.

When the filter has become approximately 80% full of particles, a yellow warning triangle is shown in the combined instrument panel, and the message Soot filter full See manual is shown in the information display.

Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car until the engine reaches normal operating tem- perature, preferably on a main road or motorway. The car should then be driven for approximately 20 minutes more.

NOTE

The following may arise during regeneration:

a smaller reduction of engine power may be noticed temporarily

fuel consumption may increase temporar- ily

a smell of burning may arise.

When regeneration is complete the warning text is cleared automatically.

Use the parking heater* in cold weather so that the engine reaches normal operating tempera- ture more quickly.

IMPORTANT

If the filter is completely filled with particles, it may be difficult to start the engine and the fil- ter is non-functional. Then there is a risk that the filter will need to be replaced.

Related information Fuel - diesel (p. 298)

Economical driving (p. 304)

Emission control with AdBlue10

AdBlue is an additive used in SCR11 systems to reduce harmful emissions from diesel engines.

In the SCR system, AdBlue and the exhaust gas component nitrous oxide are converted into nitro- gen and water vapour, which considerably reduces harmful nitrous oxide emissions.

AdBlue AdBlue is a colourless fluid consisting of 32.5% urea12 in deionised water and is manufactured in accordance with the ISO 22241 standard. It has been specially designed for SCR cleaning tech- nology for diesel engines.

There is a separate AdBlue tank in the car, which is topped up via a filler pipe located beneath the cargo area floor. Consumption is dependent on driving style, external temperature and the sys- tem's operating temperature.

Conditions for driving with AdBlue There must always be AdBlue of the correct quality in the tank to allow the car to start. The SCR system is very sensitive to contamination.

The exhaust gas cleaning system constantly monitors the tank level, quality and dosage of AdBlue. A message is shown in the combined instrument panel if anything is wrong.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

302

IMPORTANT

AdBlue is required for the function of the SCR system and legal emissions compliance. It is illegal to modify or manipulate the AdBlue supply system in any way so that no AdBlue reagent is consumed when it is required for legal exhaust emissions compliance. Any such tampering may be a criminal offence which may lead to legal prosecution actions.

It is not permitted to operate the car with an empty AdBlue tank, since it will no longer be compliant with the legal requirements for exhaust emissions. Therefore, the car is equipped with a warning system to inform when AdBlue refilling is required. When the fill level in the AdBlue tank is getting low, warnings are displayed to inform that AdBlue refilling is required.

Related information Handling AdBlue (p. 302)

AdBlue checking and topping up (p. 303)

Handling AdBlue13

AdBlue is mostly made up of water (approx. 67.5% water and 32.5% urea). This fluid is not flammable, but it should be handled with care as it may irritate the eyes and skin.

To bear in mind when handling Avoid inhaling vapours, and contact with the eyes and skin. Ideally, wear gloves to prevent irritation of sensitive skin when handling the fluid.

WARNING Action for first aid:

For inhalation - get fresh air.

For skin contact - wash the skin with soap and water.

For contact with the eyes - rinse immedi- ately with a lot of water.

For ingestion - rinse the mouth thor- oughly. Do not induce vomiting.

Seek medical attention if the discomfort remains or if a large quantity has been inges- ted.

What to do in the event of spillage Any AdBlue spilt on the ground, the car or pain- ted surfaces must be flushed with copious

amounts of water. Do not allow the fluid to escape into drains.

Storage AdBlue must be stored in tightly closed original packaging at a temperature above 11 C (12 F) and below 30 C (86 F). The fluid must not be stored in direct sunlight.

AdBlue freezes at 11 C (12 F) but can be used again when the solution has thawed.

Related information Emission control with AdBlue (p. 301)

AdBlue checking and topping up (p. 303)

10 Registered trademark belonging to Verband der Automobilindustrie e.V. (VDA). 11 Selective Catalytic Reduction 12 CO(NH2)2 13 Registered trademark belonging to Verband der Automobilindustrie e.V. (VDA).

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

303

AdBlue14 checking and topping up Check the AdBlue level regularly, and top up if a message indicating a low AdBlue Level is dis- played.

Your Volvo workshop can top up AdBlue when servicing your car, but depending on your driving style, it may still need to be topped up between service intervals. You will no longer be able to start the car if the AdBlue tank has been allowed to run empty.

NOTE

Never run the AdBlue tank dry. Fill the tank in good time before it is empty.

If the tank is run dry, it will not be possible to start the engine after it is switched off not the regular way or using aids.

The only way to be able to restart after driving the tank empty is to refill AdBlue of specified quality, with the minimum being the quantity shown in the driver display.

Check the AdBlue level 1. Open the combined instrument panel menu

by pressing OK on the left-hand stalk switch.

2.

Scroll between menu options using the thumbwheel and select AdBlue.

>

AdBlue level graphic: Each cursor represents approx. 25% of a full tank. When less than 25% of tank capacity remains, the amount of AdBlue that can be top- ped up is shown in litres.

Filling When the AdBlue level starts to become low, a symbol comes on in the combined instrument panel and a mes- sage is displayed.

14 Registered trademark belonging to Verband der Automobilindustrie e.V. (VDA).

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.304

1.

Move the cargo area floor and carpet out of the way.

Open the blue lid for the AdBlue tank's filler pipe.

2. Top up with AdBlue of the correct quality15.

Do not overfill the tank. The amount of AdBlue that you can add is shown in the dis- play.

IMPORTANT

Wipe away any spilled AdBlue.

Exercise caution to prevent AdBlue from coming into contact with the car's paintwork. If it does, rinse with plenty of water since the fluid can affect the paintwork.

Related information Tank volume for AdBlue (p. 400)

Handling AdBlue (p. 302)

Emission control with AdBlue (p. 301)

Economical driving Drive economically and in a more eco-friendly way by driving smoothly, thinking ahead, and adjusting your driving style and speed to the pre- vailing conditions.

Use the combined instrument panel's ECO Guide* (p. 70) which indicates how fuel-effi- ciently the car is being driven.

For lower fuel consumption, activate Drive mode ECO16.

Use the Eco Coast freewheel function in drive mode ECO engine braking will cease and the car's kinetic energy can be used to freewheel for longer distances.

When driving with manual gearing drive in the highest gear possible, adapted to the current traffic situation and road - lower

15 ISO 22241 16 Applies to automatic gearbox.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory. 305

engine speeds result in lower fuel consump- tion. Use the gear shift indicator (p. 274)17.

Drive at a steady speed and keep a good dis- tance to other vehicles and objects to mini- mise braking.

High speed results in increased fuel con- sumption - the wind resistance increases with speed.

The trip computer's instantaneous fuel con- sumption indication may help you to drive more economically.

Do not run the engine to operating tempera- ture at idling speed, but rather drive with a normal load right after starting - a cold engine consumes more fuel than a warm one.

If possible, avoid using the car for driving short distances. The engine does not have time to reach normal operating temperature, which contributes to increased fuel con- sumption.

Drive with the correct air pressure in the tyres and check this regularly - select ECO tyre pressure for best results, see Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 410).

Choice of tyres can affect fuel consumption - seek advice on suitable tyres from a dealer.

Remove unnecessary items from the car - the greater the load the higher the fuel con- sumption.

Use engine braking to slow down, when it can take place without risk to other road users.

A roof load and space box increase air resis- tance, leading to higher fuel consumption - remove the load carriers when not in use.

Avoid driving with open windows.

For more information, see Environmental philoso- phy (p. 22) and Fuel consumption and CO2 emis- sions (p. 402).

WARNING Never switch off the engine while moving, such as downhill, this deactivates important systems such as the power steering and brake servo.

Related information Drive mode ECO* (p. 287)

Driving with a trailer When driving with a trailer there are a number of important points to remember regarding e.g. the towbar, the trailer and how the load is positioned in the trailer.

Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's pay- load by a corresponding weight. For more detailed information, see Weights (p. 388).

If the towbar is mounted by Volvo, then the car is delivered with the necessary equipment for driv- ing with a trailer.

The car's towbar must be of an approved type.

If the towbar is retrofitted, check with your Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped for driving with a trailer.

Distribute the load on the trailer so that the weight on the towbar complies with the specified maximum towball load.

Increase the tyre pressure to the recom- mended pressure for a full load. For informa- tion on the tyre pressure, see Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 410).

The engine is loaded more heavily than usual when driving with a trailer.

17 Applies to manual gearbox.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.306

Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is brand new. Wait until it has been driven at least 1000 km.

The brakes are loaded much more than usual on long and steep downhill slopes. Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your speed.

For safety reasons, the maximum permitted speed for the car when coupled with a trailer should not be exceeded. Follow the regula- tions in force for the permitted speeds and weights.

Maintain a low speed when driving with a trailer up long, steep ascents.

Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more than 12%.

Trailer cable An adapter is required if the car's towbar has a 13 pin connector and the trailer has a 7 pin con- nector. Use an adapter cable approved by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag on the ground.

Direction indicators and brake lights on the trailer If any of the trailer's lamps for direction indicators are broken, the symbol for direction indicators in the combined instrument panel flashes faster than normal and the information display shows the text Trailer indicator malfunction.

If any of the trailer's lamps for the brake light are broken then the Trailer brake light malfunction text is shown.

Level control* The rear shock absorbers maintain a constant height irrespective of the car's load (up to the maximum permissible weight). When the car is stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly, which is normal.

Trailer weights For information on Volvo's permitted trailer weights, see Towing capacity and towball load (p. 389).

NOTE

The stated maximum permitted trailer weights are those permitted by Volvo. National vehicle regulations can further limit trailer weights and speeds. Towbars can be certified for higher towing weights than the car can actually tow.

WARNING Follow the stated recommendations for trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer may be difficult to control in the event of sudden movement and braking.

Related information Towbar* (p. 308)

Lamp replacement - general (p. 351)

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory. 307

Driving with a trailer - manual gearbox When driving with a trailer (p. 305) in hilly terrain in a hot climate there may be a risk of overheat- ing.

Do not run the engine at higher revolutions than 4500 rpm (diesel engines: 3500 rpm) - otherwise the oil temperature may become too high.

Related information Manual gearbox (p. 273)

Driving with a trailer - automatic gearbox When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot climate there may be a risk of overheating.

An automatic gearbox selects the optimum gear related to load and engine speed.

In the event of overheating, a warning symbol is illuminated in the combined instrument panel and a text message is shown in the information display - follow the recommenda- tion given.

Steep inclines Do not lock the automatic transmission in a

higher gear than the engine "can cope with" - it is not always a good idea to drive at a high gear with low engine revolutions.

Parking on a hill 1. Depress the foot brake.

2. Activate the parking brake.

3. Move the gear selector to position P.

4. Release the foot brake.

Move the gear selector to park position P when parking an automatic car with a hitched trailer. Always use the parking brake.

Block the wheels with chocks when parking a car with hitched trailer on a hill.

Starting on a hill 1. Depress the foot brake.

2. Move the gear selector to driving position D.

3. Release the parking brake.

4. Release the foot brake and start driving off.

Related information Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 274)

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.308

Towbar* A towbar means that it is possible to e.g. tow a trailer behind the car.

If the car is equipped with a removable towbar, the installation instructions for the loose section must be followed carefully, see Detachable tow- bar* - attachment/removal (p. 310).

WARNING If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable towbar:

Follow the installation instructions care- fully.

The detachable section must be locked with the key before setting off.

Check that the indicator window shows green.

Important checks The towbar's towball must be cleaned and

greased regularly.

WARNING The moving parts of the detachable towbar must not be lubricated/oiled. This may reduce safety.

NOTE

When a hitch with a vibration damper is used, the towball must not be lubricated.

This also applies when fitting a bicycle rack that is clamped in around the towball.

Related information Driving with a trailer (p. 305)

Detachable towbar* - specifications (p. 309)

Detachable towbar* - storage (p. 308)

Detachable towbar* - storage Store the detachable towbar in the cargo area.

The detachable towbar must be stored in the foam block18 under the cargo area floor when not in use.

IMPORTANT

Always remove the detachable towbar after use and store it in the designated location in the car.

Related information Detachable towbar* - specifications (p. 309)

Detachable towbar* - attachment/removal (p. 310)

Driving with a trailer (p. 305)

18 The figure is schematic, the foam block may have different appearances depending on the car's equipment.

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory. 309

Detachable towbar* - specifications Specifications for detachable towbar.

G 0 2 1 4 8 5

Dimensions, mounting points (mm)

A 887

B 79

C 881

D 441

E 109

F 306

G Side member

H Ball centre

Related information Detachable towbar* - attachment/removal

(p. 310)

Detachable towbar* - storage (p. 308)

Driving with a trailer (p. 305)

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.310

Detachable towbar* - attachment/ removal The attachment and removal of the detachable towbar is performed in the following way:

Attaching

Remove the protective cover by first pressing

in the catch and then pulling the cover

straight back .

G 0 2 1 4 8 7

Ensure that the mechanism is in the unlocked position by turning the key clock- wise.

G 0 2 1 4 8 8

The indicator window must show red.

G 0 2 1 4 8 9

Insert the towball section until you hear a click.

G 0 2 1 4 9 0

The indicator window must show green.

G 0 0 0 0 0 0

Turn the key anticlockwise to locked position. Remove the key from the lock.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory. 311

G 0 2 1 4 9 4

Check that the towball section is secure by pulling it up, down and back.

WARNING If the towball is not fitted correctly then it must be detached and reattached in accord- ance with the previous instructions.

IMPORTANT

Only grease in the ball for the towball hitch, the remainder of the towbar must be clean and dry.

NOTE

When a hitch with a vibration damper is used, the towball must not be lubricated.

G 0 2 1 4 9 5

Safety cable.

WARNING Take care to secure the trailer's safety cable in the intended bracket.

Removal of removable towbar

Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the unlocked position.

Push in the locking wheel and turn it

anticlockwise until you hear a click.

Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it comes to a stop. Hold it in this position while pulling the towball rearward and upward.

WARNING Secure the detachable towbar safely if it is stored in the car, see Detachable towbar* - storage (p. 308).

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.312

Push the protective cover until it snaps tight.

Related information Detachable towbar* - storage (p. 308)

Detachable towbar* - specifications (p. 309)

Driving with a trailer (p. 305)

Trailer Stability Assist - TSA19

The trailer stability assist TSA (Trailer Stability Assist) function is designed to stabilise the car and trailer combination if it begins to snake.

TSA- the function is included in the stability sys-

tem (p. 184) ESC20.

Function The snaking phenomenon can occur with any car/trailer combination. Snaking normally occurs at high speeds. But, there is a risk of it occurring at lower speeds if the trailer is overloaded or the load is improperly distributed, e.g. too far back.

In order for snaking to occur, there must be a triggering factor, e.g.:

Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and powerful side wind.

Car with trailer drives on an uneven road sur- face or in a pothole.

Sweeping steering wheel movements.

Operation If snaking has started, it could be difficult or even impossible to suppress. This makes the car/ trailer combination difficult to control and there is a risk that you could, for example, end up in the wrong lane or leave the carriageway.

The trailer stability assist function continually monitors car movements, particularly lateral movements. If snaking is detected, the front wheels are individually braked. This serves to sta- bilise the car/trailer combination. This is often enough to help the driver regain control of the car.

If snaking is not eliminated the first time the TSA system comes into action, the car/trailer combi- nation is braked with all wheels and engine power is reduced. Once snaking has been gradu- ally suppressed and the car/trailer combination is once again stable, the TSA system stops regulat- ing and the driver once again has full control of the car. For more information, see Electronic sta- bility control (ESC) - general (p. 184).

Miscellaneous Engagement of the TSA system may take place at higher speeds.

NOTE

TSA function is switched off if the driver selects Sport mode, see Electronic stability control (ESC) - general (p. 184).

TSA may fail to engage if the driver uses severe steering wheel movements to try to rectify the snaking because in such a situation the TSA sys-

19 Included in the installation of Volvo genuine towbar. 20 (Electronic Stability Control) - Electronic stability control.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

313

tem cannot determine whether it is the trailer or the driver that is causing the snaking.

The ESC20 symbol in the combined instrument panel flashes when the TSA system is working.

Related information Electronic stability control (ESC) - general

(p. 184)

Towing During towing, one vehicle is towed by another vehicle using a tow rope.

Find out the statutory maximum speed limit for towing before the towing begins.

1. Activate the car's hazard warning flashers.

2. Attach the tow rope in the towing eye.

3. Unlock the steering lock (p. 271) by inserting the remote control key in the ignition switch and giving a long press on the START/ STOP ENGINE button - key position II (p. 81) is activated.

4. The remote control key must remain in the ignition switch while the car is being towed.

5. Keep the towline taut when the towing vehi- cle reduces speed by holding your foot gen- tly pressed on the brake pedal - thereby avoiding unnecessary jerking.

6. Be prepared to brake to stop.

WARNING

Check that the steering lock is unlocked before towing.

The remote control key must be in key position II - in position I all airbags are deactivated.

Never remove the remote control key from the ignition switch when the car is being towed.

WARNING The brake servo and power steering do not work when the engine is switched off - the brake pedal needs to be depressed about 5 times more heavily and the steering is considerably heavier than normal.

Manual gearbox Prior to towing:

Move gear lever into neutral and release the parking brake.

20 (Electronic Stability Control) - Electronic stability control.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.314

Automatic gearbox Geartronic

IMPORTANT

Note that the car must always be towed with the wheels rolling forward.

Do not tow cars with automatic transmis- sion at speeds higher than 80 km/h (50 mph) or for distances in excess of 80 km (50 miles).

Prior to towing:

Move the gear selector to neutral position and release the parking brake.

Jump starting Do not tow the car to bump start the engine. Use a donor battery if the starter battery is discharged and the engine does not start, see Jump starting (p. 271).

IMPORTANT

The catalytic converter may be damaged dur- ing attempts to tow-start the engine.

Related information Hazard warning flashers (p. 99)

Towing eye (p. 314)

Towing eye Use the towing eye for towing a vehicle. The towing eye is screwed into a threaded socket behind a cover on the right-hand side of the bumper, front or rear.

Attaching the towing eye

1. Take out the towing eye that is stored in the foam block under the cargo area floor.

2. The cover for the towing eye's attachment point is opened as follows:

The cover has a marking along one side or in a corner: Press the marking with a finger and fold out the opposite side/ corner at the same time - the cover turns around its axis and can then be removed.

3. Screw the towing eye right in up to its flange. Turn in the towing eye firmly e.g. using the wheel wrench*.

IMPORTANT

The towing eye is only designed for towing on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.

Removal 1. Unscrew and remove the towing eye after

use. Place the towing eye back in its position in the foam block.

2. Refit the cover on the bumper.

Related information Towing (p. 313)

Recovery (p. 315)

STARTING AND DRIVING

315

Recovery Recovery means that the vehicle is transported away by means of another vehicle.

Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.

IMPORTANT

Note that the car must always be transported with the wheels rolling forward.

Related information Towing (p. 313)

WHEELS AND TYRES

WHEELS AND TYRES

318

Tyres - maintenance Amongst other things, the function of the tyres is to carry load, provide grip on the road surface, dampen vibration and protect the wheel from wear.

Driving characteristics Tyres greatly affect the car's driving characteris- tics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pressure and speed rating are important for how the car performs.

Tyre age All tyres older than 6 years old should be checked by an expert even if they seem undam- aged. Tyres age and decompose, even if they are hardly ever or never used. The function can therefore be affected. This applies to all tyres that are stored for future use. Examples of external signs which indicate that the tyre is unsuitable for use are cracks or discoloration.

New tyres

Tyres are perishable. After a few years they begin to harden at the same time as the friction capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate. For this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as possible when you replace them. This is especially impor- tant with regard to winter tyres. The last four dig- its in the sequence mean the week and year of manufacture. This is the tyre's DOT marking (Department of Transportation), and this is stated with four digits, for example 1510. The tyre in the figure was manufactured in week 15 of 2010.

Summer and winter wheels When summer and winter wheels are changed the wheels should be marked with which side of the car they were mounted on, for example L for left and R for right.

Wear and maintenance Correct tyre pressure (p. 320) results in more even wear. Driving style, tyre pressure, climate and road condition affect how quickly your tyres age and wear. To avoid differences in tread depth and to prevent wear patterns (p. 320) arising, the front and rear wheels can be switched with each other. A suitable distance for the first change is approx. 5000 km and then at 10000 km inter- vals. Volvo recommends the an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted for checking if you are uncertain about tread depth. If significant differ- ences in wear (> 1 mm difference in tread depth) between tyres have already occurred, then the least worn tyres must always be fitted on the rear. Understeer is normally easier to correct than oversteer, and leads to the car continuing for- wards in a straight line rather than having the rear end skidding to one side, resulting in possi- ble complete loss of control over the car. This is why it is important for the rear wheels never to lose grip before the front wheels.

Wheels with tyres fitted must be stored lying down or hanging up - never standing up.

WARNING A damaged tyre may lead to loss of control over the car.

WHEELS AND TYRES

319

Related information Tyres - dimensions (p. 321)

Tyres - speed ratings (p. 322)

Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 319)

Tyres - direction of rotation Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed to only turn in one direction have the direction of rotation marked with an arrow.

G 0 2 1 7 7 8

The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.

The tyre must always rotate in the same direction throughout its lifespan. Tyres should only be switched between front and rear positions, never between left and right-hand sides, or vice versa. If the tyres are fitted incorrectly, the car's braking characteristics and capacity to force rain and slush out of the way are adversely affected. Tyres with the greatest tread depth should always be fitted to the rear of the car (to decrease the risk of skidding).

NOTE

Make sure that both pairs of wheels have the same type and dimension, and also the same make.

Follow the recommended tyre pressure (p. 320) specified in the tyre pressure table.

Related information Tyres - dimensions (p. 321)

Tyres - speed ratings (p. 322)

Tyres - maintenance (p. 318)

Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 320)

WHEELS AND TYRES

320

Tyres - tread wear indicators Tread wear indicators show the status of the tyre's tread depth.

G 0 2 1 8 2 9

Tread wear indicators.

A tread wear indicators is a narrow elevation across the longitudinal grooves of the tyre's tread pattern. On the side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread Wear Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth is down to 1.6 mm, the tread will be level in height with the tread wear indicators. Change to new tyres as soon as possible. Remember that tyres with little tread depth provide very poor grip in rain and snow.

Related information Tyres - speed ratings (p. 322)

Tyres - air pressure (p. 320)

Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 319)

Tyres - air pressure Tyres can have different air pressures which are measured in bar.

Check the air pressure in the tyres The air pressure for the tyres should be checked every month and should be checked on cold tyres. "Cold tyres" means the tyres are the same temperature as the ambient temperature. After several few kilometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the pressure increases.

Inadequate tyre pressure increases fuel con- sumption, shortens tyre lifespan and impairs the car's driving characteristics. Driving on tyres with tyre pressure that is too low could result in the tyres overheating and being damaged. Tyre pres- sure affects travelling comfort, road noise and driving characteristics.

NOTE

Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also var- ies depending on ambient temperature.

Tyre pressure label

G 0 2 1 8 3 0

The tyre pressure label on the driver's side door pillar (between frame and rear door) shows which pressure the tyres should have at different loads and speed conditions. This is also specified in the tyre pressure table.

Tyre pressure for the car's recommended tyre dimension and information about ECO pressure that results in improved fuel economy can be found in the printed owner's manual.

NOTE

Temperature differences change the tyre pressure.

Fuel economy, ECO pressure When carrying a light load (max. 3 people) and at speeds of up to 160 km/h (100 mph), the ECO

WHEELS AND TYRES

}}

321

pressure can be selected to give the best possi- ble fuel economy. If the best possible noise and travelling comfort conditions are sought, the lower comfort pressures are recommended instead.

(See approved tyre pressures(p. 410).)

Related information Tyres - speed ratings (p. 322)

Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 319)

Tyres - maintenance (p. 318)

Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 320)

Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 410)

Wheel and wheel rim dimensions Wheel and rim dimensions are designated in accordance with the examples in the table below.

The car has an approval for the complete vehicle. This means that there are certain combinations of wheels and tyres that are approved.

For information about approved dimensions, see Wheels and tyres - approved dimensions (p. 406).

Wheels (rims) have a designation of dimensions, for example: 7Jx16x50.

7 Rim width in inches

J Rim flange profile

16 Rim diameter in inches

50 Off-set in mm (distance from wheel cen- tre to wheel contact surface against the hub)

Related information Wheel nuts (p. 323)

Tyres - dimensions The car's tyres have a certain dimension, see the examples in the table below.

The dimensions are stated on all car tyres. Exam- ple of designation:215/55R16 97W.

205 Tyre width (mm)

50 Ratio between tyre wall height and tyre width (%)

R Radial ply

17 Rim diameter in inches (")

93 Codes for the maximum permitted tyre load, load index (p. 322) (LI)

W Speed rating for maximum permitted speed, speed rating (p. 322) (SS). (In this case 270 km/h (168 mph)).

The car has an approval for the complete vehicle with certain combinations of wheel rims and tyres.

For information about approved dimensions, see Wheels and tyres - approved dimensions (p. 406).

Related information Tyres - air pressure (p. 320)

Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 319)

WHEELS AND TYRES

322

Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 320)

Load index and speed rating (p. 408)

Tyres - load index Load index indicates a tyre's ability to carry a certain load.

Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a load, a load index (LI). The car's weight determines the load capacity required of the tyres.

Minimum permitted index is specified in the load index table, see Load index and speed rating (p. 408).

Related information Tyres - dimensions (p. 321)

Tyres - speed ratings (p. 322)

Tyres - air pressure (p. 320)

Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 320)

Tyres - speed ratings Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum speed and therefore belongs to a particular speed rating (SS - Speed Symbol).

Tyre speed class must at least correspond with the car's top speed. The table below indicates the maximum permitted speed that applies for each speed rating (SS). The only exception to these conditions is winter tyres (p. 324) (both those with metal studs and those without), where a lower speed rating may be used. If such a tyre is chosen, the car must not be driven faster than the speed rating of the tyre (for example, class Q can be driven at a maximum of 160 km/h (100 mph)). Traffic regulations determine how fast a car can be driven, not the speed rating of the tyres.

NOTE

The maximum permitted speed is specified in the table.

Q 160 km/h (100 mph) (only used on win- ter tyres)

T 190 km/h (118 mph)

H 210 km/h (130 mph)

V 240 km/h (149 mph)

WHEELS AND TYRES

* Option/accessory. 323

W 270 km/h (168 mph)

Y 300 km/h (186 mph)

WARNING The car must be fitted with tyres which have the same or a higher load index (p. 322) (LI) and speed rating (SS) than specified. If a tyre with too low a load index or speed rating is used, it may overheat.

Related information Tyres - dimensions (p. 321)

Tyres - air pressure (p. 320)

Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 319)

Wheel nuts Wheel nuts are used to fasten the wheels at the hubs and are available in different versions.

Standard wheel nuts

Bulge acorn wheel nuts

Locking wheel nuts

Tightening torque Type 1 wheel nut (steel wheel rim): 110

Nm

Type 2 wheel nut (aluminium wheel rim): 130 Nm

Type 3 Lockable wheel nut (steel/alumi- nium wheel rim): 110 Nm

Only use rims that are tested and approved by Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accessories. Check the torque with a torque wrench.

Locking wheel nuts* Locking wheel nuts can be used on both alumi- nium and steel rims. Under the cargo area floor there is space for the sleeve for the lockable wheel nuts.

Related information Wheel and wheel rim dimensions (p. 321)

WHEELS AND TYRES

* Option/accessory.324

Winter tyres Winter tyres are tyres that are adapted for winter road conditions.

Winter tyres Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent on engine variant. When driving on winter tyres, the correct type of tyres must be fitted to all four wheels.

NOTE

Volvo recommends that you consult a Volvo dealer about which wheel rim and tyre types are most suitable.

Studded tyres Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for 500-1000 km so the studs settle properly into the tyres. This gives the tyre, and especially the studs, a longer service life.

NOTE

The legal provisions for the use of studded tyres vary from country to country.

Tread depth Road conditions with ice, slush and low tempera- tures place considerably higher demands on tyres than summer conditions. Volvo therefore recom-

mends not to drive on winter tyres that have a tread depth of less than 4 mm.

Using snow chains Snow chains may only be used on the front wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars). Never drive faster than 50 km/h (30 mph) with snow chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this wears out both the snow chains and tyres.

WARNING Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equivalent chains designed for the car model, and tyre and rim dimensions. In the event of uncer- tainty Volvo recommends that you consult an authorised Volvo workshop. The wrong snow chains may cause serious damage to your car and lead to an accident.

Related information Changing wheels - removing wheels (p. 326)

Spare wheel* A spare wheel (Temporary spare) is used to tem- porarily replace a punctured normal wheel.

A spare wheel is only intended for use temporar- ily and must be replaced by a normal wheel as soon as possible. The car's handling may be altered by the use of a spare wheel. The spare wheel is smaller than the normal wheel. The car's ground clearance is affected accordingly. Pay attention to high kerbs and do not machine wash the car. If the spare wheel is fitted on the front axle, you cannot use snow chains at the same time. On all-wheel drive cars the drive on the rear axle can be disconnected. The spare wheel must not be repaired. The correct tyre pressure for the spare wheel is stated in the tyre pressure table, Tyres - air pressure (p. 320).

IMPORTANT

Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph) with a spare wheel on the car.

The car must never be driven fitted with more than one "Temporary Spare" wheel.

Related information Changing wheels - removing wheels (p. 326)

Changing wheels - fitting (p. 328)

Changing wheels - taking out the spare wheel* (p. 325)

Jack* (p. 330)

WHEELS AND TYRES

* Option/accessory. 325

Warning triangle (p. 329)

Wheel nuts (p. 323)

Changing wheels - taking out the spare wheel* The spare wheel* plus jack* and wheel wrench* are stored under the floor in the cargo area.

1. Lift the rear edge of the luggage compart- ment floor (or on models with a jointed lug- gage compartment floor, take hold of the luggage compartment floor handle, lift and move the rear part of the floor forwards).

2. Lift out the storage compartment* (only mod- els with a jointed cargo area floor).

3. Lift out the lower floor (models with a jointed luggage compartment floor only).

4. Undo the attaching screw and lift out the foam block containing the jack and tools.

5. Take hold of the far end of the spare wheel, then lift. Push the spare wheel forwards slightly and lift it out of the storage compart- ment.

Related information Changing wheels - removing wheels (p. 326)

Changing wheels - fitting (p. 328)

Jack* (p. 330)

Spare wheel* (p. 324)

Warning triangle (p. 329)

Wheel nuts (p. 323)

WHEELS AND TYRES

* Option/accessory.326

Changing wheels - removing wheels The car's wheels can be changed, e.g. to winter wheels or a spare wheel.

Set up the warning triangle (p. 329) if a wheel must be changed in a trafficked location. The car and jack(p. 330)* must be on a firm horizontal surface.

1. Apply the parking brake, (p. 291) and engage reverse gear, or position P if the car has an automatic gearbox.

WARNING Check that the jack is not damaged, that the threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is free from dirt.

NOTE

Volvo recommends only using the jack* that belongs to the car model in question, which is indicated on the jack's label.

The decal also indicates the jack's maximum lift capacity at a specified lifting height.

2. Take out the wheel to be fitted as well as the tools. If it is a spare wheel being fitted then there is a package in its location containing gloves and a plastic bag for the punctured wheel.

3. Place chocks in front of and behind the wheels which will remain on the ground to prevent them from rolling. Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones for example.

4. Cars with steel rims have removable wheel covers. Use the removal tool to hook in and pull off any full-wheel wheel covers. Alterna- tively, the wheel covers can be pulled away by hand.

5. Screw together the towing eye with the wheel wrench* to the stop position.

Wheel wrench and towing eye.

IMPORTANT

The towing eye must be screwed into all threads in the wheel wrench*.

WHEELS AND TYRES

* Option/accessory. 327

6. Remove the plastic caps from the wheel nuts with the intended tool.

7. Loosen the wheel nuts -1 turn anticlock- wise with the wheel wrench*.

WARNING Never position anything between the ground and the jack, nor between the jack and the car's jacking point.

8. There are two jacking points on each side of the car. Wind up the jack* so that the flange in the bodywork ends up in the notch in the head of the jack.

IMPORTANT

The ground under the jack must be firm, smooth and level.

9. Lift the car so that the wheel is free. Remove the wheel nuts and lift off the wheel.

WARNING Never crawl under the car when it is raised on the jack.

Passengers must leave the car when it is raised on the jack. If a wheel must be changed in a trafficked environment, passen- gers must stand in a safe place.

Related information Changing wheels - fitting (p. 328)

Changing wheels - taking out the spare wheel* (p. 325)

Spare wheel* (p. 324)

Warning triangle (p. 329)

Wheel nuts (p. 323)

WHEELS AND TYRES

328

Changing wheels - fitting It is important that the procedure for fitting the wheel is carried out correctly.

Installation

WARNING Never crawl under the car when it is raised on the jack.

Passengers must leave the car when it is raised on the jack. If a wheel must be changed in a trafficked environment, passen- gers must stand in a safe place.

1. Clean the contact surfaces between wheel and hub.

2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel nuts thoroughly.

3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot rotate.

4. Tighten the wheel nuts crosswise. It is impor- tant that the wheel nuts are tightened with the correct tightening torque. Check the tor- que with a torque wrench.

5. Refit the plastic caps on the wheel nuts.

6.

Refit any full wheel covers.

NOTE

The wheel cover outlet for the valve must be positioned over the valve on the wheel rim during fitting.

Returning the tools to their places After using the tools they must be returned to their correct places in the foam block.

If the spare wheel has been used then the punc- tured wheel can be placed in the plastic bag con- tained in the package with the gloves. Return the foam block to its place and press the retaining screw down into the floor of the storage compart- ment.

WHEELS AND TYRES

* Option/accessory. 329

IMPORTANT

The tools and jack* must be stored in the intended location in the car's cargo area when not in use.

NOTE

After a tyre has been inflated, always refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.

Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew.

When changing to another tyre dimension Contact an authorised Volvo workshop to update the software each time the tyre dimension is changed. A software download may be necessary both when changing to larger and smaller dimen- sions, and also when switching between summer and winter wheels.

Related information Changing wheels - taking out the spare

wheel* (p. 325)

Changing wheels - removing wheels (p. 326)

Spare wheel* (p. 324)

Warning triangle (p. 329)

Wheel nuts (p. 323)

Warning triangle The warning triangle is used to warn other road users of a stationary vehicle.

Storage and folding up

Lift the floor hatch (or push the rear part of the luggage compartment floor forwards in models with a jointed floor and then lift the lower floor) and remove the warning triangle.

Take the warning triangle from the case, fold out and assemble the two loose sides.

Fold out the warning triangle's support legs.

Follow the regulations for the use of a warning triangle. Position the warning triangle in a suita- ble place with regard to traffic.

Ensure the warning triangle and its case are properly secured in the cargo area after use.

Related information Spare wheel* (p. 324)

WHEELS AND TYRES

* Option/accessory.330

Jack* Use the jack to raise the car when changing a wheel.

Only use the original jack when fitting a spare wheel or when changing between summer and winter wheels. The jack's thread must always be well greased.

IMPORTANT

The tools and jack* must be stored in the intended location in the car's cargo area when not in use.

NOTE

The normal car jack is only designed for occa- sional, short-term use, such as when chang- ing a wheel after a puncture, changing to win- ter/summer wheels, etc. Only the jack for the specific car model may be used to raise the car. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or for a longer time than is required just to change a wheel, use of a garage jack is rec- ommended. In this instance, follow the instructions for use that come with the equip- ment.

Related information Warning triangle (p. 329)

Emergency puncture repair* (p. 332)

First aid kit* The first aid box contains first aid equipment.

A case containing first aid equipment is located on the left-hand side of the cargo area.

Tyre monitoring (TM)*1

The TM (Tyre Monitor) system senses the rota- tion speed of the tyres in order to determine whether they have the correct tyre pressure.

System description If the tyre pressure is too low, the tyre's diameter is changed and, as a result, so is its rotation speed. By comparing the tyres with each other the system can determine whether one or more tyres have pressure that is too low.

The system does not replace normal tyre mainte- nance.

Messages If the tyre pressure is too low then an indicator

symbol ( ) illuminates in the combined instru- ment panel and one of the following messages is shown:

Tyre pressure low Check, adjust and calibrate

Tyre pressure system Service required

Tyre pressure system Currently unavailable

WHEELS AND TYRES

}}

331

IMPORTANT

If a fault occurs in the TM system the indica-

tor symbol in the combined instrument panel will flash for approx. 1 minute and then illuminate with a constant glow. A message is also shown in the combined instrument panel.

Deleting the messages 1. Check the tyre pressure in all tyres with a

tyre pressure gauge.

2. Inflate the tyre/tyres to the correct pressure in accordance with the tyre pressure label on the driver's side door pillar (between front and rear doors).

3. Recalibrate the TM system in MY CAR.

NOTE

To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the pressure should be checked on cold tyres. "Cold tyres" means the tyres are the same temperature as the ambient temperature (approx. 3 hours after the car has been driven). After a few kil- ometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the pressure increases.

WARNING

Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to tyre failure, which could result in the driver losing control of the car.

The system cannot indicate sudden tyre damage in advance.

TM calibration In order for TM system to work correctly, a refer- ence value for the tyre pressure must be deter- mined. This must be done each time the tyres are changed or the tyre pressure is adjusted by reca- librating the system in MY CAR.

For example, the tyre pressure should be adjusted when driving with a heavy load or for high-speed driving (above 160 km/h (100 mph)). Following which, the system must be recalibrated.

Recalibration Settings are made using the centre console's controls, see MY CAR (p. 113).

1. Stop the engine.

2. Inflate all tyres to the desired pressure in accordance with the tyre pressure label on the driver's side door pillar (between front and rear doors).

Or see the tyre pressure table.

3. Start the engine and let the car stand still.

4. Open the menu system MY CAR and select the menu Tyre monitor.

5. Select Start calibration and press OK.

6. Press OK after all tyres have been checked and adjusted in order to start calibration.

7. Drive the car.

> Calibration is performed when the car is driven at a speed above 35 km/h (22 mph). Calibration is interrupted tem- porarily if the engine is switched off, but is resumed automatically in the background when the car is driven again. The system provides no confirmation when the cali- bration is complete.

The new reference value applies until steps 1-7 are repeated.

NOTE

Remember that the TM system must be reca- librated at each tyre change or if the tyre pressure is adjusted. If new reference values are not stored then the system cannot func- tion properly.

1 Standard in certain markets.

||

WHEELS AND TYRES

* Option/accessory.332

NOTE

After a tyre has been inflated, always refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.

Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew.

System and tyre status The current status of the system and the tyres can be checked in the centre console's screen.

1. Open the menu system MY CAR.

2. Select the Tyre monitor menu.

> Status for tyre pressures is shown with a colour code.

The status is colour-coded for each tyre in accordance with the following:

All-green: the system is operating normally and the tyre pressure in all tyres is slightly above the recommended level.

Yellow wheel: corresponding tyre's pressure is too low.

All wheels yellow: two or more tyres have pressure that is too low.

All wheels grey and the message Tyre pressure system Currently unavailable: the tyre pressure system is temporarily deac- tivated. It may be necessary to drive the car

for a short time above 35 km/h (22 mph) before the system becomes active again.

All wheels grey and the message Tyre pressure system Service required: an error has occurred in the system. Contact a Volvo dealer or workshop.

Related information Tyres - air pressure (p. 320)

Emergency puncture repair* The emergency puncture repair kit, Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK), is used to seal a puncture and check and adjust the air pressure.

The emergency puncture repair kit consists of a compressor and a bottle of sealant. The sealing works as a temporary repair. The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punctured in the tread.

The emergency puncture repair kit has limited capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in the wall. Do not use the puncture repair kit on tyres that have larger slits, cracks or similar damage.

NOTE

The emergency puncture repair kit is only intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in the tread.

NOTE

The compressor for temporary emergency puncture repair has been tested and approved by Volvo.

WHEELS AND TYRES

}}

* Option/accessory. 333

Location The puncture repair kit is located in the foam block2 under the floor in the cargo area.

Version 1.

Version 2.

Related information Emergency puncture repair* - operation

(p. 334)

Emergency puncture repair* - rechecking (p. 336)

Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview (p. 333)

Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview Overview of the component parts of the emer- gency puncture repair kit, Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK).

The parts are stored under the floor in the cargo area.

Label, maximum permitted speed

Switch

Electrical cable

Bottle holder (orange cap)

Protective cap

Pressure reducing valve

2 The foam block may have different appearances depending on the car's equipment.

||

WHEELS AND TYRES

* Option/accessory.334

Air hose

Sealing fluid bottle

Pressure gauge

Sealing fluid bottle Replace the sealing fluid bottle before the expira- tion date has passed. Treat the old bottle as envi- ronmentally hazardous waste.

The sealing fluid bottle must be replaced after use. Volvo recommends that the replacement is performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING The bottle with sealing fluid contains 1.2- Ethanol and natural rubber-latex.

Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic reaction in the event of skin contact.

Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.

Store out of the reach of children.

WARNING

In the event of skin contact with the seal- ing fluid, it must be washed off immedi- ately with soap and plenty of water.

Sealing fluid that makes contact with an eye must be rinsed away immediately with eye wash fluid or with plenty of water. If the discomfort persists then the eye should be examined by a doctor.

Related information Emergency puncture repair* (p. 332)

Emergency puncture repair* - operation Sealing a puncture with the emergency puncture repair kit, Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK).

Emergency puncture repair

For information on the function of the parts, see Emer- gency puncture repair kit* - overview (p. 333).

WHEELS AND TYRES

}}

335

1. Set up the warning triangle and activate the hazard warning lights if a tyre is being sealed in a trafficked location.

If the puncture was caused by a nail or simi- lar, allow this to remain in the tyre. It helps to seal the hole.

2. Detach the label for maximum permitted speed (which is fitted on one side of the compressor) and affix it to the steering wheel. You should not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph) after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used.

3. Check that the switch is in position 0 (Off), and locate the electrical cable and the air hose.

4. Unscrew the orange-coloured cap from the compressor, and unscrew the cork from the sealing fluid bottle.

NOTE

Do not break the bottle's seal before use. The seal is broken automatically when the bottle is screwed in.

5. Screw in the bottle to the bottom of the bot- tle holder.

> The bottle and the bottle holder are equipped with a reverse catch to prevent sealant leakage. When the bottle is screwed in it cannot be unscrewed from the bottle holder again. Bottle removal must be performed at a workshop, Volvo recommends an authorised Volvo work- shop.

WARNING

In the event of skin contact with the seal- ing fluid, it must be washed off immediately with soap and plenty of water.

Sealing fluid that makes contact with an eye must be rinsed away immediately with eye wash fluid or with plenty of water. If the discomfort persists then the eye should be examined by a doctor.

WARNING Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.

6. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap.

Check that the pressure reducing valve on the air hose is fully screwed on, and screw in the air hose's valve connection to the bottom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.

7. Plug the electrical cable into the closest 12 V socket and start the car.

NOTE

Make sure that none of the other 12 V sock- ets is in use when the compressor is operat- ing.

WARNING Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.

8. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to position I (On).

WARNING Never stand next to the tyre when the com- pressor is running. If cracks or unevenness arise then the compressor must be switched off immediately. The journey should not be continued. Call roadside assistance for recov- ery to a tyre centre. Volvo recommends an authorised tyre centre.

NOTE

When the compressor starts, the pressure can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure drops after approximately 30 seconds.

||

WHEELS AND TYRES

* Option/accessory.336

9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.

IMPORTANT

The compressor must not be operated for longer than 10 minutes - risk of overheating.

10. Switch off the compressor to check the pres- sure on the pressure gauge. Minimum pres- sure is 1.8 bar and maximum 3.5 bar. (Release air with the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.)

WARNING If the pressure is below 1.8 bar (22 psi) then the hole in the tyre is too big. The journey should not be continued. Call roadside assis- tance for recovery to a tyre centre. Volvo rec- ommends an authorised tyre centre.

11. Switch off the compressor and unplug the electrical cable.

12. Unscrew the air hose from the tyre's air valve and refit the dust cap on the tyre.

13. Fit the protective cap on the air hose in order to avoid leakage of the remaining sealing fluid.

14. As soon as possible, drive at least 3 km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) so that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre and then perform a follow-up check.

NOTE

Sealant will spurt out of the puncture during the first few rotations of the tyre.

WARNING Make sure that nobody is standing near the car and gets the sealing fluid splashed onto them when the car is driven away. The dis- tance should be at least 2 metres (7 feet).

15. Follow-up inspection:

Connect the air hose on the tyre's air valve again and check the tyre pressure with the pressure gauge, see Emergency puncture repair* - rechecking (p. 336).

Related information Emergency puncture repair* (p. 332)

Emergency puncture repair* - rechecking (p. 336)

Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview (p. 333)

Emergency puncture repair* - rechecking When a tyre has been sealed with the emer- gency puncture repair kit, Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK), a subsequent check must be made after approx. 3 kilometres of driving.

Check tyre pressure Take out the tyre sealing equipment. The com- pressor must be switched off.

1. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap.

Take out the air hose and screw in the valve connection to the bottom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.

2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure gauge.

If the tyre pressure is below 1.3 bar then the tyre is insufficiently sealed. The jour- ney should not be continued. Call road- side assistance for recovery.

If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar, the tyre must be inflated to the pressure specified in accordance with the tyre pressure label on the driver side door pil- lar (1 bar = 100 kPa).

Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.

WHEELS AND TYRES

}}

* Option/accessory. 337

3. If the tyre needs to be inflated:

1. Plug the electrical cable into the closest 12 V socket and start the car.

2. Start the compressor and inflate the tyre to the pressure specified on the tyre pres- sure label on the driver side door pillar.

3. Switch off the compressor.

4. Remove the tyre sealing equipment.

Fit the protective cap on the air hose in order to avoid leakage of the remaining sealing fluid.

WARNING Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.

5. Refit the dust cap on the tyre.

NOTE

After a tyre has been inflated, always refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.

Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew.

NOTE

The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must be replaced after use. Volvo recommends that this replacement is performed by an author- ised Volvo workshop.

WARNING Check the tyre pressure regularly.

Volvo recommends that the car is driven to the nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the replacement/repair of the damaged tyre. Advise the workshop that the tyre contains sealing fluid.

WARNING You should not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph) after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used. Volvo recommends a visit to an authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance is 200 km). The staff there can determine whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.

Related information Emergency puncture repair* - operation

(p. 334)

Inflating tyres with compressor from the emergency puncture repair kit* The car's original tyres can be inflated using the compressor in the emergency puncture repair kit (p. 333).

1. The compressor must be switched off. Make sure that the switch is in position 0 (Off), and take out the electrical cable and the air hose.

2. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap and screw in the air hose's valve connection to the bottom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.

3. Plug the electrical cable into the closest 12 V socket and start the car.

WARNING Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in danger to life. Never leave the engine running in sealed areas or areas that lack sufficient ventilation.

WARNING Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.

4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to position I (On).

||

WHEELS AND TYRES

* Option/accessory.338

IMPORTANT

The compressor must not be operated for longer than 10 minutes - risk of overheating.

5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified on the tyre pressure label on the driver side door pillar. Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.

6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air hose and the electrical cable.

7. Refit the dust cap on the tyre.

Related information Emergency puncture repair* (p. 332)

Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview (p. 333)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.340

Volvo service programme To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible, follow the Volvo service programme as specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Volvo workshop to perform the service and mainte- nance work. Volvo workshops have the personnel, special tools and service literature to guarantee the highest quality of service.

IMPORTANT

For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and follow the instructions in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Related information Climate control system - fault tracing and

repair (p. 351)

Book service and repair*1

Manage service, repair and booking information directly in your Internet-connected car.

This service1 provides a convenient way to book a service and workshop visit directly in the car. Car information is sent to your dealer, who can pre- pare the workshop visit. The dealer will contact you to schedule an appointment time. For certain markets, the system reminds you of a scheduled appointment time as it approaches and the navi- gation system2 can also guide you to the work- shop when the time comes.

Before the service can be used

Volvo ID and my profile Register a Volvo ID. For more information

and how to create a Volvo ID, see Volvo ID (p. 20).

Go to www.volvocars.com, log in and proceed as follows:

1. Check that the car is connected to your pro- file.

2. Check that your contact information is cor- rect.

3. Select the Volvo dealer you want to contact for service and repair.

4. Choose preferred communication channel (phone). Booking information is always sent to the car and to you via email.

Prerequisite for booking from car To send and receive booking information

from and to the car, the car must be con- nected to the Internet, see the Sensus Info- tainment supplement for information about how to connect the car to the Internet.

Since the booking information is sent over your private phone subscription, you will be asked whether you want to send the informa- tion. The question is asked once and then applies to the selected connection for a lim- ited time.

For the service to work and for the system to communicate via the car's screen, notifica- tions/pop-up messages must be accepted. In the normal view for the MY CAR source, press OK/MENU and then Service & repair

Display notifications.

Using the service All menus and settings are accessed from the normal view in MY CAR by pressing OK/MENU and then Service & repair.

When it is time for service, and in some cases when the car is in need of repair, this is notified

1 Applies to certain markets. 2 Applies to Sensus Navigation.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

341

in the combined instrument panel (p. 66) and via a pop-up menu in the screen.

Service message in the screen.

Meaning of the answer options in the screen's pop-up menu:

Yes - A booking enquiry is sent to your dealer who then comes back with a booking proposal. The service lamp and service mes- sage in the combined instrument panel are extinguished.

No - No more pop-up messages will be shown in the screen. The message in the combined instrument panel remains. After this option has been selected, it is possible to start the manual booking in the car, see below.

Postpone - The pop-up menu is shown the next time the car is started.

Book a service or repair manually1

1. Press the MY CAR button in the centre con-

sole and select Service & repair Dealer

information Request service or repair.

> Vehicle data is sent automatically to your dealer.

2. The dealer sends a booking proposal to the car.

3. Accept or request a new booking proposal.

After the booking has been accepted the book- ing information is stored in the car, see My book- ings. The car will automatically communicate with you via the screen by means of reminders about the booking and guide you to the workshop visit.

My bookings1

Show booking information in the car's screen. Accept or request a new booking proposal.

Select Service & repair My bookings.

Call the dealer1

With a phone connected to the car via Bluetooth, you can call your dealer. For connect- ing the phone, see the Sensus Infotainment sup- plement.

Select Service & repair Dealer

information Call dealer.

Using the navigation system1, 2

Enter your workshop as destination or waypoint in the navigation system.

Select Service & repair Dealer

information Set single destination.

Select Service & repair Dealer

information Add as waypoint.

Sending vehicle data1

Vehicle data are sent to a central Volvo database (not your dealer) from which Volvo dealers can retrieve vehicle information using the car's identi- fication number (VIN3). The number is printed in the car's service and warranty booklet, alterna- tively inside the windscreen's bottom left-hand corner.

Select Service & repair Send car data.

Booking information and vehicle data When you decide to book a service from your car, the booking information and vehicle data will be sent. Vehicle data information consists of infor- mation within the following areas:

1 Applies to certain markets. 2 Applies to Sensus Navigation. 3 Vehicle Identification Number

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

342

service requirement

function status

fluid levels

meter reading

the car's vehicle identification number (VIN3)

the car's software version.

Related information Volvo ID (p. 20)

3 Vehicle Identification Number

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

343

Raising the car When raising the car it is important that the jack or lifting arms are fitted in the intended points on the car's underbody.

NOTE

Volvo recommends only using the jack that belongs to the car model in question. If a jack is selected other than the one recommended by Volvo, follow the instructions supplied with the equipment.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

344

Jacking points (arrows) for the jack that belongs to the car and lifting points (marked in red).

If the car is raised with a front workshop jack then this must be positioned under one of the two lifting points furthest in under the car. If the car is raised with a rear workshop jack then it must be positioned under one of the lifting points. Ensure that the workshop jack is posi- tioned so that the car cannot slide off the jack. Always use axle stands or similar.

If the car is raised with a two-pillar workshop lift then the front and rear lifting arms can be posi- tioned under the outer lifting points (jacking points). Alternatively, the inner lifting points can be used at the front.

Related information Changing wheels - removing wheels (p. 326)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

345

Bonnet - opening and closing The bonnet can be opened when the handle in the passenger compartment has been turned clockwise and the lock by the radiator grille has been moved to the left.

The handle for bonnet opening is always on the left- hand side.

Turn the handle about 20-25 degrees clock- wise. You will hear when the catch releases.

Move the catch to the left and open the bon- net. (The catch hook is located between the headlamp and radiator grille, see illustration.)

WARNING Check that the bonnet locks properly when closed.

Related information Engine compartment - checking (p. 346)

Engine compartment - overview (p. 345)

Engine compartment - overview The overview shows some service-related com- ponents.

Engine compartment

The appearance of the engine compartment may differ depending on model and engine variant.

Coolant expansion tank

Washer fluid filler pipe

Radiator

Engine oil filler pipe

Reservoir for brake and clutch fluid (located on the driver's side)

Starter battery

Relay and fuse box

Air filter

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

346

WARNING The ignition system has very high voltage and output. The voltage in the ignition system is highly dangerous. The car's electrical system must always be in key position 0 when work is being performed in the engine compartment; see Key positions - functions at different lev- els (p. 81).

Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coil when the car's electrical system is in key position II or when the engine is hot.

Related information Bonnet - opening and closing (p. 345)

Engine compartment - checking (p. 346)

Engine compartment - checking Some oils and fluids should be checked at regu- lar intervals.

Regular checking Check the following oils and fluids at regular intervals, e.g. when refuelling:

Coolant

Engine oil

Washer fluid

WARNING Remember that the radiator fan (located at the front of the engine compartment, behind the radiator) may start automatically some after the engine has been switched off.

Always have the engine cleaned by a work- shop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec- ommended. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.

Related information Bonnet - opening and closing (p. 345)

Engine compartment - overview (p. 345)

Coolant - level (p. 349)

Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 347)

Washer fluid - filling (p. 361)

Engine oil - general An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service intervals can be applied.

Volvo recommends:

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

347

When driving under adverse conditions, see Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p. 393).

IMPORTANT

In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.

An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil for both filling and oil change, otherwise you will risk affecting service life, starting charac- teristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.

Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all warranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.

Volvo recommends that oil changes are car- ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.

Volvo uses different systems for warning of low/ high oil level or low oil pressure. Certain engine variants have an oil pressure sensor, and then the combined instrument panel's warning symbol for

low oil pressure is used . Other variants have an oil level sensor, when the driver is

informed via the instrument's warning symbol

and display texts. Certain variants have both systems. Contact a Volvo dealer for more information.

Change the engine oil and oil filter in accordance with the intervals specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Using oil of a higher than specified grade is per- mitted. If the car is driven in adverse conditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a higher grade than the one specified, see Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p. 393).

For filling capacities, see Engine oil - grade and volume (p. 394).

Related information Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 347)

Engine oil - checking and filling The oil level is detected with the electronic oil level sensor.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

348

Filler pipe4.

In some cases, oil may need to be topped up between service intervals.

No action needs to be taken on engine oil level until a message is shown in the combined instru- ment panel's display, see the following illustra- tion.

Message and graphic in the display. The left-hand dis- play is shown in the digital combined instrument panel and the right-hand in the analogue.

Message

Engine oil level

The oil level is checked using the electronic oil level gauge with the thumbwheel when the engine is switched off, see Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 110).

WARNING

If the message Oil service required is shown, visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. The oil level may be too high.

IMPORTANT

If notified of low oil level, only fill with the vol- ume specified, for example, 0.5 litres.

NOTE

The system cannot directly detect changes when the oil is filled or drained. The car must have been driven approx. 30 km (approx. 20 miles) and have been stationary for 5 minutes with the engine switched off and on level ground before the oil level indication is correct.

WARNING Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire.

4 Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

349

Measuring the oil level If the oil level needs to be checked then it should be carried out in accordance with the following sequence.

1. Activate key position II; see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 81).

2. Rotate the thumbwheel on the left-hand stalk switch to position Oil level. > You will then see information displayed

about the engine oil level.

For more information on menu navigation, see Menu navigation - combined instru- ment panel (p. 110).

NOTE

If the right conditions for measuring the oil level (time after engine shutdown, the car's inclination, outside temperature, etc.) are not met, the message Not available will be shown. This does not mean that there is something wrong in the car's systems.

Related information Engine oil - general (p. 346)

Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 81)

Coolant - level The coolant cools the internal combustion engine to the correct operating temperature. The heat that is transferred from the engine to the coolant can be used to heat the passenger com- partment.

Checking the level The coolant level must lie between the MIN and MAX marks on the expansion tank. If the cooling system is not filled sufficiently, excessively high temperatures could occur, causing a risk of dam- age to the engine.

NOTE

Check the coolant level regularly when the engine is cold.

Filling

When topping up the coolant, follow the instruc- tions on the packaging. Never top up with water only. The risk of freezing increases with both too little and too much coolant concentrate.

If there is coolant under the car, if there is cool- ant smoke, or if more than 2 litres have been filled, always call for recovery to avoid the risk of engine damage when starting due to a defective cooling system.

WARNING Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant requires topping up when the engine is at operating temperature, unscrew the expan- sion tank cap slowly to gently release the overpressure.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

350

IMPORTANT

A high content of chlorine, chlorides and other salts may cause corrosion in the cooling system.

Always use coolant with anti-corrosion agent as recommended by Volvo.

Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50% water and 50% coolant.

Mix the coolant with approved quality tap water. In the event of any doubt about water quality, used ready-mixed coolant in accordance with Volvo recommendations.

When changing coolant/replacing cool- ing system components, flush the cooling system clean with approved quality tap water or flush with ready-mixed coolant.

The engine must only be run with a well- filled cooling system. Otherwise, tempera- tures that are too high may occur result- ing in the risk of damage (cracks) in the cylinder head.

For capacities and for standards regarding water quality; see Coolant - grade and volume (p. 396).

Brake and clutch fluid - level Brake and clutch fluid level should be between the reservoir MIN and MAX marks.

Checking the level Brake and clutch fluid have a common reservoir. The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks that are visible inside the reservoir. Check the level regularly.

Change the brake fluid every other year or at every other regular service.

The fluid should be changed annually on cars driven in conditions requiring hard, frequent brak- ing, such as driving in mountains or tropical cli- mates with high humidity.

For capacities and recommended brake fluid grade, see Brake fluid - grade and volume (p. 398).

WARNING If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid. Volvo rec- ommends that the reason for the loss of brake fluid is investigated by an authorised Volvo workshop.

Filling

The fluid reservoir is located on the driver's side.

Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid. The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks, which are located on the inside of the reservoir.

IMPORTANT

Do not forget to refit the cap.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

351

Climate control system - fault tracing and repair The air conditioning system must only be serv- iced and repaired by an authorised workshop.

Fault tracing and repair The air conditioning system contains fluorescent tracing agents. Ultraviolet light must be used dur- ing leak detection.

Volvo recommends that you contact an author- ised Volvo workshop.

Cars with R134a refrigerant

WARNING The air conditioning system contains pressur- ised refrigerant R134a. This system must only be serviced and repaired by an authorised workshop.

Cars with R1234yf refrigerant

WARNING The air conditioning system contains pressur- ised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance with SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe Service and Containment of Refrigerants Used in Mobile A/C System), service and repair of the refrigerant system must only be performed by trained and certified technicians in order to ensure the safety of the system.

Related information Volvo service programme (p. 340)

Lamp replacement - general Several of the car's bulbs can be replaced by the driver. For replacement of LED lamps, please contact a workshop.

The bulbs are specified (p. 358). The following list contains locations of bulbs and other light sources that are specialised, such as LED5

5 LED (Light Emitting Diode)

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.352

lamps, or are unsuitable for changing for some other reason, except at a workshop6:

LED headlamps

position lamps, front7

daytime running lights, front bumper7

side direction indicators, door mirrors7

approach lighting, door mirrors

interior and cargo area lighting

glovebox lighting

position lamps, rear

side marker lamps rear

brake light above the rear windscreen

number plate lighting.

WARNING The cars electrical system must be in key position 0 when replacing bulbs; see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 81).

IMPORTANT

Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with your fingers. Grease from your fingers is vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector and then causing damage.

NOTE

If an error message remains after the broken bulb has been replaced then we recommend visiting an authorised Volvo workshop.

NOTE

Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exte- rior lighting is designed to withstand this. Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp housing when the lamp has been switched on for a time.

Related information Lamps - specifications (p. 358)

Lamp replacement - location of front lamps (p. 352)

Lamp replacement - location of rear lamps (p. 356)

Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting (p. 358)

Lamp replacement - location of front lamps The overview shows the positioning of the lamps at the front of a car with halogen headlamps.

Position lamp (p. 355)

Main beam (p. 355)

Dipped beam (p. 354)

Indicator (p. 355)

Daytime running lights (p. 356) (LED* or bulb depending on variant)

6 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. 7 Certain variants

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

353

Related information Lamp replacement - general (p. 351)

Lamp replacement - headlamps (p. 353)

Lamps - specifications (p. 358)

Lamp replacement - headlamps All of the headlamp bulbs are replaced via the engine compartment. First loosen and remove the whole headlamp.

NOTE

Applies to cars with halogen headlamps.

1. Lift out the bonnet stop.

2. Loosen the screw with a Torx tool, size T30.

3. Turn the locking pin anticlockwise.

Pull out the locking pin.

4. Release the headlamp by alternately tilt- ing and pulling it out.

IMPORTANT

Take care when lifting out the headlamp so as not to damage any parts.

5. Press down the catch.

Unplug the connector.

Place the headlight on a soft surface so as not to scratch the lens.

IMPORTANT

Do not pull the electrical cable, only the con- nector.

6. Replace the relevant bulb as instructed.

The headlamp must be fitted and the contact fit- ted correctly before switching on the lights or changing key position.

Related information Lamp replacement - general (p. 351)

Lamp replacement - location of front lamps (p. 352)

Lamp replacement - cover for main/dipped beam bulbs (p. 354)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

354

Lamp replacement - direction indicators front (p. 355)

Lamp replacement - position lamps, front (p. 355)

Lamps - specifications (p. 358)

Lamp replacement - cover for main/ dipped beam bulbs Main/dipped beam bulbs are accessed by releasing the headlamp's larger cover.

NOTE

Applies to cars with halogen headlamps.

Before the larger cover can be undone, the head- lamp has to be undone and removed first, see Lamp replacement - headlamps (p. 353).

1. Press the hooks together.

Angle out the cover.

2. Replace the relevant bulb as instructed.

Related information Lamp replacement - dipped beam (p. 354)

Lamp replacement - main beam (p. 355)

Lamp replacement - dipped beam The dipped beam bulb is fitted inside the head- lamp's larger cover.

NOTE

Applies to cars with halogen headlamps.

1. Detach the headlamp (p. 353).

2. Undo the cover (p. 354).

3. Press the bulb holder upwards until it releases.

Pull out the bulb holder.

4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order.

Related information Lamps - specifications (p. 358)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

355

Lamp replacement - main beam The main beam bulb is fitted inside the head- lamp's larger cover.

NOTE

Applies to cars with halogen headlamps.

1. Detach the headlamp (p. 353).

2. Undo the cover (p. 354).

3. Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.

Pull out the bulb holder.

4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order.

Related information Lamps - specifications (p. 358)

Lamp replacement - direction indicators front The direction indicator lamp is fitted inside the headlamp's smaller cover.

NOTE

Applies to cars with halogen headlamps.

1. Detach the headlamp (p. 353).

2. Undo the cover.

3. Push in the catch.

Pull out the bulb holder.

4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order.

Related information Lamps - specifications (p. 358)

Lamp replacement - position lamps, front The position lamp's bulb holder is located on the side of the headlamp.

NOTE

Applies to cars with halogen headlamps.

1. Detach the headlamp (p. 353).

2. Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.

Pull out the bulb holder.

3. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order.

Related information Lamps - specifications (p. 358)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

356

Lamp replacement - daytime running lights The daytime running light bulb is fitted inside the bumper's cover.

NOTE

Applies to cars with halogen headlamps.

Only applies to daytime running lights with bulbs.

1. Undo the cover.

2. Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.

Pull out the bulb holder.

3. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order.

Related information Lamps - specifications (p. 358)

Lamp replacement - location of rear lamps The overview shows the location of the lamps at the rear.

Brake light (LED)

Position lamps (LED)

Brake light (p. 357)

Side marker lamps (LED)

Indicator (p. 357)

Reversing lamp (p. 357)

Fog lamp (driver's side) (p. 357)

Related information Lamp replacement - general (p. 351)

Lamps - specifications (p. 358)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

357

Lamp replacement - direction indicators rear, brake lights and reversing lamp Bulbs for rear direction indicators, brake lights and reversing lamps are replaced from inside the cargo area.

1. Remove the hatch in the upholstery (1) on the same side as the defective bulb.

2. Press the catch sideways.

Pull out the bulb holder.

3. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in and turning anticlockwise.

4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order.

Related information Lamp replacement - location of rear lamps

(p. 356)

Lamps - specifications (p. 358)

Lamp replacement - rear fog lamp The bulb for the rear fog lamp is fitted in the bumper's bulb holder.

Left-hand drive cars have the fog lamp on the left-hand side, while right-hand drive cars have the fog lamp on the right-hand side.

Lamp housing on the left-hand side.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

358

Insert (approx. 20 mm) a blunt, knife-like object, e.g. a table knife, at the triangle.

Carefully prise until the lug releases.

IMPORTANT

Take care not to damage any parts.

Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.

Pull out the bulb holder.

3. Push in the lamp and turn it anticlockwise.

4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order.

Related information Lamps - specifications (p. 358)

Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting The vanity mirror's lamps are fitted inside the lamp lenses.

1. Insert a screwdriver under the lamp lens and gently prize up the lug on the edge.

2. Carefully detach and lift aside the lamp lens.

3. Using needle-nose pliers, pull the bulb straight out to the side. Do not squeeze the bulb too hard with the pliers. Otherwise, the bulb glass could then break.

4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order.

Related information Lamps - specifications (p. 358)

Lamps - specifications The specifications apply to bulbs. For replace- ment of LED lamps, please contact a workshop.

Lighting WA Type

Dipped beamB 55 H7 LL

Main beamB 65 H9

Front direction indica- tors

21 HY21W

Position lamps, frontB 5 W5W LL

Daytime running lights, front bumperC

19 PW19W

Side direction indica- tors, door mirrorsC

5 WY5W LL

Direction indicators, rear

21 PY21W LL

Brake light 21 P21W LL

Reversing lamp 21 P21W LL

Rear fog lamp 21 H21W LL

Vanity mirror lighting 1.2 T5 Socket W2x4.6d

A Watt B Cars with halogen headlights C Certain variants

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

359

Related information Lamp replacement - general (p. 351)

Lamp replacement - location of front lamps (p. 352)

Lamp replacement - location of rear lamps (p. 356)

Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting (p. 358)

Wiper blades The wiper blades sweep water away from the windscreen and rear window. Together with the washer fluid they clean the windows and ensure visibility for driving.

The windscreen wiper blades must be in service position when they are to be replaced.

Service position

Wiper blades in service position.

In order to change, clean or lift the wiper blades (for scraping off ice from the windscreen, for example) they must be in service position.

IMPORTANT

Before placing the wiper blades in the service position, make sure that they are not frozen down.

1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch8 and briefly press the START/STOP ENGINE button to set the car's electrical system to key position I. For detailed infor- mation on key positions, see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 81).

2. Briefly press the START/STOP ENGINE button again to set the cars electrical system in key position 0.

3. Within 3 seconds, move the right stalk switch up and hold it in position for approx. 1 second.

> The wipers then move to standing straight up.

The wipers return to their starting position when you briefly press the START/STOP ENGINE button (key position I) or when the car is started.

8 Not required in cars with keyless start and lock system.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

360

IMPORTANT

If the wiper arms in service position have been folded up from the windscreen, they must be folded back down onto the wind- screen before the wipers are activated. This is to avoid scraping the paint on the bonnet.

Replacing the wiper blades

Fold up the wiper arm when it is in service position. Press the button located on the wiper blade mounting and pull straight out parallel with the wiper arm.

Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click" is heard.

Check that the blade is firmly installed.

4. Fold the wiper arm back towards the wind- screen.

The wipers return to their starting position when you briefly press the START/STOP ENGINE button (key position I) or when the car is started.

G 0 2 1 7 6 3

NOTE

When replacing the wiper blades, note that they have different lengths. The blade on the driver's side is longer than on the passenger side.

WARNING Since the car is equipped with airbag Pedestrian Airbag Volvo recommends that the wiper arms should be genuine parts and that only genuine parts are used for them.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

361

Replacing the wiper blades, rear window

1. Fold out the wiper arm.

2. Grip the inner section of the blade (by the arrow).

3. Turn anticlockwise to use the blade's end position against the wiper arm as a lever to detach the blade more easily.

4. Press the new wiper blade into position. Check that it is firmly installed.

5. Move the wiper arm back to its original posi- tion.

Cleaning For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen, see Car wash (p. 376).

IMPORTANT

Check the blades regularly. Neglected main- tenance shortens the service life of the wiper blades.

Related information Washer fluid - filling (p. 361)

Washer fluid - filling Washer fluid is used for cleaning the headlamps and windows. Washer fluid with antifreeze must be used when the temperature is below freezing point.

Topping up the washer fluid takes place by open- ing the blue cap.

The windscreen and headlamp washers share a common reservoir.

NOTE

When there is approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remaining in the reservoir, a message to top up the washer fluid will be shown in the com- bined instrument panel, together with the

symbol .

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

362

Prescribed grade: Washer fluid recommended by Volvo - with frost protection during cold weather and below freezing point.

IMPORTANT

Use Volvo genuine washer fluid or equivalent with a recommended pH of between 6 and 8, in working dilution (e.g. 1:1 with neutral water).

IMPORTANT

Use washer fluid with antifreeze when the temperature is below freezing to avoid the fluid freezing inside the pump, reservoir and hoses.

Volume:

Cars with headlamp washing: 5.5 litres.

Cars without headlamp washing: 3.2 litres.

Related information Wiper blades (p. 359)

Wipers and washers (p. 102)

Bonnet - opening and closing (p. 345)

Starter battery - general The starter battery is used to drive the starter motor and other electrical equipment in the car.

The starter battery is a traditional 12 V battery.

The service life and function of the starter battery is influenced by factors such as the number of starts, discharging, driving style, driving condi- tions, climatic conditions etc.

Never disconnect the starter battery when the engine is running.

Check that the cables to the starter battery are correctly connected and properly tight- ened.

The following table shows specifications for the starter battery.

Voltage (V) 12

Cold start capacityA - CCAB

(A) 720

Size , LWH (mm) 278175190

Capacity (Ah) 70

A According to EN standard. B Cold Cranking Amperes.

IMPORTANT

When replacing the starter battery in cars with the Start/Stop function, a battery of EFB9 type or stronger must be installed.

When replacing the support battery, a battery of AGM10 type must be fitted.

IMPORTANT

If the starter battery is replaced, make sure you replace it with a battery with the same cold starting capacity and type as the original battery (see the label on the battery).

NOTE

When replacing the battery, the size of the new battery must correspond with the dimensions of the original battery.

9 Enhanced Flooded Battery. 10 Absorbed Glass Mat.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

363

WARNING

The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can be formed if a jump lead is connected incorrectly, and this can be enough for the battery to explode.

The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns.

If sulphuric acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes - seek medical attention imme- diately.

IMPORTANT

When charging the starter battery or the sup- port battery (p. 365), only use a modern bat- tery charger with controlled charging voltage. Fast charging function must not be used since it may damage the battery.

IMPORTANT

If the following instruction is not observed then the energy saving function for infotain- ment system may be temporarily disengaged, and/or the message in the combined instru- ment panel's information display about the starter battery's state of charge may be tem- porarily inapplicable, following the connection of an external battery or battery charger:

The negative battery terminal on the car's starter battery must never be used for connecting an external battery or battery charger - only the car chassis may be used as the grounding point.

See Jump starting (p. 271) for a description of how the cable clamps must be attached.

NOTE

The life of the battery is shortened if it becomes discharged repeatedly.

The life of the battery is affected by several factors, including driving conditions and cli- mate. Battery starting capacity decreases gradually with time and therefore needs to be recharged if the car is not used for a longer time or when it is only driven short distances. Extreme cold further limits starting capacity.

To maintain the battery in good condition, at least 15 minutes of driving/week is recom- mended or that the battery is connected to a battery charger with automatic trickle charg- ing.

A battery that is kept fully charged has a maximum service life.

Related information Battery - symbols (p. 364)

Starter battery - replacement (p. 364)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

364

Battery - symbols There are information and warning symbols on the batteries.

Symbols on the batteries Use protective goggles.

Further information in the owner's manual for the car.

Store the battery out of the reach of children.

The battery contains corro- sive acid.

Avoid sparks and naked flames.

Risk of explosion.

Must be taken for recycling.

NOTE

An expended starter battery or support bat- tery must be recycled in an environmentally safe manner since it contains lead.

Related information Starter battery - general (p. 362)

Battery - Start/Stop (p. 365)

Starter battery - replacement The starter battery should be replaced by an authorised workshop.

Volvo recommends that you allow an authorised workshop to replace the batteries - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

For more information on the car's starter battery, see Starter battery - general (p. 362) and Jump starting (p. 271).

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

* Option/accessory. 365

Battery - Start/Stop Cars with Start/Stop function, in addition to the starter battery, are equipped with a support bat- tery.

Cars with the Start/Stop function are equipped with two 12 V batteries - one extra powerful starter battery for starting and one support bat- tery that helps during the Start/Stop function's starting sequence.

For more information on the Start/Stop function, see Start/Stop* (p. 279).

For more information on the car's starter battery, see Jump starting (p. 271).

The following table shows specifications for the support battery.

Voltage (V) 12

Cold start capacityA - CCAB

(A)

120C

170D

Size , LWH (mm) 15090106C

15090130D

Capacity (Ah) 8C

10D

A According to EN standard. B Cold Cranking Amperes. C Manual gearbox in combination with Start/Stop function that

only auto-stops when the car is completely stationary. D Others.

IMPORTANT

When replacing the starter battery in cars with the Start/Stop function, a battery of EFB11 type or stronger must be installed.

When replacing the support battery, a battery of AGM12 type must be fitted.

NOTE

The higher the current take-off in the car, the more the alternator must be working and the batteries charging = Increased fuel consumption.

When the capacity of the starter battery has fallen below the lowest permissible level then the Start/Stop function is dis- engaged.

Temporarily reduced Start/Stop function due to high current take-off means:

The engine starts automatically13 without the driver depressing the clutch pedal (manual gearbox).

The engine starts automatically without the driver lifting his/her foot off the foot brake pedal (automatic gearbox).

11 Enhanced Flooded Battery. 12 Absorbed Glass Mat. 13 Automatic starting can only take place if the gear lever is in neutral position.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

366

Location of the batteries

Starter battery14

Support battery

The support battery normally requires no more service than the normal starter battery. A work- shop should be contacted in the event of ques- tions or problems - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

IMPORTANT

If the following instruction is not observed then the Start/Stop function may temporarily cease to work after the connection of an external battery or battery charger:

The negative battery terminal on the car's starter battery must never be used for connecting an external battery or battery charger - only the car chassis may be used as the grounding point.

See Jump starting (p. 271) for a description of how the cable clamps must be attached.

NOTE

If the starter battery has been discharged so much that the car has no normal electrical functions and the engine is then jump-started with an external battery or a battery charger, the Start/Stop function will continue to be activated. If the Start/Stop function then auto-stops the engine shortly after, there is a great risk that engine auto-start will fail due to insufficient battery capacity, because the battery has not had the opportunity to recharge.

If the car has been jump-started, or if there is insufficient time to charge the battery with a battery charger, the recommendation is to temporarily deactivate the Start/Stop function until the battery has been recharged by the car. In an outside temperature of +15 C, the battery needs to be charged for at least 1 hour by the car. In a lower outside tempera- ture, the charging time may increase to 3-4 hours. The recommendation is to charge the battery using an external battery charger.

For more information on charging the starter battery, see Starter battery - general (p. 362).

Related information Battery - symbols (p. 364)

14 See Starter battery - general (p. 362) for a detailed description of the starter battery.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

367

Electrical system The electrical system is single-pole and uses the chassis and engine casing as a conductor.

The car has a voltage-regulated AC alternator.

The size, type and performance of the starter bat- tery depend on the car's equipment and function.

IMPORTANT

If the starter battery is replaced, make sure you replace it with a battery with the same cold starting capacity and type as the original battery (see the label on the battery).

Related information Starter battery - replacement (p. 364)

Starter battery - general (p. 362)

Fuses - general All electrical functions and components are pro- tected by a number of fuses in order to protect the car's electrical system from damage by short circuiting or overloading.

If an electrical component or function does not work, it may be because the component's fuse was temporarily overloaded and failed. If the same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault in the circuit. Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for checking.

Changing 1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.

2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side to see whether the curved wire has blown.

3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse of the same colour and amperage.

WARNING Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an amperage higher than that specified when replacing a fuse. This could cause significant damage to the electrical system and possibly lead to fire.

Location of central electrical units

Fuse box locations in a left-hand drive car. In a right-hand drive car the fuse box under the glove- box changes sides.

Engine compartment

Under the glovebox

Under the right-hand front seat

Related information Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 368)

Fuses - under glovebox (p. 371)

Fuses - under the right-hand front seat (p. 374)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

368

Fuses - in engine compartment Fuses in the engine compartment protect engine and brake functions, amongst other things.

On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses.

The fuse box also provides space for several spare fuses.

Replacing fuses The fuses can be accessed following the removal of the cover fitted on the starter battery and the cover for the electrical distribution unit.

Removing the covers Fold out the locking catches that are fit- ted on the sides of the cover on the starter battery.

Lift the cover straight up.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

* Option/accessory. 369

Fold out the locking catch that is fitted on the side of the electrical distribution unit.

Rotate the cover upward until the lock lugs (1) are released.

Fold the cover toward the engine to access the fuses.

Refitting the covers Reinstall the parts in reverse order.

Positions The label on the inside of the cover shows the positions of the fuses.

Fuses 7-18 and 46 are of the "JCASE" type and should be replaced by a workshop15.

Fuses 19-45 and 47-48 are of "Mini Fuse" type.

Function AA

ABS pump 40

ABS valves 30

Headlamp washers* 20

Ventilation fan 40

- -

Primary fuse for fuses 32-36 30

- -

Heated windscreen, right-hand side*

40

- -

Heated windscreen, left-hand side* 40

Parking heater* 20

Function AA

Windscreen wipers 20

Central electronic module, refer- ence voltage, support battery

5

Horn 15

Brake light 5

- -

Headlamp control 5

Internal relay coils 5

12 V socket, tunnel console front 15

Transmission control module 15

- -

12 V socket, tunnel console rear 15

- -

Engine Control Module (ECM) 5

Power seat, right* 20

Lambda-sonds; Relay coil in relay for cooling fan

15

15 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.370

Function AA

Vacuum regulators; Valves; Control module, radiator roller cover; Con- trol module, spoiler roller cover (diesel); Compressor A/C; Solenoid for engine oil pump; Cooling valve for climate control system (diesel); Glow control module (diesel); Relay coils in relays for Start/Stop func- tions

10

EGR valve (diesel); EVAP valve (petrol); Engine control module; Thermostat for engine cooling sys- tem (petrol); Cooling pump for EGR (diesel)

15

Ignition coils (petrol) 15

Diesel filter heater (diesel) 25

Engine Control Module (ECM) 15

ABS 5

Engine control module; Transmis- sion control module; Airbags

7.5

Headlamp levelling* 10

Electric control servo 5

Central electronic module 15

Function AA

- -

- -

Collision warning system 5

Accelerator pedal sensor 5

- -

- -

Coolant pump (when no parking heater is available)

10

A Ampere

Related information Fuses - under glovebox (p. 371)

Fuses - under the right-hand front seat (p. 374)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

371

Fuses - under glovebox Fuses under the glovebox protect the airbag and passenger compartment lighting functions, amongst other things.

On the inside of the cover for the fuse box in the engine compartment there are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses.

The fuse box in the engine compartment also provides space for several spare fuses.

Replacing fuses The fuses can be accessed when a protective cover has been removed from the fuse box.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.372

Cover removal

Take hold of the recess and pull until the locking lugs in the lower edge of the cover are released from the fuse box.

Remove the cover.

NOTE

A relatively large amount of tensile force is required to release the locking lugs at the top edge of the cover from the electrical distribu- tion unit.

Cover refitting

Guide in the lower lugs.

Turn the cover upwards until the upper lugs engage.

NOTE

Make sure that the upper locking lugs are seated properly in the grooves of the electri- cal distribution unit.

Positions The fuses are of "Mini Fuse" type.

Function AA

Fuel pump 20

- -

Function AA

Rear window wiper 15

Display in roof console (Seatbelt reminder/Indicator for airbag on the front passenger seat)

5

Interior lighting, Controls in roof console for front reading lamps and passenger compartment light- ing; Power seats*

7.5

Power operated roller blind for glass roof*

10

Rain sensor*; Dimming, interior rearview mirror*; Moisture sensor*

5

Collision warning system* 5

- -

Unlocking, tailgateB 10

- -

Reserve position 3, constant volt- age

5

Steering lock 15

Combined instrument panel 5

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory. 373

Function AA

Central locking system, fuel filler flapC

10

Climate panel 7.5

Steering wheel module 7.5

Siren*; Data link connector OBDII 5

Main beam 15

- -

Reversing lamp 7.5

Windscreen wipersD; Rear wind- screen wiperD

20

Immobiliser 5

Reserve position 1, constant volt- age

15

Reserve position 2, constant volt- age

20

Movement detector for alarm*; Remote receiver

5

Windscreen wipersE; Rear wind- screen wiperE

20

Function AA

Central locking system, fuel filler flapF

10

Unlocking, tailgateG 10

Electric additional heater*; Button seat heating rear*

7.5

Airbags; Pedestrian airbag* 7.5

Reserve position 4, constant volt- age

7.5

- -

- -

A Ampere B See also fuse 84. C See also fuse 83. D See also fuse 82. E See also fuse 77. F See also fuse 70. G See also fuse 65.

Related information Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 368)

Fuses - under the right-hand front seat (p. 374)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.374

Fuses - under the right-hand front seat Fuses under the right-hand front seat protect the infotainment system and seat heating, amongst other things.

On the inside of the cover for the fuse box in the engine compartment there are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses.

The fuse box in the engine compartment also provides space for several spare fuses.

Positions Fuses 24-28 are of "JCASE" type and

should be replaced by a workshop16.

Fuses 1-23 and 29-46 are of "Mini Fuse" type.

Function AA

- -

Keyless system* 10

Door handles, keyless system* 5

Control panel, left front door 25

16 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory. 375

Function AA

Control panel, right front door 25

Control panel, left rear door 25

Control panel, right rear door 25

Primary fuse for fuses 12-16: Info- tainment

25

Power seat, left* 20

- -

Internal relay coil 5

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

12 V socket, cargo area 15

- -

- -

- -

Function AA

- -

- -

Trailer socket 2* 20

Audio control unit (amplifier)* 30

- -

Trailer socket 1* 40

Rear window defroster 30

- -

BLIS* 5

Parking assistance* 5

Parking camera* 5

- -

- -

Seat heating, front driver's side 15

Seat heating, front passenger side 15

- -

- -

Function AA

- -

Seat heating, rear right* 15

Seat heating, rear left* 15

- -

- -

- -

- -

Audio control module (amplifier)*, signal for diagnosis; Audio control module or Control module SensusB; Infotainment control module or ScreenB; Digital radio*; TV*

15

Telematics*; Bluetooth* 5

A Ampere B Certain model variants.

Related information Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 368)

Fuses - under glovebox (p. 371)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

376

Car wash The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator. Use car shampoo.

Handwashing Remove bird droppings from the paintwork

as soon as possible. Bird droppings contain chemicals that affect and discolour paintwork very quickly. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended for the removal of any discol- oration.

Hose down the underbody.

Rinse the entire car until the dissolved dirt has been removed so as to reduce the risk of scratches from washing. Do not spray directly onto the locks.

If necessary, use cold degreasing agent on very dirty surfaces. Note that in this case, the surfaces must not be hot from the sun!

Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and plenty of lukewarm water.

Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo.

Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or a water scraper. If you avoid allowing drops of water to dry in strong sunlight, you reduce the risk of water drying stains which may need to be polished out.

WARNING Always have the engine cleaned by a work- shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.

IMPORTANT

Dirty headlamps have impaired functionality. Clean them regularly, when refuelling for example.

Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents or cleaning agents with a pH value lower than 3.5 or higher than 11.5. Use water and a non- scratching sponge.

NOTE

Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exte- rior lighting is designed to withstand this. Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp housing when the lamp has been switched on for a time.

Automatic car washes An automatic car wash is a simple and quick way of washing the car, but it cannot reach every- where. Handwashing the car is recommended for achieving optimum results.

NOTE

The car must only be washed by hand over the first few months. This is because the paint is more delicate when it is new.

IMPORTANT

If the car is painted with a matte clear coat, never use a washing program that finishes with hot wax treatment.

High-pressure washing When using high-pressure washing, use sweep- ing movements and make sure that the nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to the surface of the car (the distance applies to all exterior parts). Do not spray directly onto the locks.

Testing the brakes

WARNING Always test the brakes after washing the car, including the parking brake, to ensure that moisture and corrosion do not attack the brake linings and reduce braking perform- ance.

Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then when driving long distances in rain or slush. The heat from the friction causes the brake linings to warm up and dry. Do the same thing after starting in very damp or cold weather.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory. 377

Wiper blades Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades, as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen, impair the service life of wiper blades.

For cleaning:

Set the wiper blades to the service position; see Wiper blades (p. 359).

NOTE

Wash the wiper blades and windscreen regu- larly with lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo.

Do not use any strong solvents.

Exterior plastic, rubber and trim components A special cleaning agent available from Volvo dealers is recommended for the cleaning and care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim components, such as glossy trim mouldings. When using such a cleaning agent the instruc- tions must be followed carefully.

The frames around the side windows, the car's roof rails and the door frames at the windows* are produced in anodised aluminium. This means that they should only be washed using a cleaning agent with a pH value between 3.5 and 11.5. This is in order to avoid discolouration.

Parts that should be washed using a cleaning agent with a pH value between 3.5 and 11.5.

IMPORTANT

Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic, rubber and on parts painted in matte or semi-matte version.

When using degreasant on plastic and rubber, only rub with light pressure if it is necessary. Use a soft washing sponge.

Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear away or damage the glossy surface layer.

Polishing agent that contains abrasive must not be used.

IMPORTANT

Avoid washing the car with cleaning agent with a pH value lower than 3.5 or higher than 11.5. This may result in discolouration of ano- dised aluminium parts such as roof rack and around the side windows.

Never use metal polishing agent on anodised aluminium parts, this can result in discoloura- tion and destroy the surface treatment.

Rims Only use rim cleaning agent recommended by Volvo.

After washing, discolouration at the base of the spokes may remain due to metal dust from the brake discs attaching in the wheel rim's paint. Paint cleaner works in many cases, with very fine polishing using a soft cloth.

Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the sur- face and cause stains on chrome-plated alumi- nium rims.

Related information Polishing and waxing (p. 378)

Cleaning the interior (p. 380)

Water and dirt-repellent coating (p. 379)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

378

Polishing and waxing Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull or to give the paintwork extra protection.

The car does not need to be polished until it is at least one year old. However, the car can be waxed during this time. Do not polish or wax the car in direct sunlight.

Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt and tar stains using tar remover or white spirit. More stubborn stains can be removed using fine rub- bing paste designed for car paintwork.

Polish first with a polish and then wax with liquid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the pack- aging carefully. Many preparations contain both polish and wax.

IMPORTANT

Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic, rubber and on parts painted in matte or semi-matte version.

When using degreasant on plastic and rubber, only rub with light pressure if it is necessary. Use a soft washing sponge.

Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear away or damage the glossy surface layer.

Polishing agent that contains abrasive must not be used.

IMPORTANT

Only paint treatment recommended by Volvo should be used. Other treatment such as pre- serving, sealing, protection, lustre sealing or similar could damage the paintwork. Paint- work damage caused by such treatments is not covered by Volvo warranty.

Matte clear coat When the car is painted in a matte clear coat, the following must be considered in order to avoid paint damage due to incorrect treatment.

IMPORTANT

Never polish a matte clear coat. Polishing leads to the paint becoming shiny.

Do not use paint cleaner, grinding agents, polishing products or sheen preservation, e.g. wax. These products are only intended for glossy surfaces. If they are used on matte paint then there will be significant damage to the surfaces (glossy spots).

IMPORTANT

If wax gets onto the matte paint surface then it must be removed immediately using standard type white benzene.

Make sure you do not get resin, grease or oil on the car's paint. They may leave resi- dues. Remove immediately using stand- ard type white benzene.

Proceed with caution and do not press too hard on the painted surface.

Related information Car wash (p. 376)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory. 379

Water and dirt-repellent coating The windows are treated with a surface coating that improves visibility in difficult weather condi- tions.

Water and dirt-repellent coating* There is natural wear of the water- repellent coating.

Maintenance:

Never use products such as car wax, degreaser or similar on glass surfaces as this could ruin their water-repellent properties.

Take care when cleaning so as not to dam- age the glass surface.

To avoid damaging glass surfaces when removing ice only use plastic ice scrapers.

Treatment with a special finishing agent available from Volvo dealers is recommended in order to maintain the water-repellent prop- erties on the side windows. This should be used first after three years and then each year.

IMPORTANT

Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove ice from the windows. Use the heating to remove ice from the door mirrors; see Windows and door mirrors - heating (p. 107).

Related information Car wash (p. 376)

Rustproofing The car received a thorough and complete rust- proofing at the factory. Parts of the body are made of galvanised sheet metal. The underbody is protected by a wear-resistant anti-corrosion compound. A thin, penetrating rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the exposed members, cavi- ties, closed sections and side doors.

Inspection and maintenance The car's anti-corrosion protection does not nor- mally need to be maintained, but keeping the car clean always helps to further reduce the risk of corrosion. Strong alkaline or acidic cleaning solu- tions must always be avoided on the glossy trim components. Any stone chips should be rectified as soon as they are discovered.

Related information Paint damage (p. 381)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

380

Cleaning the interior Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents.

IMPORTANT

Certain items of coloured clothing (e.g. dark jeans and suede garments) may stain the upholstery. If this occurs, it is important to clean and treat these parts of the upholstery as soon as possible.

Never use strong solvents such as washer fluid, pure petrol or white spirit to clean the interior, since this may damage the upholstery as well as other interior materials.

Never spray the cleaning agent directly onto components that have electrical but- tons and controls. Wipe them instead using a moistened cloth containing the cleaning agent.

Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the fabric upholstery.

Fabric upholstery and ceiling upholstery Volvo offers a comprehensive fabric care product for fabric upholstery and ceiling upholstery which, when used in accordance with the instructions, preserves the properties of the upholstery. The

fabric care product is available for purchase from a Volvo dealer.

Leather upholstery Volvo's leather upholstery is treated to preserve its original appearance.

Leather upholstery is a natural product that changes and acquires a beautiful patina over time. Regular cleaning and treatment are required in order that the properties and colours of the leather shall be preserved. Volvo offers a comprehensive product, Volvo Leather Care Kit/ Wipes, for the cleaning and treatment of leather upholstery which, when used in accordance with the instructions, preserves the leather's protective coating.

To achieve best results, Volvo recommends the cleaning and application of the protective cream once to four times per year (or more if required). The Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes is available for purchase from a Volvo dealer.

Leather steering wheel Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the leather steering wheel with protective plastic. Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes is recommended for cleaning the leather steering wheel.

Interior plastic, metal and wood parts A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly mois- tened with water, available from a Volvo dealer, is recommended for cleaning interior parts and sur- faces.

Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong stain removers. A special cleaning agent available from Volvo dealers can be used for more difficult cleaning.

Seatbelts Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special textile cleaning agent is available from a Volvo dealer. Ensure that the seatbelt is dry before allowing it to retract.

Inlay mats and floor mat Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a vac- uum cleaner to remove dust and dirt. Each inlay mat is secured with pins.

Remove the inlay mat by taking hold of the inlay mat at each pin and lifting the mat straight up.

Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at each pin.

WARNING Only use one inlaid mat at each seat, and check before setting off that the mat by the driver's seat is firmly affixed and secured in the pins so that it does not get caught adja- cent to and under the pedals.

A special textile cleaner is recommended for stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor mats must be cleaned with agents recommended by a Volvo dealer.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

381

Related information Car wash (p. 376)

Paint damage Paint is an important part of the car's rustproof- ing and should therefore be checked regularly. The most common types of paintwork damage are stone chips, scratches, and marks on the edges of wings, doors and bumpers.

IMPORTANT

When the car is painted in a matte clear coat:

Only allow an authorised workshop to carry out paint repairs. An authorised Volvo work- shop is recommended.

Touching up minor paintwork damage To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paintwork should be rectified immediately.

Materials that may be needed

Primer17 - a special adhesive primer in a spray can is available for e.g. plastic-coated bumpers.

Base coat and clear coat - are available in spray cans or as touch-up pens/sticks18.

Masking tape.

Fine sand paper17.

Colour code The label for colour code is located on the car's door pillar and is visible when the right-hand rear door is opened.

Exterior colour code

Any secondary exterior colour code

It is important that the correct colour is used. For product label location, see Type designations (p. 384).

17 If required. 18 Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

382

Repair minor paintwork damage such as stone chips and scratches

G 0 2 1 8 3 2

Before work is begun, the car must be clean and dry and at a temperature above 15 C.

1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the dam- aged surface. Then remove the tape to remove any loose paint.

If the damage is down to the metal, use of a primer is appropriate. In the event of damage to a plastic surface, an adhesive primer should be used to give better results - spray into the lid of the spray can and brush on thinly.

2. Before painting, gentle polishing using a very fine polishing agent may be carried out locally if required (e.g. if there are any uneven edges). The surface is cleaned thoroughly and left to dry.

3. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine brush, a matchstick or similar. Finish off with a basecoat and clearcoat once the primer has dried.

4. For scratches, proceed as above, but mask around the damaged area to protect the undamaged paintwork.

NOTE

If the stone chip has not penetrated down to the meal and an undamaged layer of paint remains in place, fill in with basecoat and clearcoat as soon as the surface has been cleaned.

Related information Rustproofing (p. 379)

SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATIONS

384

Type designations Type designation, vehicle identification number, etc., i.e. information unique to the car, can be read on a label in the car.

SPECIFICATIONS

}}

385

Label location

The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on market and model.

Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle iden- tification and engine numbers can facilitate all

||

SPECIFICATIONS

386

contact with an authorised Volvo dealer regarding the car and when ordering spare parts and accessories.

Decal for type designation, vehicle identifica- tion number, permissible maximum weights and code designation for exterior colour and type approval number. The decal is posi- tioned on the door pillar, and will be visible when the right-hand rear door is opened.

Label for A/C system.

Label for parking heater.

Decal for engine code and the engine's serial number.

Label for engine oil.

Decal for gearbox type designation and serial number.

Manual gearbox

Automatic gearbox

Decal for the car's identification number - VIN (Vehicle Identification Number).

Further information on the car is presented in the registration document.

NOTE

It is not intended that the decals illustrated in the owner's manual should be exact replicas of those in the car. They are included to show their approximate appearance and locations in the car. The information that applies to your particular car can be found on the decal on the car.

Related information Weights (p. 388)

Engine specifications (p. 391)

SPECIFICATIONS

387

Dimensions Measurement of car length, height, etc. can be read in the table.

V40.

Dimensions mm

A Wheelbase 2647

B Length 4370

C Load length, floor, folded rear seat 1508

D Load length, floor 684

E Height 1420

F Load height 532

Dimensions mm

G Front track 1546A

1551B

1559C

H Rear track 1533A

1538B

1546C

I Load width, floor 960

Dimensions mm

J Width 1802

K Width including door mirrors 2041

L Width including folded-in door mirrors 1857

A Offset 52.5 mm. B Offset 50 mm. C Offset 46 mm.

SPECIFICATIONS

388

Weights Max. gross vehicle weight, etc. can be read on a label in the car.

Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank 90% full and all fluids.

The weight of passengers and accessories, and towball load (p. 389) (when a trailer is hitched) influence the load capacity and are not included in the kerb weight.

Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight - Kerb weight.

NOTE

The documented kerb weight applies to cars in the standard version - i.e. a car without extra equipment or accessories. This means that for every accessory added the loading capacity of the car is reduced correspondingly by the weight of the accessory.

Examples of accessories that reduce load capacity are the different equipment levels (e.g. Kinetic, Momentum, Summum), as well as other accessories such as towbar, load carrier, space box, audio system, auxiliary lamps, GPS, fuel-driven heater, safety grille, carpets, cargo cover, power seats, etc.

Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer- taining the kerb weight of your own particular car.

WARNING The car's driving characteristics change depending on how heavily it is loaded and how the load is distributed.

For information on label location, see Type designations (p. 384).

Max. gross vehicle weight

Max. train weight (car+trailer)

Max. front axle load

Max. rear axle load

Equipment level

Max. load: See registration document.

Max. roof load: 75 kg.

Related information Towing capacity and towball load (p. 389)

SPECIFICATIONS

}}

389

Towing capacity and towball load Towing capacity and towball load for driving with a trailer can be read in the tables.

Max. weight braked trailer

NOTE

Not all engines are available in all markets.

V40

Engine

Engine codeA Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)

T2 B4204T17 Manual, M76 1500 75

T2 B4154T3 Automatic, TF-71SC 1500 75

T2 B4154T5 Automatic, TF-71SC 1500 75

T3 B4204T33 Manual, M76 1500 75

T3 B4154T2 Automatic, TF-71SC 1500 75

T3 B4154T4 Automatic, TF-71SC 1500 75

T4 B4204T19 Automatic, TF-71SC 1500 75

T5 B4204T41 Automatic, TG-81SC 1500 75

T5 B4204T11 Automatic, TG-81SC 1500 75

D2 D4204T8 Automatic, TF-71SC 1500 75

D2 D4204T13 Manual, M76 1500 75

D2 D4204T13 Automatic, TF-71SC 1500 75

D3 D4204T16 Manual, M76 1500 75

D3 D4204T16 Automatic, TF-71SC 1500 75

||

SPECIFICATIONS

390

V40

Engine

Engine codeA Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)

D3 D4204T9 Automatic, TF-71SC 1500 75

D4 D4204T14 Automatic, TG-81SC 1500 75

A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 384).

Max. weight unbraked trailer

V40

Engine

Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)

All 700 50

Related information Weights (p. 388)

Driving with a trailer (p. 305)

Trailer Stability Assist - TSA (p. 312)

SPECIFICATIONS

}}

391

Engine specifications Engine specifications (output etc.) for each respective engine alternative can be read in the table.

NOTE

Not all engines are available in all markets.

V40

Engine

Engine codeA Output (kW/

rpm)

Output (hp/rpm) Torque (Nm/rpm) No. of cylin-

ders

Bore

(mm)

Stroke

(mm)

Swept vol-

ume (litres)

Compres-

sion ratio

T2 B4154T3 90/5000 122/5000 220/18003500 4 82.0 70.9 1.498 10.5:1

T2 B4154T5 90/5000 122/5000 220/1600-3500 4 82.0 70.9 1.498 10.5:1

T2 B4204T17 90/5000 122/5000 220/12003500 4 82.0 93.2 1.969 11.3:1

T3 B4154T2 112/5000 152/5000 250/18004000 4 82.0 70.9 1.498 10.5:1

T3 B4154T4 112/5000 152/5000 250/17004000 4 82.0 70.9 1.498 10.5:1

T3 B4204T33 112/5000 152/5000 250/13004000 4 82.0 93.2 1.969 11.3:1

T4 B4204T19 140/4700 190/4700 300/13004000 4 82.0 93.2 1.969 11.3:1

T5 B4204T41 180/5500 245/5500 350/15004800 4 82.0 93.2 1.969 8.6:1

T5 B4204T11 180/5500 245/5500 350/15004800 4 82.0 93.2 1.969 10.8:1

D2 D4204T13 88/3750 120/3750 280/1500-2250 4 82.0 93.2 1.969 16.0:1

D2 D4204T8 88/3750 120/3750 280/1500-2250 4 82.0 93.2 1.969 16.0:1

D3 D4204T16 110/3750 150/3750 320/1750-3000 4 82.0 93.2 1.969 16.0:1

D3 D4204T9 110/3750 150/3750 320/1750-3000 4 82.0 93.2 1.969 16.0:1

D4 D4204T14 140/4250 190/4250 400/1750-2500 4 82.0 93.2 1.969 15.8:1

A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 384).

||

SPECIFICATIONS

392

Related information Coolant - grade and volume (p. 396)

Engine oil - grade and volume (p. 394)

SPECIFICATIONS

393

Engine oil - adverse driving conditions Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor- mally high oil temperature or oil consumption. Below are some examples of adverse driving conditions.

Check the oil level (p. 347), more frequently for long journeys:

towing a caravan or trailer

in mountainous regions

at high speeds

in temperatures colder than -30 C or hotter than +40 C

The above also apply to shorter driving distances at low temperatures.

Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse driving conditions. It provides extra protection for the engine.

Volvo recommends:

IMPORTANT

In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.

An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil for both filling and oil change, otherwise you will risk affecting service life, starting charac- teristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.

Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all warranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.

Volvo recommends that oil changes are car- ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.

Related information Engine oil - grade and volume (p. 394)

Engine oil - general (p. 346)

SPECIFICATIONS

394

Engine oil - grade and volume Recommended engine oil grade and volume for each respective engine alternative can be read in the table.

Volvo recommends:

NOTE

Not all engines are available in all markets.

SPECIFICATIONS

395

V40

Engine

Engine codeA Oil grade Volume, incl. oil filter

(litres, approx.)

T2 B4204T17 Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20 5.6

T2 B4154T3 5.6

T2 B4154T5 5.6

T3 B4154T2 5.6

T3 B4154T4 5.6

T3 B4204T33 5.6

T4 B4204T19 Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20 5.6

T5 B4204T41 5.6

T5 B4204T11 5.6

D2 D4204T13 Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20 5.2

D2 D4204T8 5.2

D3 D4204T16 5.2

D3 D4204T9 5.2

D4 D4204T14 5.2

A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 384).

Related information Engine oil - adverse driving conditions

(p. 393)

Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 347)

SPECIFICATIONS

396

Coolant - grade and volume Approved coolant volume for each respective engine alternative can be read in the table.

Prescribed grade: Coolant recommended by Volvo mixed with 50% water1, see the packaging.

NOTE

Not all engines are available in all markets.

V40

EngineA

Volume

(litres)

T2 B4154T3

7.5 (7,8B)

T2 B4154T5

T2 B4204T17

T3 B4154T2

T3 B4154T4

T3 B4204T33

T4 B4204T19

T5 B4204T41

T5 B4204T11

V40

EngineA

Volume

(litres)

D2 D4204T13

8,0 (8,4B)

D2 D4204T8

D3 D4204T16

D3 D4204T9

D4 D4204T14

A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 384).

B Applies to cars with fuel-driven heater.

Related information Coolant - level (p. 349)

1 Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.

SPECIFICATIONS

397

Transmission fluid - grade and volume The prescribed transmission fluid and volume for each respective gearbox alternative can be read in the table.

Manual gearbox

Manual gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid

M76 approx 1.6 BOT 352 B1

Automatic gearbox

Automatic gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid

TF-71SC approx 6.8 AW1

TG-81SC approx. 6.6A

approx. 7.5B AW1

A Petrol engines B Diesel engines

NOTE

The transmission fluid does not need to be changed under normal driving conditions. However, it may be necessary under adverse driving conditions.

Related information Engine oil - adverse driving conditions

(p. 393)

Type designations (p. 384)

SPECIFICATIONS

398

Brake fluid - grade and volume Brake fluid is the term for the medium in a hydraulic brake system that is used to transfer pressure from the master brake cylinder to the mechanical brakes.

Prescribed grade: Volvo Original Dot 4 class 6 or equivalent.

Volume: 0.6 litres

Related information Brake and clutch fluid - level (p. 350)

SPECIFICATIONS

399

Fuel tank - volume Fuel tank volume for each respective engine alternative can be read in the table.

V40

Engine

Volume (litres) Prescribed grade

Petrol approx. 62 Fuel - petrol (p. 297)

Diesel approx. 62 Fuel - diesel (p. 298)

Related information Filling up with fuel (p. 296)

Engine specifications (p. 391)

SPECIFICATIONS

400

Tank volume for AdBlue2

Approx. 16.5 litres of the AdBlue additive can be added to the tank.

Related information AdBlue checking and topping up (p. 303)

Air conditioning, fluid - volume and grade The climate control system in the car uses a refrigerant, either R1234yf or R134a, depend- ing on market. Information about which refriger- ant the car's climate control system uses can be seen on a decal, located on the inside of the bonnet.

Prescribed grades and volumes of fluids and lubricants in the air conditioning system can be read in the tables below.

A/C decal

Decal for R134a

The label is fitted on the inside of the bonnet.

Decal for R1234yf

The label is fitted on the inside of the bonnet.

2 Registered trademark belonging to Verband der Automobilindustrie e.V. (VDA)

SPECIFICATIONS

401

Symbol explanation R1234yf

Symbol Meaning

Caution

Mobile air conditioning system (MAC)

Lubricant type

A trained and certified technician is required in order to service the mobile air conditioning system (MAC)

Flammable refrigerants

Refrigerant

Cars with refrigerant R134a

Weight Prescribed grade

625 g R134a

WARNING The air conditioning system contains pressur- ised refrigerant R134a. This system must only be serviced and repaired by an authorised workshop.

Cars with refrigerant R1234yf

Weight Prescribed grade

575 g R1234yf

WARNING The air conditioning system contains pressur- ised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance with SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe Service and Containment of Refrigerants Used in Mobile A/C System), service and repair of the refrigerant system must only be performed by trained and certified technicians in order to ensure the safety of the system.

Compressor oil

Volume Prescribed grade

60 ml PAG oil

Evaporator

IMPORTANT

The A/C system's evaporator must never be repaired or replaced with a previously used evaporator. A new evaporator must be certi- fied and labelled in accordance with SAE J2842.

Related information Climate control system - fault tracing and

repair (p. 351)

SPECIFICATIONS

402

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions

Fuel consumption in a vehicle is measured in litres per 100 km and CO2 emissions in grams

CO2 per km.

Explanation

gram CO2/km

litre/100 km

urban driving

extra-urban driving

combined driving

Tyre rating for rolling resistance according to EU directive no. 1222/2009

manual gearbox

Automatic gearbox

NOTE

If the consumption and emission data is miss- ing then it is included in the enclosed supple- ment.

NOTE

Not all engines are available in all markets.

V40

T2 (B4204T17)

A 183 7.9 110 4.7 137 5.9

B 186 8.0 112 4.8 139 6.0

C 189 8.1 115 4.9 142 6.1

E 193 8.3 117 5.0 145 6.2

SPECIFICATIONS

}}

403

V40

T2 (B4154T3)

A 162 7.0 110 4.7 129 5.6

B 165 7.1 112 4.8 131 5.6

C 168 7.2 114 4.9 133 5.7

E 171 7.4 116 5.0 136 5.9

T3 (B4204T33)

A 186 8.0 112 4.8 139 6.0

B 187 8.1 114 4.9 141 6.1

C 189 8.1 116 5.0 143 6.1

E 190 8.2 118 5.1 145 6.2

T3 (B4154T2)

A 162 7.0 115 4.9 132 5.7

B 164 7.0 117 5.0 134 5.8

C 165 7.1 119 5.1 136 5.9

E 167 7.2 121 5.2 138 6.0

D2 (D4204T13)

A - - - - - -

B - - - - - -

C - - - - - -

E - - - - - -

||

SPECIFICATIONS

404

V40

D2 (D4204T13)

A - - - - - -

B - - - - - -

C - - - - - -

E - - - - - -

D3 (D4204T16)

A - - - - - -

B - - - - - -

C - - - - - -

E - - - - - -

D3 (D4204T16)

A - - - - - -

B - - - - - -

C - - - - - -

E - - - - - -

Fuel consumption Fuel consumption and emission values in the table above are based on specific EU driving cycles (see below), that apply to cars with kerb weight in the basic version and without extra equipment. The car's weight may increase depending on equipment. This, as well as how

heavily the car is loaded, increases fuel consump- tion and carbon dioxide emissions.

There are several reasons for increased fuel con- sumption compared with the table's values. Examples of this are:

If the car is equipped with extra equipment that affects the car's weight.

The driver's driving style.

If the customer chooses wheels other than those fitted as standard on the model's basic version then rolling resistance may increase.

SPECIFICATIONS

405

High speed results in increased wind resis- tance.

Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions, weather and the condition of the car.

A combination of the above-mentioned examples can result in significantly increased consumption.

Large deviations in fuel consumption may arise in a comparison with the EU driving cycles (see below) which are used in the certification of the car and on which the consumption figures in the table are based. For further information, please refer to the regulations referred to.

Consumption is higher and power output lower for fuel with an octane rating of 91 RON.

NOTE

Extreme weather conditions, driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combina- tion with fuel quality are factors that consider- ably increase the car's fuel consumption.

EU driving cycles Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accord- ance with EU Regulation no 692/2008, 715/2007 (Euro 5 / Euro 6), 2017/1151 and 2017/1153. Since the driving cycles are also used for quality control, there are significant requirements for repeatability of the tests. For

this reason the tests are carried out under close scrutiny and only with the car's basic functions (e.g. air conditioning, radio, etc. switched off). As a consequence of this the results from the official figures are not obviously representative of what the customer sees during actual usage.

The regulations cover the driving cycles for "Urban driving" and "Extra-urban driving":

Urban driving the measurement starts with cold starting the engine. The driving is simulated.

Extra-urban driving the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0120 km/h (0-75 mph). The driving is simulated.

Cars with manual gearbox are started in 2nd gear.

The official value for combined driving, which is reported in the table, is a combination of the results from the "Urban driving" and "Extra-urban driving" driving cycles, in accordance with legal requirements.

The exhaust gases are collected in order to extrapolate the carbon dioxide emissions (CO2

emissions) during the two driving cycles. These are then analysed and give the value for CO2

emissions.

Related information Economical driving (p. 304)

Fuel - petrol (p. 297)

Fuel - diesel (p. 298)

Weights (p. 388)

SPECIFICATIONS

406

Wheels and tyres - approved dimensions In certain countries not all approved dimensions are indicated by the registration document or other documents. The following table shows all

approved combinations of wheel rims and tyres. Information on engine and type of gearbox is required to read the table. For information with respect to these details, see Type designations (p. 384).

For information on the minimum permitted load index (LI) and the minimum permitted speed rat- ing (SS), see Load index and speed rating (p. 408).

= Approved

V40

Engine

man/

aut

205/55R16

7x16x50

6,5x16x52,5

205/50R17

7x17x50

7x17x52.5

225/45R17

7,5x17x52,5

7x17x50

225/40R18

7,5x18x52,5

235/35R19A

8x19x50

T2 B4154T3 aut -

T2 B4154T5 aut -

T2 B4204T17 man -

T3 B4154T2 aut -

T3 B4154T4 aut -

T3 B4204T33 man -

T4 B4204T19 aut

T5 B4204T11 aut

T5 B4204T41 aut

D2 D4204T8 man/aut -

D2 D4204T13 man/aut -

D3 D4204T16 man/aut

SPECIFICATIONS

407

V40

Engine

man/

aut

205/55R16

7x16x50

6,5x16x52,5

205/50R17

7x17x50

7x17x52.5

225/45R17

7,5x17x52,5

7x17x50

225/40R18

7,5x18x52,5

235/35R19A

8x19x50

D3 D4204T9 aut

D4 D4204T14 aut A Only approved for cars equipped with 19" tyres from the factory.

Related information Tyres - dimensions (p. 321)

Tyres - speed ratings (p. 322)

Tyres - load index (p. 322)

Wheel and wheel rim dimensions (p. 321)

SPECIFICATIONS

408

Load index and speed rating The table below shows the minimum permitted load index (LI) and speed rating (SS). Informa-

tion on engine and type of gearbox is required to read the table. For information with respect to these details, see Type designations (p. 384).

V40

Engine

man/

aut Minimum permitted load index (LI)A Minimum permitted speed rating (SS)B

T2 B4154T3 aut 91 H

T2 B4154T5 aut 91 H

T2 B4204T17 man 91 H

T3 B4154T2 aut 91 H

T3 B4154T4 aut 91 H

T3 B4204T33 man 91 H

T4 B4204T19 aut 91 H

T5 B4204T11 aut 91 W

T5 B4204T41 aut 91 H

D2 D4204T8 man/aut 91 H

D2 D4204T13 man/aut 91 H

D3 D4204T16 man/aut 91 H

D3 D4204T9 aut 91 H

D4 D4204T14 aut 91 V

A The tyre's load index must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table. B The tyre's speed rating must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table.

SPECIFICATIONS

409

Related information Wheels and tyres - approved dimensions

(p. 406)

Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 410)

Tyres - load index (p. 322)

Tyres - speed ratings (p. 322)

SPECIFICATIONS

410

Tyres - approved tyre pressures Approved tyre pressures for each respective engine alternative can be read in the table.

V40

Engine

Tyre size Speed

(km/h)

Load, 1-3 persons Max. load ECO pressureA

Front

(kPa)B

Rear

(kPa)

Front

(kPa)

Rear

(kPa)

Front/rear

(kPa)

All engines

205/55 R16

205/50 R17

225/45 R17

0 - 160C 230 230 260 260 260

160+D 250 250 300 280 -

225/40 R18

235/35 R19

0 - 160C 230 230 260 260 260

160+D 270 270 320 300 -

Temporary Spare Tyre max. 80E 420 420 420 420 -

A Economical driving. B In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa. C 0 - 100 mph D 100+ mph E max 50 mph

NOTE

All engines, tyres or combinations of these are not always available in all markets.

Related information Wheels and tyres - approved dimensions

(p. 406)

Tyres - dimensions (p. 321)

Tyres - air pressure (p. 320)

Type designations (p. 384)

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

411

A

ACC Adaptive cruise control 201

Active bending lights 94

Active main beam 92

Active Park Assist 262 function 263 Limitations 266 operation 264 Symbols and messages 267

Active Yaw Control 184

Adaptation of headlamp beam 95

Adapting driving characteristics 184

Adaptive Cruise Control 201 change cruise control functionality 210 deactivate 207 fault tracing 211 function 202 managing speed 204 overtaking 207 overview 203 radar sensor 214 setting the time interval 205 standby mode 206 temporary deactivation 206

AdBlue 301 filling 303

operation 302 tank volume 400

Additional heater electric 140, 141 fuel-driven 140

Adjusting the steering wheel 87

Airbag activating/deactivating, PACOS 36 driver's side 34 passenger side 35, 36

AIRBAG 34, 35

Airbag system 33 warning symbol 32

Air cleaning material 125 passenger compartment 123, 124, 125

Air conditioning 131

Air conditioning, fluid volume and grade 400

Air conditioning system repair 351

Air distribution 125 Recirculation 133 table 134

Air quality system IAQS 124

Alarm 177, 178, 179 alarm indicator 178

alarm signals 179 automatic activation 179 automatic re-arming 178 checking the alarm 161 reduced alarm level 180 remote control key not working 179

Allergy and asthma inducing substances. 124

Approach lighting 102, 160

Automatic car washes 376

Automatic gearbox 274 manual gear positions (Geartronic) 275 towing and recovery 314 trailer 307

Automatic relocking 170

B

Backrest 83 front seat, lowering 83 rear seat, folding 86

Bag holder 150 folding 151

Battery 271, 294, 362 jump starting 271 maintenance 362 overload 294 remote control key/PCC 164

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

412

start 362 support 365 symbols on the battery 364 warning symbols 364

BLIS 237, 238

Bonnet, opening 345

Book service and repair 340

Brake and clutch fluid 350

Brake fluid grade and volume 398

Brake light 98

Brakes 289, 290 Anti-lock braking system, ABS 290 brake light 98 brake system 289, 290 Emergency Brake Assistance, EBA 291 filling brake fluid 350 handbrake 291 symbols in the combined instrument panel 289

bulbs, specifications 358

C

Camera sensor 222, 234

Car care 376 Leather upholstery 380

Cargo area cargo net 152 lighting 101 loading 148 mounting points 150 parcel shelf 153

Car key memory 157

Car upholstery 380

Car washing 376

Catalytic converter 300 Recovery 314

Changing wheels 325

Checking the engine oil level 347

Children child safety locks 45 child seat and airbag 52 child seats and side airbags 38 location in car 52 safety 45

Child safety locks 176

Child seat ISOFIX fixture system for child seats 53

Child seats 45 recommended 47 size classes for child seats with ISOFIX fixture system 53 types 55 upper mounting points for child seats 57

City Safety 220

Cleaning automatic car wash 376 car washing 376 rims 377 seatbelts 380 upholstery 380

Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) 124

Climate control actual temperature 123 auto-regulation 130 general 122 personal preferences 125 sensors 123 temperature control 131

Clock, adjustment 75

CO2 emissions 402

Collision 41

Collision warning 227, 228

Collision warning system function 228 general limitations 233 operation 231 Pedestrian detection 230 Radar sensor 214, 221

Collision Warning System with Auto Brake 227

Colour code, paint 381

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

413

Combined instrument panel 66, 67

Compass 109 calibration 110

Condensation in headlamps 376

Controls lighting 89

Control symbols 67, 69

Coolant volume and grade 396

Coolant, checking and filling 349

Cooling system 293 overheating 293

Corner Traction Control 185

Crash, see Collision 41

Cruise control 192 deactivate 197 managing speed 193 resume set speed 196 temporary deactivation 195

CTA Cross Traffic Alert 239

Cyclist detection 229

CZIP (Clear Zone Interior Package) 124

D

Daytime running lights 90

Deadlock 174 deactivation 174 temporary deactivation 175

Defroster 132

Detachable towbar storage 308

Diesel 298 run out of fuel 299

Diesel particle filter 301

Dimensions 387 Towbar 309

Dipstick, electronic 348

Direction indicator 99

Direction indicators 99

direction of rotation 319

Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor 277

Display lighting 89

Distance Warning 197 Limitations 199 Symbols and messages 200

Door mirrors 106 resetting 107

Drive mode ECO 287

Driver Alert Control 246 operation 247

Driver Alert System 245

Driving 294 cooling system 293 with the tailgate open 293

Driving in water 292

Driving with a trailer 305 towball load 389 towing capacity 389

E

ECC, electronic climate control 127

Eco Cruise 287

EcoGuide 70

Ecolabelling, FSC, owner's manual 25

ECO mode 287

Economical driving 304

ECO pressure 320, 410

Electrical socket 148 cargo area 151

Electrical system 367

Electronic climate control - ECC 127

Electronic temperature control - ETC 128

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

414

Emergency equipment first aid kit 330 warning triangle 329

Emergency puncture repair 332 action 334 inflating the tyres 337 rechecking 336

Emergency puncture repair kit location 332 overview 333 sealing fluid 333

Emissions of carbon dioxide 402

Engine deactivate 271 overheating 293 start 270 Start/Stop 279

Engine and passenger compartment heater messages 139 timer 138

Engine block heater 136

Engine block heater and passenger com- partment heater

direct start 137 immediate stop 138

Engine compartment Brake and clutch fluid 350 Check 346

coolant 349 Engine oil 346 overview 345

Engine drag control 185

Engine oil 346, 393 adverse driving conditions 393 filter 346 grade and volume 394

Engine oil, filling 347

Engine specifications 391

Error messages Adaptive Cruise Control 212 Driver Alert Control 248 LKA 253 see Messages and symbols 212

Error messages in BLIS 241

ETC, electronic temperature control 128

Ethanol content 297

Exhaust system 301

External dimensions 387

F

Fan ECC 130 ETC 130

Fault tracing for the camera sensor 223

First aid 330

First aid kit 330

Fluids, capacities 361, 396, 397, 398, 399, 400

Fluids and oils 396, 397, 398, 400

Fog lamp rear 98

Foot brake 289, 290

Front bulbs location 352

Front seat head restraint 83

FSC, ecolabelling 25

Fuel 297, 298 fuel consumption 402 fuel economy 320 fuel filter 299 identifier 297, 298

Fuel-driven heater timer 138

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

415

Fuelling 174, 300 filling 296 filling with reserve fuel can 300 fuel filler flap 295 fuel filler flap, locking 174 fuel filler flap, manual opening 296

Fuel tank volume 399

Fuse box 367

Fuses changing 367 General 367 in engine compartment 368 under glovebox 371 under the right-hand front seat 374

G

Gearbox 273 automatic 274 manual 273

Gear selector inhibitor 277

Gear selector inhibitor, mechanical disen- gagement 277

Gear shift indicator 274

Geartronic 275

Glass laminated/reinforced 25

Glass roof, power operated roller blind 109

Glovebox 147 locking 172

Gross vehicle weight 388

GSI - Gear selector assistance 274

H

Handbrake 291

Hazard warning flashers 99

Headlamp beam adaptation 95 height adjustment 89

Headlamp control 88

Headlamp levelling of headlamps 89

Headlamp pattern, adjusting 95

Headlamp pattern adjustment 95

Headlamps 353

head restraint centre seat, rear 85 front seat 83 lowering 85

Heating rearview and door mirrors 107 rear window 107 seats 129 windscreen 107

Heat-reflecting windscreen 20

High engine temperature 293

High-pressure headlamp washing 104

Hill Start Assist 278

Home safe light duration 102

Horn 88

I

IAQS - Interior Air Quality System 124

Immobiliser 159

Indicator symbols 71

Inflatable curtain 39

Information button, PCC 161

Information display 66, 67

Inlaid mats 147

Instrument lighting 89

Instrument overview left-hand drive car 60 right-hand drive car 63

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

416

Instruments and controls 60, 63

Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) Air cleaning 124

Interior lighting 100

Interior rearview mirror 108 automatic dimming 108

Intermittent wiping 103

Internet-connected car book service and repair 340

J

Jack 330

Journey statistics 120

Jump starting 271

K

Kerb weight 388

Key 156, 158

Key blade 163, 164

Keyless drive 165, 166, 167, 168, 169, 270

Keyless - locking 167

Keyless start (keyless drive) 165, 166, 167, 168, 169, 270

Keyless - unlocking 168

Keypad in the steering wheel 87

Key positions 80

L

Labels location 384

Laminated glass 25

Lamps 351

Lane assistance operation 251

Lane Keeping Aid - LKA 249

Laser sensor 224

Leather upholstery, washing instructions 380

Lifting tool 330

Light indications, PCC 161

Lighting active bending lights 94 approach lighting 102, 160 automatic lighting, passenger compart- ment 101 Automatic main beam 92 bulbs, specifications 358 controls 88, 100 controls lighting 89

daytime running lights 90 display lighting 89 headlamp levelling 89 home safe lighting 102 instrument lighting 89 in the passenger compartment 100 main/dipped beam 91 position lamps 90 rear fog lamp 98 tunnel detection 91

Lighting, bulb replacement 351 daytime running lights 356 dipped beam (cars with halogen head- lamps) 354 direction indicators, front 355 front position lamp 355 main beam (cars with halogen head- lamps) 355 rear bulb holder: direction indicators, brake lamps and reversing lamps 357 rear fog lamp 357 vanity mirror 358

LKA - Lane Keeping Aid 249

Loading cargo area 148, 150 General 148, 150 long load 149 mounting points 150 roof load 150

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

417

Lock locking 170 manual locking 170 unlocking 170, 171

Lockable wheel bolts 323

Lock confirmation 158

Lock indicator 158, 178

Locking/unlocking inside 171 tailgate 172

M

Main/dipped beam 91

Main beam, automatic activation 92

maintenance Rustproofing 379

Manual gearbox 273 GSI - Gear selector assistance 274 Towing and recovery 313 trailer 307

Manual gear positions (Geartronic) 275

Max. roof load 388

Memory function in seat 84

Menus Combined instrument panel 110 menu overview, analogue 111 menu overview, digital 111

Messages 113

Messages and symbols Adaptive Cruise Control 212 Collision Warning with Auto Brake 226, 235 Driver Alert Control 248 Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater 139 LKA 253

Messages in BLIS 241

Messages in the information display 112

Meters fuel gauge 66, 67 speedometer 66, 67 tachometer 66, 67

Mileage 114

misting attending to the windows 122

Misting condensation in headlamps 376

Mood lighting 101

MY CAR 113

O

octane rating 297

Oil, see also Engine oil 393, 394

Oil level low 347

Option/accessory 16

Output 391

outside temperature gauge 75

Overheating 293, 305

Owner's manual, ecolabelling 25

P

PACOS 36

Paintwork colour code 381 damage and touch-up 381

Panic function 160

PAP - Active Park Assist 262

Parcel shelf 153

Park Assist 254 backward 255 fault indicator 257 function 254 parking assistance sensors 257

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

418

Park assist camera 258 settings 261

Parking brake 291

Passenger compartment filter 124

Passenger compartment heater 136

Passenger compartment lighting automatic 101

PCC Personal Car Communicator functions 160 range 162

Pedestrian airbag 43 folding up 45 moving the car 44

Pedestrian detection 227

Personal Car Communicator 162

Petrol grade 297

Pocket park assist - PAP 262

Polishing 378

Position lamp 90

Power guide 70

Power operated roller blind for glass roof 109

Power seat 84

Power windows 104 resetting 106

Puncture 332

Q

Queue Assist 208

Queue assistance 208

R

Radar sensor 202 Limitations 214

Rain sensor 103

Raising the car 343

Rear bulbs location 356

Rear seat Heating 129

Rearview and door mirrors compass 109 door 106 electrically retractable 107 heating 107 interior 108

Rear window heating 107

Recommendations during driving 294

Recommended child seats table 47

Recovery 315

Refrigerant 351

Refuelling AdBlue 303

Regeneration 301

Remote control immobiliser 159

Remote control key 156, 157, 158 battery replacement 164 detachable key blade 163, 164 functions 160 loss 156 range 161, 166

Remote control key system, type approval 180

Remote control key with PCC range 162

Resetting, trip meter 117, 119

Resetting the door mirrors 107

Resetting the power windows 106

Retractable power door mirrors 107

Reverse gear inhibitor 273

Road sign information 242 Limitations 245 operation 243

Roof load, max. weight 388

Rustproofing 379

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

419

S

Safety lock children 45

Safety mode 41 moving the car 43 start attempt 42

Sealing fluid 333

Seat, see Seats 82

Seatbelt 28 loosen 30 pregnancy 30 putting on 29 rear seat 31 seatbelt reminder 31 seatbelt tensioner 31

Seatbelt reminder 31

Seatbelt tensioner 31

Seats 82 head restraints, rear 85 heating 129 Heating 129 lowering the front backrest 83 lowering the rear backrest 86 power 84

Securing loads (Loading) 150

Sensus 79

Service position 359

Service programme 340

Set time interval 198

Side airbag SIPS 38

SIPS airbag 38

Skidding 295

slippery driving conditions 295

Soot filter 301

SOOT FILTER FULL 301

spare wheel 324, 325 installation 328 taking out 325

Speed limiter 189 alarm for speed exceeded 192 deactivation 192 getting started 189, 190 temporary deactivation 191

Speed ratings, tyres 322

Spin control 184

Stability and traction control system 184

Stability system 184

Stains 380

Start/Stop 279 function and operation 279 the engine does not stop 281

Starter battery changing 364

Steering force, speed related 184

Steering force level, see Steering force 184

Steering lock 271

Steering wheel 87 keypad 87 steering wheel adjustment 87

Stickers location 384

Stone chips and scratches 381

Storage spaces driver's side 146 glovebox 147 tunnel console 146

Storage spaces in the passenger compart- ment 144

Support 15

Support battery 365

Switching off the engine 271

Symbols indicator symbols 67, 69, 71 warning symbols 67, 69

Symbols and messages Adaptive Cruise Control 212 Collision Warning with Auto Brake 226, 235 Driver Alert Control 248 LKA 253

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

420

T

Tailgate Locking/unlocking 172

Temperature actual temperature 123

Temperature control 131

Total airing function 122, 172

Towbar 308 specifications 309

Towbar - detachable attachment/removal 310

Towing 313 towing eye 314

Towing bracket 308

Towing capacity and towball load 389

Towing eye 314

Traction control 184

Trailer 305 cable 305, 306 driving with a trailer 305 snaking 312

Trailer stability assist 185

Trailer Stability Assist 312

Transmission 273

Transmission oil volume and grade 397

Transponder 20

Tread depth 324

Tread wear indicators 320

Trip computer 114, 118, 120 analogue instrument panel 116

Trip meter 75, 114

Trip meter, resetting 117, 119

Troubleshooting Adaptive Cruise Control 211

TSA - trailer stability assist 185, 312

Tunnel console 146 12 V socket 148 armrest 146

Tunnel detection 91

Type approval radar system 216 radio equipment 219 remote control key system 180

Type designations 384

Tyre dimension 321

Tyre load index 322

Tyre monitoring 330

Tyre pressure label 320

Tyre pressure monitoring 330

Tyres dimensions 406, 408 direction of rotation 319 maintenance 318 pressure 320, 410 puncture repair 332 specifications 406, 408, 410 tread depth 324 tread wear indicators 320 tyre pressure monitoring 330 winter tyres 324

U

Unlocking from the inside 171 from the outside 170

Unlocking with the key blade 168

V

Vanity mirror 147 lighting 101

Ventilation 125

Vibration damper 308

Volvo ID 20

Volvo Sensus 79

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

421

W

Warning lamp Adaptive Cruise Control 202 collision warning system 231 stability and traction control system 184

Warning lamps Airbags SRS 73 alternator not charging 73 Fault in brake system 73 Low oil pressure 73 Parking brake applied 73 seatbelt reminder 31, 73 Warning 73

Warning sound collision warning system 231

Warning symbols 67, 69, 73

Warning triangle 329

Washer fluid 361

Washers rear window 104 washer fluid, filling 361 windscreen 103

Water and dirt-repellent coating 379

Water-repellent surface, cleaning 379

Waxing 378

Weights kerb weight 388

Wheel bolts 323 lockable 323

Wheel change 326

Wheel rim, dimensions 321

Wheel rims cleaning 377

Wheels removal 326 snow chains 324 spare wheel 324

Wheels and tyres 324 approved dimensions 406 tyre load index and speed rating 408

Whiplash injury, WHIPS 39

WHIPS child seat/booster cushion 39 seating position 40 whiplash protection 39

Windows, rearview and door mirrors 379

Windscreen heating 107, 132

Windscreen washing 103

Windscreen wiper 102 rain sensor 103

Winter driving 295

Winter tyres 324

Winter wheels 324

Wiper blades 359 changing 360 Cleaning 361 replacing, rear window 361 Service position 359

Wipers and washing 102

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

422

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the V40 Volvo works, you can view and download the Volvo V40 2019 Owners Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Volvo V40 as well as other Volvo manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Volvo V40. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Volvo V40 2019 Owners Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Volvo V40 2019 Owners Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Volvo V40 2019 Owners Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Volvo V40 2019 Owners Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Volvo V40 2019 Owners Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.